Epson Printer 7600 Users Manual StylusPro7600_9600_A

9600 to the manual 0c571298-6899-4cf2-95ab-2b8a3cf7f957

2015-01-23

: Epson Epson-Epson-Printer-7600-Users-Manual-251537 epson-epson-printer-7600-users-manual-251537 epson pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 322

DownloadEpson Epson-Epson-Printer-7600-Users-Manual- StylusPro7600_9600_A  Epson-epson-printer-7600-users-manual
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
SERVICE MANUAL

Color Large Format Inkjet Printer

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

®

SEIJ01017

Notice:
„ All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
„ The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
„ All effort have been made to ensure the accuracy of the contents of this manual. However, should any errors be detected, SEIKO EPSON would greatly
appreciate being informed of them.
„ The above not withstanding SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION can assume no responsibility for any errors in this manual or the consequences thereof.
EPSON is a registered trademark of SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.

General Notice:

Other product names used herein are for identification purpose only and may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners. EPSON disclaims any and all rights in those marks.

Copyright © 2002 SEIKO EPSON CORPORATION.
Imaging & Information Product Division
TPCS Quality Assurance Department

PRECAUTIONS
Precautionary notations throughout the text are categorized relative to 1)Personal injury and 2) damage to equipment.

DANGER

Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in serious or fatal personal injury. Great caution should be exercised in
performing procedures preceded by DANGER Headings.

WARNING

Signals a precaution which, if ignored, could result in damage to equipment.

The precautionary measures itemized below should always be observed when performing repair/maintenance procedures.

DANGER
1. ALWAYS DISCONNECT THE PRODUCT FROM THE POWER SOURCE AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES PERFORMING ANY MAINTENANCE
OR REPAIR PROCEDURES.
2. NO WORK SHOULD BE PERFORMED ON THE UNIT BY PERSONS UNFAMILIAR WITH BASIC SAFETY MEASURES AS DICTATED FOR
ALL ELECTRONICS TECHNICIANS IN THEIR LINE OF WORK.
3. WHEN PERFORMING TESTING AS DICTATED WITHIN THIS MANUAL, DO NOT CONNECT THE UNIT TO A POWER SOURCE UNTIL
INSTRUCTED TO DO SO. WHEN THE POWER SUPPLY CABLE MUST BE CONNECTED, USE EXTREME CAUTION IN WORKING ON
POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

WARNING
1. REPAIRS ON EPSON PRODUCT SHOULD BE PERFORMED ONLY BY AN EPSON CERTIFIED REPAIR TECHNICIAN.
2. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE SOURCE VOLTAGES IS THE SAME AS THE RATED VOLTAGE, LISTED ON THE SERIAL NUMBER/RATING
PLATE. IF THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS A PRIMARY AC RATING DIFFERENT FROM AVAILABLE POWER SOURCE, DO NOT CONNECT IT
TO THE POWER SOURCE.
3. ALWAYS VERIFY THAT THE EPSON PRODUCT HAS BEEN DISCONNECTED FROM THE POWER SOURCE BEFORE REMOVING OR
REPLACING PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS AND/OR INDIVIDUAL CHIPS.
4. IN ORDER TO PROTECT SENSITIVE MICROPROCESSORS AND CIRCUITRY, USE STATIC DISCHARGE EQUIPMENT, SUCH AS ANTISTATIC WRIST STRAPS, WHEN ACCESSING INTERNAL COMPONENTS.
5. REPLACE MALFUNCTIONING COMPONENTS ONLY WITH THOSE COMPONENTS BY THE MANUFACTURE; INTRODUCTION OF
SECOND-SOURCE ICs OR OTHER NON-APPROVED COMPONENTS MAY DAMAGE THE PRODUCT AND VOID ANY APPLICABLE EPSON
WARRANTY.

About This Manual
This manual describes basic functions, theory of electrical and mechanical operations, maintenance and repair procedures of the printer. The instructions and procedures included
herein are intended for the experienced repair technicians, and attention should be given to the precautions on the preceding page.

Manual Configuration
This manual consists of six chapters and Appendix.
CHAPTER 1.PRODUCT DESCRIPTIONS
Provides a general overview and specifications of the product.
CHAPTER 2.OPERATING PRINCIPLES
Describes the theory of electrical and mechanical operations of
the product.
CHAPTER 3.TROUBLESHOOTING
Describes the step-by-step procedures for the troubleshooting.
CHAPTER 4.DISASSEMBLY / ASSEMBLY
Describes the step-by-step procedures for disassembling and
assembling the product.
CHAPTER 5.ADJUSTMENT
Provides Epson-approved methods for adjustment.
CHAPTER 6.MAINTENANCE
Provides preventive maintenance procedures and the lists of
Epson-approved lubricants and adhesives required for servicing
the product.
APPENDIX Provides the following additional information for reference:
• Connector pin assignments
• Electric circuit boards components layout
• Electrical circuit boards schematics
• Exploded diagram & Parts List

Symbols Used in this Manual
Various symbols are used throughout this manual either to provide additional
information on a specific topic or to warn of possible danger present during a
procedure or an action. Be aware of all symbols when they are used, and
always read NOTE, CAUTION, or WARNING messages.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to keep the product’s quality.

Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to,
or destruction of, equipment.

May indicate an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that is necessary to accomplish a task efficiently. It may
also provide additional information that is related to a specific
subject, or comment on the results achieved through a previous
action.
Indicates an operating or maintenance procedure, practice or
condition that, if not strictly observed, could result in injury or loss
of life.

Revision Status
Revision

Date of Issue

A

May 10, 2002

Description

First release

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Contents
Chapter 1 Product Description

1.2.11.2 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 9600 .................................. 29

1.1 Product Description ............................................................................................ 12
1.1.1 Features ...................................................................................................... 12
1.1.2 Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro 9600 ...................... 13
1.2 Basic Specifications ............................................................................................
1.2.1 Print Specifications ....................................................................................
1.2.2 Character Specification ..............................................................................
1.2.3 Control Code ..............................................................................................
1.2.4 Paper Feed .................................................................................................
1.2.5 Paper Specifications ...................................................................................
1.2.5.1 Roll Paper ...........................................................................................
1.2.5.2 Sheet ...................................................................................................
1.2.5.3 Special Paper ......................................................................................
1.2.6 Mechanism Specifications .........................................................................
1.2.6.1 Printable Area .....................................................................................
1.2.6.2 Paper Set Lever ..................................................................................
1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification ..........................................................................
1.2.6.4 Acoustic Noise ...................................................................................
1.2.7 Electrical Specifications (TBD) .................................................................
1.2.8 Reliability ..................................................................................................
1.2.8.1 Total Print Volume .............................................................................
1.2.8.2 Print Head Life ...................................................................................
1.2.8.3 Maintenance Tank Life ......................................................................
1.2.8.4 Cutter Life average .............................................................................
1.2.8.5 Maintenance Parts (TBD) ...................................................................
1.2.9 Ambient Conditions ...................................................................................
1.2.9.1 Temperature/Humidity .......................................................................
1.2.9.2 Vibration .............................................................................................
1.2.9.3 Shock ..................................................................................................
1.2.9.4 Surrounding Space .............................................................................
1.2.10 Overall Dimensions .................................................................................
1.2.11 Accessories ..............................................................................................
1.2.11.1 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 7600 ..................................

14
14
14
14
14
15
15
16
18
21
21
22
22
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
26
28
28

1.3 External View and Parts Names ......................................................................... 30
1.4 Operating Panel ..................................................................................................
1.4.1 Buttons and Functions ...............................................................................
1.4.1.1 Functions of Buttons ..........................................................................
1.4.1.2 LEDs ...................................................................................................
1.4.2 Indications on the Panel .............................................................................
1.4.2.1 lED Indications in Normal Mode .......................................................
1.4.2.2 LCD Indications in Normal Mode .....................................................
1.4.3 SelecType ..................................................................................................
1.4.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................
1.4.3.2 Panel Setting Menu Item ....................................................................
1.4.3.3 PG Setting ..........................................................................................
1.4.3.4 Page Lines ..........................................................................................
1.4.3.5 Interface Select ...................................................................................
1.4.3.6 Code Page Switching .........................................................................
1.4.3.7 Roll Paper Margin ..............................................................................
1.4.3.8 Detect Paper Width ............................................................................
1.4.3.9 Detect Skew Error ..............................................................................
1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting .........................................................................
1.4.3.11 No margin print setting ....................................................................
1.4.3.12 Cutter position adjustment ...............................................................
1.4.3.13 Auto margin refresh .........................................................................
1.4.3.14 Panel Setup Value Initialization .......................................................
1.4.3.15 Nozzle Check Pattern Printing .........................................................
1.4.3.16 Status Printing ..................................................................................
1.4.3.17 Job Information Print .......................................................................
1.4.3.18 Firmware version ..............................................................................
1.4.3.19 Printable pages of each ink cartridge ...............................................
1.4.3.20 Ink remaining ...................................................................................
1.4.3.21 Maintenance tank count ...................................................................
1.4.3.22 Use counter .......................................................................................
1.4.3.23 Clear use counter ..............................................................................
1.4.3.24 Job history display ............................................................................

31
31
31
32
33
33
34
35
35
36
40
41
41
41
41
42
42
42
43
44
44
45
45
46
48
49
49
49
49
50
50
50

6

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
1.4.3.25 Job history clear ................................................................................
1.4.3.26 Total prints .......................................................................................
1.4.3.27 Consumables life ..............................................................................
1.4.3.28 Suction adjustment for paper setting and indicator display .............
1.4.3.29 Ink remaining indicator display ........................................................
1.4.3.30 Job information .................................................................................
1.4.3.31 User Paper Setting ............................................................................
1.4.3.32 Power cleaning .................................................................................
1.4.3.33 Cutter Blade Replacement ................................................................
1.4.3.34 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) ................
1.4.3.35 BK ink cartridge replacement ...........................................................
1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1 .................................................................................
1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2 .................................................................................
1.4.6 Paper feeding adjustment conversion table ...............................................
1.4.7 Firmware Reload .......................................................................................
1.4.7.1 Reload from ROM-DIMM .................................................................
1.4.7.2 Reload with F/W DOWNLOAD mode ..............................................
1.4.7.3 Installation with service utility (F/W Update function) .....................
1.4.7.4 Compulsory start F/W DOWNLOAD mode ......................................
1.4.8 Function to prevent irregular printing ........................................................
1.4.9 Initialization ...............................................................................................
1.4.9.1 Hardware initialization .......................................................................
1.4.9.2 Software initialization ........................................................................
1.4.9.3 Panel initialization ..............................................................................
1.4.10 Default Setup Values ...............................................................................
1.4.10.1 Initial Setting for Operation .............................................................
1.4.10.2 Ink Type Setting ...............................................................................
1.4.10.3 MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes ......
1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table ...................................................

Revision A
50
50
51
53
54
55
56
60
60
60
64
66
70
84
85
85
85
85
85
86
86
86
86
86
87
87
87
88
89

1.5 Controller ............................................................................................................ 90
1.6 Interfaces ............................................................................................................
1.6.1 Parallel Interface ........................................................................................
1.6.1.1 Compatibility Mode ...........................................................................
1.6.1.2 Nibble Mode .......................................................................................
1.6.1.3 ECP Mode ..........................................................................................
1.6.2 USB interface .............................................................................................
1.6.3 Optional Interface ......................................................................................
1.6.4 Supplements ...............................................................................................

91
91
91
93
94
95
96
97

1.7 Optional Units and Consumables ....................................................................... 98

1.7.1 Ink Cartridge ..............................................................................................
1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge ......................................................................................
1.7.3 Draining cartridge ......................................................................................
1.7.4 Maintenance Tank .....................................................................................

98
99
99
99

Chapter 2 Operating Principles
2.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 101
2.2 Print Mechanism Components .........................................................................
2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism .......................................................................
2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly ..............................................................................
2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism ...............................................................................
2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism ............................................................................
2.2.5 Others .......................................................................................................

102
103
113
115
117
118

2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board ...................................................................... 119
2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board ........................................................... 120

Chapter 3 Troubleshooting
3.1 Outline .............................................................................................................. 122
3.1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................. 122
3.2 Error Display ....................................................................................................
3.2.1 Errors .......................................................................................................
3.2.1.1 Error Indications on LCD .................................................................
3.2.1.2 Warning Indications on LCD ...........................................................
3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors ................................................................
3.2.2 Errors .......................................................................................................
3.2.2.1 Paper End/End of roll .......................................................................
3.2.2.2 Wrong paper source is selected on panel .........................................
3.2.2.3 Paper set lever is released during operation .....................................
3.2.2.4 Paper set lever is released .................................................................
3.2.2.5 Paper Jam .........................................................................................
3.2.2.6 Front Cover Open .............................................................................
3.2.2.7 Type-B I/F error ...............................................................................
3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error ............................................................................
3.2.2.9 Paper Not Straight ............................................................................
3.2.2.10 Paper check error/Paper eject error (sheet) ....................................
3.2.2.11 Paper is too thick for cleaning ........................................................
3.2.2.12 Not enough ink for cleaning ...........................................................

123
123
123
124
125
126
126
126
126
127
127
127
128
128
128
129
129
129

7

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600
3.2.2.13 Ink-related Errors ........................................................................... 130
3.2.2.14 Defective ink cartridge ................................................................... 130
3.2.2.15 Ink lever released ............................................................................ 130
3.2.2.16 Illegal ink cartridge ........................................................................ 131
3.2.2.17 Maintenance tank full ..................................................................... 131
3.2.2.18 No Maintenance tank ...................................................................... 131
3.2.2.19 Wrong IK designation .................................................................... 131
3.2.2.20 Fatal Error ....................................................................................... 131
3.2.3 Troubleshooting for Warning .................................................................. 132
3.2.3.1 Ink Low ............................................................................................ 132
3.2.3.2 Maintenance tank full warning ......................................................... 132
3.2.3.3 Maintenance request ......................................................................... 132
3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors .................................................. 134
3.2.4.1 CR motor life (00000101) ................................................................ 134
3.2.4.2 PF motor encoder check error (00010000) ....................................... 135
3.2.4.3 PF Motor out of step (00010001) ..................................................... 135
3.2.4.4 PF motor overcurrent (00010002) .................................................... 136
3.2.4.5 PF motor in-position time out (00010003) ....................................... 136
3.2.4.6 CR motor encoder check error (00010004) ...................................... 137
3.2.4.7 CR motor out of step (00010005) ..................................................... 137
3.2.4.8 CR motor overcurrent (00010006) ................................................... 138
3.2.4.9 CR motor in-position time-out (00010007) ...................................... 138
3.2.4.10 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out (00010008) ............................. 139
3.2.4.11 System interrupt watchdog time-out (00010009) ........................... 139
3.2.4.12 CR home position sensor error (0001000A) .................................. 139
3.2.4.13 PF home position sensor error (0001000B) ................................... 139
3.2.4.14 Head slide (PG) home position sensor error (0001000C) .............. 140
3.2.4.15 CR motor PWM output faulty (0001000F) .................................... 140
3.2.4.16 PF motor PWM output faulty (00010010) ..................................... 141
3.2.4.17 Head driver (TG) temperature error (0001001B) ........................... 141
3.2.4.18 CR servo parameter error (0001001D) ........................................... 142
3.2.4.19 PF servo parameter error (0001001E) ............................................ 142
3.2.4.20 CSIC reed/right error (00010020) .................................................. 143
3.2.4.21 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) (00010022) ............... 143
3.2.4.22 RTC analysis error (00010023) ...................................................... 143
3.2.4.23 CSIC ROM communication error (00010025) ............................... 144
3.2.4.24 RTC communication error (00010026) .......................................... 144
3.2.4.25 Head error (00010028) ................................................................... 144
3.2.4.26 Unidentified NMI (00010029) ....................................................... 144
3.2.4.27 CR ASIC ECU error (0001002A) .................................................. 144

Revision A
3.2.4.28 PF ASIC ECU error (0001002B) ...................................................
3.2.4.29 NVRAM error (00020000) .............................................................
3.2.4.30 SDRAM error (00020002) .............................................................
3.2.4.31 BOOT program SUM error (00020003) ........................................
3.2.4.32 Flash memory SUM error (00020009) ...........................................
3.2.4.33 Program load error (0002000A) .....................................................
3.2.4.34 Internal memory shortage error (0002000B) .................................
3.2.4.35 Review error (0002000C) ...............................................................
3.2.4.36 CPU address error (load misalignment) (100000E0) .................
3.2.4.37 CPU address error (storage misalignment) (10000100) .................
3.2.4.38 CPU reserve command code exception error (10000180) .............
3.2.4.39 CPU slot illegal command exception error (100001A0) ................
3.2.4.40 CPU DMA address error (100005C0) ............................................
3.2.4.41 CPU error (10000xxx) ....................................................................

144
144
145
145
145
145
145
146
146
146
146
146
146
146

3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout .........................................................
3.3.1 Dot Missing .............................................................................................
3.3.2 Uneven Printing/Poor Resolution ............................................................
3.3.3 Smudged or Marred Printout (Front) .......................................................
3.3.4 Smudged or Marred Printout (Reverse side) ...........................................
3.3.5 White or Black Banding in the carriage running direction ......................
3.3.6 Banding in the paper feed direction .........................................................

147
147
148
148
149
149
150

Chapter 4 Disassembly & Assembly
4.1 Summary ..........................................................................................................
4.1.1 Precautions ...............................................................................................
4.1.2 Tools ........................................................................................................
4.1.3 Screw List ................................................................................................
4.1.4 Disassembly Flow ....................................................................................

152
152
155
155
156

4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing ............................................................
4.2.1 Panel Unit ................................................................................................
4.2.2 R Side Cover ............................................................................................
4.2.3 L Side Cover ............................................................................................
4.2.4 I/H Cover .................................................................................................
4.2.5 H Top Cover ............................................................................................
4.2.6 Rear Cover ...............................................................................................
4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 ........................................................................................
4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover .....................................................................................
4.2.9 Front Cover ..............................................................................................

158
159
160
163
164
165
166
168
169
170

8

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism ..............................
4.3.1 Print Head ................................................................................................
4.3.2 Damper ASSY .........................................................................................
4.3.3 CR Board ASSY ......................................................................................
4.3.4 Cutter Section ..........................................................................................
4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY .........................................................................
4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid .................................................................................
4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY .......................................................................
4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY ...........................................................................
4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY ......................................................................................
4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY ..................................................................
4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY ..............................................................................
4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) ........................................................

171
171
173
174
175
175
177
178
179
180
182
183
184

4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism ...................................
4.4.1 PF Motor ..................................................................................................
4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY .......................................................................
4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale ...........................................
4.4.3.1 Assembly Procedure for the PF Loop Scale ASSY .........................
4.4.3.2 PF Loop Scale ASSY Affixing Procedure .......................................
4.4.4 Suction Fans .............................................................................................
4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY .....................................
4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY ...........................................................................

185
185
186
187
187
188
189
190
191

4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism ...................................
4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board ................................................................................
4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY ............................................................................
4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY ................................................................................

192
192
193
197

4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism ......................................
4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal ..................................................................
4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY ..................................................................................
4.6.3 Cap ASSY ................................................................................................
4.6.4 Pump ASSY .............................................................................................
4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) ..............................................................................
4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY ................................................................................

198
199
200
200
201
203
204

4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards .................................................
4.7.1 Power Supply Board ................................................................................
4.7.2 AC Inlet ...................................................................................................
4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) ....................................................................
4.7.4 DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment ..................

205
205
206
207
209

Chapter 5 Adjustment
5.1 Overview ..........................................................................................................
5.1.1 Cautions ...................................................................................................
5.1.2 Adjustment Tools ....................................................................................
5.1.3 Procedure for Adjustment Work ..............................................................
5.1.4 Adjustment Items .....................................................................................
5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment .....................................................................
5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment ...................................................................
5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment ......................................................................
5.1.4.4 PF Motor Adjustment .......................................................................
5.1.4.5 P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment ................................................
5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment ................................................
5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment .....................
5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment ...........................................
5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment .....................................................
5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment ..........................................
5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment ...................
5.1.4.12 Damper ASSY Adjustment ............................................................
5.1.4.13 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Adjustment .........................................
5.1.4.14 Battery ............................................................................................
5.1.5 Parameter Backup ....................................................................................
5.1.5.1 Parameter Backup Procedure ...........................................................
5.1.5.2 Work Procedure ................................................................................
5.1.5.3 Others ...............................................................................................
5.1.6 Firmware Reinstallation ..........................................................................
5.1.6.1 Firmware Installation through ROM-DIMM ...................................
5.1.6.2 Firmware Installation through Interface ...........................................

211
211
211
212
212
212
213
214
214
215
215
215
215
216
216
217
217
217
217
218
218
218
218
219
219
219

5.2 Self-diagnostic Function ...................................................................................
5.2.1 Overview .................................................................................................
5.2.1.1 How to Start Self-diagnostic Function .............................................
5.2.1.2 Functions of Keys during Self-diagnosis .........................................
5.2.1.3 Top Menu .........................................................................................
5.2.2 Test ..........................................................................................................
5.2.2.1 Version .............................................................................................
5.2.2.2 Control Panel ....................................................................................
5.2.2.3 Sensors .............................................................................................
5.2.2.4 Encoder .............................................................................................
5.2.2.5 Fan ....................................................................................................
5.2.2.6 Record ..............................................................................................

220
220
220
220
221
222
223
223
224
225
225
226

9

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

5.2.2.7 CSIC ................................................................................................. 227
5.2.2.8 Actuator ............................................................................................ 229
5.2.2.9 Actuator 2 ......................................................................................... 229
5.2.3 Adjustment ............................................................................................... 230
5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment ........................................................................ 231
5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment ....................................................................... 232
5.2.3.3 Input Rank ........................................................................................ 233
5.2.3.4 Write D/A Value .............................................................................. 236
5.2.3.5 Check Nozzle ................................................................................... 237
5.2.3.6 Check Skew ...................................................................................... 238
5.2.3.7 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment ................................................ 239
5.2.3.8 Top & Bottom Adjustment ............................................................... 242
5.2.3.9 Rear Sensor Position ........................................................................ 243
5.2.3.10 Platen Position (Sponge Position) Adjustment .............................. 244
5.2.3.11 Platen Position Checking ................................................................ 245
5.2.3.12 Head Slant Checking ...................................................................... 246
5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) ............ 248
5.2.3.14 Parameter Copying ......................................................................... 251
5.2.3.15 Bi-D2 Adjustment (PG=0.7mm) .................................................... 251
5.2.3.16 Bi-D3 Adjustment (PG=2.1mm) .................................................... 251
5.2.3.17 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking ............... 252
5.2.3.18 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) ................................... 253
5.2.3.19 Test Pattern Printing ....................................................................... 255
5.2.3.20 Clean Head ..................................................................................... 256
5.2.3.21 Counter Clear ................................................................................. 257
5.2.4 Cleaning ................................................................................................... 259
5.2.5 Print .......................................................................................................... 259
5.2.6 Parameter ................................................................................................. 260
5.2.6.1 Parameter Initialize ........................................................................... 261
5.3 Mechanism Adjustment ....................................................................................
5.3.1 Overview ..................................................................................................
5.3.2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment ......................................................
5.3.3 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment .......................................................
5.3.4 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate Position Adjustment .
5.3.5 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment ..............................
5.3.6 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment ...............................
5.3.7 Cutter Positioning Adjustment ................................................................
5.3.7.1 Paper Cutting Position Check ...........................................................
5.3.8 PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment ..............................
5.3.9 USB ID Writing .......................................................................................

Chapter 6 Maintenance
6.1 Overview .......................................................................................................... 275
6.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Items and Product Life Information .................... 276
6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service Operations ...................... 279
6.2 Lubrication and Glue ........................................................................................ 280
6.2.1 Lubricating the CR Guide Rail ................................................................ 280

Chapter 7 Appendix
7.1 Connectors ........................................................................................................ 282
7.2 Component Layout ........................................................................................... 285
7.3 Circuit Diagrams .............................................................................................. 286
7.4 Exploded Diagrams .......................................................................................... 292
7.5 ASP List (Parts List) ......................................................................................... 317
7.5.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 .................................................................. 317
7.5.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 .................................................................. 320

263
263
263
264
265
267
268
269
271
272
273

10

1

CHAPTER

PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.1 Product Description

„ Stylus Pro 9600
Table 1-2. Throughput (Stylus Pro 9600)

1.1.1 Features
† Large Format
„ Stylus Pro 7600:
Stylus Pro 9600:

EPSON media

† Pigment ink / Dye ink
„ Pigment ink:
•
•
•

„

Users can select following blackish ink combinations.
Photo Black + Light Black
Matte Black + Light Black
Matte Black × 2
Dye ink:
2 black ink cartridges are installed.

† High-speed Throughput
„ Stylus Pro 7600

Quality

Resolution
(dpi)

Mode

Throughput
(A1 printing time)

Draft*1

360 × 180

Pseudo 4-color

2 min.

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D MF 240 cps

3/2 (BK×2*2)
min.

Doubleweight
Matte Paper

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D M/W(POL) 240 cps 5 min.

Quality

720 × 360

Bi-DFOL(POL)

9 min

Glossy Photo
Paper
Glossy PaperHeavy Weight

Speed

720 × 360

Bi-D 22POL 240 cps

8 min.

Quality

720 × 720

Bi-D 14POL 240 cps

13 min.

Adv.Photo

1440 × 720

Bi-D 4-pass 240 cps

25 min

Photo 2880

2880 × 1440

Bi-D 4-pass 190 cps

55 min

Plain Paper

Throughput
(A1 printing time)

Pseudo 4-color

3.5 min

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D MF 240 cps

6/3.5 (BK×2*2)
min.

Doubleweight
Matte Paper

Speed

360 × 360

Bi-D M/W(POL) 240 cps 9 min.

Quality

720 × 360

Bi-DFOL(POL)

17 min

Glossy Photo
Paper
Glossy PaperHeavy Weight

Speed

720 × 360

Bi-D 22POL 240 cps

14 min

Quality

720 × 720

Bi-D 14POL 240 cps

24 min

Adv.Photo

1440 × 720

Bi-D 4-pass 240 cps

46 min

Photo 2880

2880 × 1440

Bi-D 4-pass 190 cps

102 min

Note *1:

Color high-speed 360×180dpi mode (for POP, for all ink combinations of pigment/
dye)

*2:

Black double-speed mode (for CAD, supported with FW),
(It is switched automatically with 2 BK ink cartridge installation (dye/PPI) + M/W
OFF)

† Super High Quality

High image quality with 7-color ink, 2880×1440 dpi, and minimum 4pl various
layers.

† Low Running Cost
• Independent for each color and 110 ml ink cartridge
• Large capacity 220 ml ink cartridge as an option

† Paper Handling
•
•
•
•

Note *1:

Color high-speed 360×180dpi mode (for POP, for all ink combinations of pigment/
dye)

*2:

Black double-speed mode (for CAD, supported with FW),
(It is switched automatically with 2 BK ink cartridge installation (dye/PPI) + M/W
OFF)

Product Description

Mode

360 × 180

Table 1-1. Throughput (Stylus Pro 7600)
EPSON media

Resolution
(dpi)

Draft*1

Plain Paper

Max. 24 inch paper width, A1+ size supported
Max. 44 inch paper width, B0+ size supported

Quality

Support various media.
Automatic roll paper cutter, manual cutter
Automatic loading (cut sheet)
Borderless print for right and left

† Compatibility with other LFPs
Commands are upper compatible with Stylus Pro 10000, Stylus Pro 10000CF,
Stylus Pro 9000, Stylus Pro 9500, Stylus Pro 7000, and Stylus Pro 7500.

† The latest RIP technology
CPSI Pro software RIP

Product Description

12

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.1.2 Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro
9600
Table 1-3. Differences between Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro 9600
Item
Product
Specifications

Maximum paper
width
RAM capacity

Option

Take-up Reel Unit
220 ml ink
cartridge

Product Description

Stylus Pro 7600

Stylus Pro 9600

610mm
(About 24 inches /
A1+size supported)

1118m
(About 44 inches /
B0+size supported)

32MB (16Mbit×2)
(IC600/601 = not mounted)

64MB (16Mbit×4)

Not supported
(CN30 = not mounted)

Supported

Not supported

Supported

Product Description

13

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2 Basic Specifications

Table 1-5. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 9600)

1.2.1 Print Specifications
† Printing:

Horizontal resolution
(dpi)

Printable area

Maximum number
of printable dots

Printing speed

360

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

15762

240 cps

On-demand ink-jet

† Nozzle configuration:
„ Black:
192 nozzles (Black1, Black2, 96 nozzles each)
„ Color:
480 nozzles (cyan, magenta, light cyan, light magenta,
yellow, 96 nozzles each)
0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color

„ Nozzle pitch:

31524

240 cps

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

63048

240 cps

2880

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

126087

190 cps

† Character tables:

Bi-direction with logic seeking (high-speed return, high-speed skip only)

† Printing speed and printable area
„ Character mode

Stylus Pro 7600:
Stylus Pro 9600:
• Printing speed:
„ Graphic Mode

1112 mm (43.78 inches)

1.2.2 Character Specification

† Printing direction:

• Character quality:
• Character pitch:
• Printable area:

720
1440

2 international character sets
PC 437 (US, Standard Europe)
PC 850 (Multilingual)

NOTE: This specification is not described in the user's manual.

† Typeface:

high quality
10 cpi

Bit map LQ font:

237 characters (at 10 cpi) / 8,561 dots (360dpi)
437 characters (at 10 cpi) / 15,840 dots (360dpi)
240 cps max.

EPSON Courier 10 cpi

NOTE: This specifications is not described in the user's manual.

1.2.3 Control Code
† Control code:
ESC/P Raster
ESC/P3

Table 1-4. Graphics Modes (Stylus Pro 7600)
Horizontal resolution
(dpi)

Printable area

Maximum number
of printable dots

Printing speed

360

604 mm (24.16 inches)

8698

240 cps

1.2.4 Paper Feed
† Paper feeding:

Friction feed

† Line spacing:

1/6 inch or programmable at 1440 inch

† Paper path:

Roll paper/manual

† Feed speed:

6.35 mm paper feed: 215 ± 10 msec
(except front rush, back rush, and hold time)

720

604 mm (24.16 inches)

17395

240 cps

1440

604 mm (24.16 inches)

34790

240 cps

2880

604 mm (24.16 inches)

69581

190 cps

Product Description

NOTE: This specifications is not described in the user's manual.

Basic Specifications

14

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.5 Paper Specifications

PLAIN PAPER

1.2.5.1 Roll Paper

Trouble-free paper feeding is ensured only in the following specifications.

† Paper Size

ACCEPTABLE PAPER

Table 1-7. Acceptable Roll Paper Sizes (Plain Paper)

The printer accepts following plain paper and EPSON special paper. With any other
paper, proper paper feeding and satisfactory print quality are not ensured.

† Paper Size
Table 1-6. Acceptable Roll Paper Sizes (Acceptable Paper)
Core
2-inch core
3-inch core

Core
2-inch core

Model

3-inch core

Paper Size

Stylus Pro 7600

203mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 45 m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 45 m (H) *

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 202 m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 202 m (H) *

Note "*": Within roll size

† Roll Size
„ 2-inch core: 103 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
„ 3-inch core: 150 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting

Model

Paper Size

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 45m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 45m (H) *

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm (W) × ~ 202m (H) *

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm (W) × ~ 202m (H) *

Note "*": Within roll size

† Roll Size
„ 2-inch core: 103 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
„ 3-inch core: 150 mm ext. diameter maximum for 1 roll setting
† Thickness: 0.08 ~ 0.11 mm
† Weight: 64 ~ 90gf/m2
† Type: Plain paper, Recycle paper

† Thickness: 0.08 mm ~ 0.50 mm

Product Description

Basic Specifications

15

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

BORDERLESS PRINT ROLL PAPER

1.2.5.2 Sheet

Borderless print for right and left is enssured for roll paper with any of the paper widths
as specified in Figure 1-9 below.

ACCEPTABLE PAPER

NOTE: 300 mm, 400 mm, 500 mm and 600 mm are supported for Europe.

The printer accepts following plain paper and special paper. With any other paper,
proper paper feeding and satisfactory print quality are not ensured.

† Paper Size (The sizes indicated in bold italic are only for Stylus Pro 9600.)

† Paper width

Table 1-9. Acceptable Sheet Sizes (Acceptable Paper)

Table 1-8.

Paper Size

Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9600
Japan

8”

USA/Europe

8”

210
mm
210
mm

10”

-

12”

14”

-

16”

-

20”

-

24”

36”

44”

10”

300
mm

12”

14”

400
mm

16”

500
mm

20”

600
mm

24”

36”

44”

Note 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.
2: The force to remove the end of the roll paper from the core should be between 300 gf
and 2000 gf
3: If core is used, a product-exclusive option (roll paper spindle 3 inch) is necessary.
4: It is used under normal conditions. (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C, humidity 40 ~ 60%RH)
5: Roll paper can be printed before paper comes out of the core.
(Reference: Remaining paper length is 30cm approx. when roll paper come out of the
core.)
6: The mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for borderless printing.

Size (W × H)

Paper Size

Size (W × H)

B0+*

1118 mm × 1580 mm

A4

210 mm × 297 mm

B0 *

1030 mm × 1456 mm

US E

34 × 44 in

B1 *

728 mm × 1030 mm

US D

22 × 34 in

B2

515 mm × 728 mm

US C

17 × 22 in

B3

364 mm × 515 mm

US B

11 × 17 in

B4

257 mm × 364 mm

44 × 36 in *

44 × 36 in

A0+ *

914 mm × 1292 mm

30 × 24 in

30 × 24 in

A0 *

841 mm × 1189 mm

Letter

8.5 × 11 in

A1+

24 × 36 in

B1 (wide) *

1030 × 728 mm

A1

594m × 841 mm

8 × 10 in

8 × 10 in

A2

420 mm × 594 mm

30 cm × 45 cm

30 cm × 45 cm

A3+

329 mm × 483 mm

60 cm × 90 cm

60 cm × 90 cm

A3

297 mm × 420 mm

Note "*": Only for Stylus Pro 9600

† Thickness
„ 0.08 ~ 1.5 mm (paper length: 279 mm ~ 728 mm)
„ 0.08 ~ 0.5 mm (paper length: 728 mm ~ 1580 mm)
NOTE 1: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be
smooth.
2: 0.08 ~ 1.50 mm paper thickness is supported for long-edge insertion.
3: The sizes indicated in bold italic are only for Stylus Pro 9600.

Product Description

Basic Specifications

16

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

PLAIN PAPER
C H E C K
P O IN T

Proper feeding is ensured only in the following specifications.

† Paper Size:

Same as above list

† Thickness:

0.08 ~ 0.11 mm

† Weight:

64 ~ 90 gf/m2

† Type:

Plain paper, Recycle paper

NOTE 1: Paper is fed short-edge first.
2: Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be
smooth.
3: It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15 ~ 25°C, humidity 40 ~
60%RH)
4: 300mm, 400mm, 500mm, 600mm are supported for Europe.
5: Mechanism clips print data out of over-printable area for borderless print.

Description of units of measure
cpi:
characters per inch
dpi:
dots per inch
cps:
characters printed per second (at 10 cpi)
1 cps = 2.54 mm/s
ips:
travel in inches per second
1 ips = 25.4 mm/s
G:
Gravity
General ambient conditions:
Temperature 15°C ~ 25°C
Humidity 40% ~ 60%

BORDERLESS PRINT WIDTH
Borderless print for right and left is assured with following paper width. *4

† Paper width
Table 1-10.
Stylus Pro 7600
Stylus Pro 9600
Japan

8”

USA/Europe

8”

210
mm
210
mm

Product Description

10”

-

12”

14”

-

16”

-

20”

-

24”

36”

44”

10”

300
mm

12”

14”

400
mm

16”

500
mm

20”

600
mm

24”

36”

44”

Basic Specifications

17

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.5.3 Special Paper
† Roll (pigment)

Table 1-11. Availability with Special Paper (Pigment)
Characteristic
Roll / Pigment

Name

Black INK

Media Size

Paper
core”
Auto Borde
thickness
spindle
cut rless
(mm)

USA/
MK MK PK
Japan Europe
×2 +LK +LK
/Asia

10”

30
cm

12”

14”

40
cm

16”

50
cm

20”

22”

60
cm

24”

36”

203

210

254

300

305

356

400

406

500

508

560

600

610

914 1118

44”

{

{

{

2

0.21

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Glossy Paper - Photo Weight

{

{

{

2

0.22

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

-

-

~

~

Glossy Film

{

{

{

2

0.13

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Premium Glossy Photo Paper

{

{

{

2

0.18

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Premium Semigloss Photo Paper

{

{

{

2

0.18

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Photo Glossy Paper / Photo Grade Glossy Paper

{

{

{

2

0.17

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Photo Semigloss Paper / Photo Grade Semigloss Paper

{

{

{

2

0.18

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Premium Glossy Photo Paper (250)

{

{

{

3

0.26

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Premium Semigloss Photo Paper (250)

{

{

{

3

0.26

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Premium Semimatte Photo Paper (250)

{

{

{

3

0.26

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Premium Luster Photo Paper

{

{

{

3

0.26

~

~

~

Watercolor Paper - Radiant White

{

{

{

{

3H

0.29

~

{

{

{

3H

{

{

{

{

{

Textured Fine Art Paper (Roll)

{

Canvas
Backlight Film

z

210
mm

Doubleweight Matte Paper

Smooth Fine Art Paper (Roll)

z

8”

-

-

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

-

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

0.37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

3H

0.37

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

{

2

0.46

~

{

2

0.13

{

2

z

{

{
{

Backlight Film (USA / Europe)

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

0.18

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

2

0.28

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~
~

~

{

{

Enhanced Synthetic Paper

{

{

z

z

{

2H

0.12

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

Adhesive Enhanced Synthetic Paper

{

{

z

z

{

2H

0.17

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Tyvek Brillion

{

z

z

{

2

0.24

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Adhesive Vinyl

{

z

z

{

2

0.33

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

{

~

Heavyweight Polyester Banner

{

{

{

3

0.25

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

TBD

TBD

{

2

TBD

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

Semiglossy 4

{

{

2

TBD

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

Dupont / EPSON Semi - Gloss Proofing Paper - A

{

{

2

0.20

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

Enhanced Matte Paper
Semiglossy 2

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle

Product Description

Basic Specifications

18

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

† Roll (dye)
Table 1-12. Availability with Special Paper (Dye)
Characteristic
Roll / Dye

Name

Japan

USA/
Europe/
Asia

core”
spindle

Media Size

8”
Paper
thickness Auto cut Borderless
(mm)
203

210
mm

10” 30cm 12”

14” 40cm 16” 50cm 20”

22” 60cm 24”

36”

210

254

300

305

356

400

406

500

508

560

600

610

914 1118

44”

Presentation Matte Paper

{

{

2

0.20

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Semigloss Photo Paper (Asia / Europe)
Semi Gloss Paper - Heavy Weight (US)

{

{

2

0.21

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Glossy Photo Paper (Asia / Europe)
Glossy Paper - Heavy Weight (US)

{

{

2

0.23

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

{

2

0.21

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

{

{

2

0.13

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Photo Grade Glossy Paper (Asia / Europe)
Photo Glossy Paper (US)

{

2

0.17

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

Photo Grade Semigloss Paper (Asia / Europe)
Photo Semigloss Paper (US)

{

2

0.18

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

~

-

-

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

-

~

~

~

~

Doubleweight Matte Paper
Glossy Film

Heavyweight Polyester Banner

{

{

2

0.28

RC 10mil Glossy Paper (TBD)

TBD

{

3

0.26

{

RC 10mil Semigloss Paper (TBD)

TBD

{

3

0.26

{

Premium Luster Photo Paper

TBD

{

3

0.26

{

~

Dupont / EPSON Commercial Proofing Paper

{

2

0.21

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

Dupont / EPSON Commercial Matte Proofing Paper

{

2

0.24

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

Dupont / EPSON Publication Proofing Paper

{

2

0.24

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

~

-

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Note *1:

Assured with Uni-D print.

*2:

Paper is fed short-edge first.

*3:

Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.

*4:

It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15°C ~ 25°C, humidity 40% ~ 60%RH)

*5:

Paper feeding and print quality with borderless print is not assured on paper which is not assured for borderless print.

*6:

Borderless print is not assured with sheet.

Product Description

Basic Specifications

19

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

† Sheet (pigment)
Table 1-13. Availability with Sheets (Pigment)
Characteristic
Sheet / Pigment

Black INK

Media size

Super
A4
LTR
A3
B
A2
C
B2
A1
D
24”×30” 30”×40” 36”×44”
A3/B
Paper
thickness
(mm) 210×297 216×279 297×420 279×432 329×483 420×594 432×559 515×728 728×1030 559×864 610×762 762×1016 914×1118

Japan

USA/
Europe/
Asia

Glossy Paper - Photo Weight

{

{

Watercolor Paper - Radiant White

{

{

{

{

{

{

{

0.67

Name

Smooth Fine Art Paper
Textured Fine Art Paper
Enhanced Matte - Poster Board

MK MK PK
×2 +LK +LK
{

TBD

{

{

{

0.67

{

{

{

{

1.3

~

~

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

-

~

-

-

~

-

~

-

-

~

~

-

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle

† Sheet (dye)
Table 1-14. Availability with Sheets (Dye)
Characteri stic

Mediasize

Sheet / Dye
Paper
thickness

A4

LTR

A3

B

Super
A3/B

210×297

216×279

297×420

279×432

329×483

420×594

432×559

515×728

728×1030

559×864

728×1030

~

~

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

-

A2

C

B2

A1

D

B1”

Japan

USA/Europe
/Asia

Glossy Photo paper

{

{

Photo Quality Inkjet Paper

{

{

~

~

~

~

~

~

~

-

-

-

Glossy Film

{

{

~

~

~

~

~

-

-

-

-

-

{

-

-

-

-

-

-

-

~

-

-

Name

Semigloss Paper - Poster Board

~

Note : Symbol ~: Assured, {: Supported, z: Supported conditionally, ×: Not supported, 2H/3H: High tension spindle
Note *1:
*2:

Assured with Uni-D print.
Paper is fed short-edge first.

*3:

Paper should have no wrinkles, tears, or folds and the surface should be smooth.

*4:

It is used under normal conditions (temperature 15°C~25°C, humidity
40%~60%RH)

Product Description

Basic Specifications

20

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
† For borderless print, right and left margins are 3mm each because skew detection

1.2.6 Mechanism Specifications

limit is 3mm. If the distance from the paper edge to the platen (sponge width) is
less than 3mm, the maximum surplus print quantity without ink discharge onto the
platen (0mm~3mm) is printable area.

1.2.6.1 Printable Area
Table 1-15. Printable Area

PW
(Paper width)

Roll paper
/Sheet
Roll paper
Sheet

PL
(Paper length)
TM
(Top margin)

RM
(Right margin)

Dimension

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm

Stylus Pro 7600

203 mm ~ 610 mm

Stylus Pro 9600

203 mm ~ 1118 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

Max. 202m

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

279 mm ~ 1580 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

3 mm/15 mm

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

3 mm

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

3 mm/15 mm

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

14 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm/15 mm

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm

Roll paper

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm/15 mm

Sheet

Stylus Pro 7600/Stylus Pro 9600

0 mm/3 mm

BM
Roll paper
(Bottom margin) Sheet
LM
(Left margin)

Model

Paper Feed Direction

Item

Printable Area

† The printer detects paper width when paper is set. (If paper width detection setting
is OFF, it does not detect paper width.)

† It does not print the image beyond the detected paper width or the printable area
specified by paper size setting.
(It may print on the platen if paper width detection setting is OFF.)

† Margins of roll paper can be changed on the panel as follows;
Top/bottom 15 mm, left/right 3 mm
Top/bottom/left/right 3 mm
Top/bottom/left/right 15 mm

Figure 1-1. Printable Area

NOTE: Under special conditions, it is possible to set right and left margin (LM,
RM) to 0.

Product Description

Basic Specifications

21

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.6.2 Paper Set Lever

Table 1-17. Cutting Conditions and Cutting Methods
Cut condition

Table 1-16. Paper Set Lever
Lever Position

Initial cut (Cut with pushing “Cut/Eject” button after paper Paper is fed for L1 length and cut in 4 steps.
is set, and set lever is pushed down.)
(50cps)

Description

In the rear

Position for paper setting
(You can set paper.)

In the front

Ready-to-print position
(Paper is held with the paper holder.)

1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification

Cut after print completed by driver

4-step cut (200cps) When paper is shorter
than L2, it is cut after feeding L2.

Initial cut during printing

Cut during printing is not allowed with this
printer. (Product specification)

Initial cut during normal waiting status

Paper is fed for L1 length and cut in 4 steps.
(50cps)

4-step cut (200cps), when paper is longer
Initial cut with Auto cut ON after print with Auto cut OFF. than L2. 4-step cut (50cps) after feeding L2,
when paper is shorter than L2.

There are two methods to cut roll paper, automatic and manual cutting.
C A U T IO N

Cut method

Do not use the auto cutting function with any paper for which auto
cutting is prohibited; otherwise, the head would be damaged.

Cut with Paper width detection OFF

3-step cut always (100cps fixed)

Note : Cutting pressure at high speed can be changed.
Cutting pressure at low speed is “Duty: 45%” fixed.
Paper edge waiting position is fed L2 for initial cut.

AUTOMATIC CUTTING OF ROLL MEDIA

MANUAL CUTTING OF ROLL PAPER

Automatic cutting under the following conditions can only be performed on the
approved media.

Manual cutting is performed by the following procedure.
1.

Select “Roll Cutter Off” on the panel.

† Mechanical conditions
„ Distance between cut position and paper setting position:
„ Distance between cut position and cutter mark:
„ Minimum cut length (same as paper edge waiting position):

2.

Press “Cut/ Eject” button.

3.

Paper is automatically fed toward the cutter guide, and printer becomes Off-line.
“Pause” is indicated on the LCD panel.

4.

Adjust cutting position with “Paper Feed +/-” button if necessary.

5.

Slide the cutter along the cutter guide to cut the paper.

6.

After cutting, release the printer from the pause status by pressing the “Pause”
button. Then paper is fed backward and printer enters on-line.

L0=167mm
L1= 44mm
L2=030mm

C H E C K
P O IN T

Product Description

Basic Specifications

For manual cutting of roll paper, use the manual cutter available as
an option.

22

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.8 Reliability

1.2.6.4 Acoustic Noise
† Level:

Approx. 50dB(A) (According to ISO 7779)

1.2.8.1 Total Print Volume
† Stylus Pro 7600: 50,000 pages, 6.5million pass approx. (A1, 360×360 M/F, Bi-D)

1.2.7 Electrical Specifications (TBD)

† Stylus Pro 9600: 20,000 pages, 5million pass approx. (B0, 360×360 M/F, Bi-D)

† Rated voltage:

AC 100 ~ 240V

1.2.8.2 Print Head Life

† Input voltage range:

AC 90 ~ 264V

† Monochrome: 28billion shot / nozzle

† Rated frequency range:

50 ~ 60Hz

† Color: 28billion shot / nozzle

† Input frequency range:

49 ~ 61Hz

† Rated current:
„ Stylus Pro 7600:
„ Stylus Pro 9600:

1.0A/100-120v, 0.5A/220-240v
1.0A/100-120v, 0.5A/220-240v

† Power consumption:
„ Operation status:
„ Waiting status:
„ Power OFF:

† Stylus Pro 7600: 11,000 pages approx.
(A1, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)

† Stylus Pro 9600: 5,000 pages approx.
(B0, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)

Stylus Pro 7600 50W
Stylus Pro 9600 55W
Less than 15W (shifting time: 15 minutes)
Less than 0.7W

† Insulation resistance:

More than 10M ohms
(between AC line and chassis, DC 500V)

† Dielectric strength:

AC 1.0kV rms 1min.
AC1.2kV rms 1 sec.
(between AC line and chassis)

† Leakage:

1.2.8.3 Maintenance Tank Life

1.2.8.4 Cutter Life average
Table 1-18. Cutter life average
Paper Type

Stylus Pro 7600
For 24-inch standard roll paper,
3-step cutting

Stylus Pro 9600
For 44-inch standard roll paper,
3-step cutting

Coated paper

Approx. 2000 sheets

Approx. 2000 sheets

Film

Approx. 1000 sheets

Approx. 1000 sheets

Less than 0.25mA

1.2.8.5 Maintenance Parts (TBD)

† International Energy Star Program Compliant:
(Complies with the power supply harmonic control
guideline)

† RTC backup battery: (TBD)
† Cleaning unit life average
(Cap assembly, Pomp assembly, Flushing box, Wiper)

„ Stylus Pro 7600: 18,000 pages approx.
(A1, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)
„ Stylus Pro 9600: 8,000 pages approx.
(B0, plain paper, Speed mode, continuous print)

† Ink absorbent sponge for right/left borderless print: (TBD)

Product Description

Basic Specifications

23

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.9 Ambient Conditions

1.2.9.3 Shock

1.2.9.1 Temperature/Humidity
Table 1-19. Temperature/Humidity
Temperature*1

Humidity*2

During operation

10 ~ 35°C

20 ~ 80%

During storage

-20 ~ 40°C

20 ~ 85%

During transport

-20 ~ 60°C

5 ~ 85%

Condition

Note *1:
*2:

120 hours max. at 60°C, one month max. at 40°C
No condensation. These values are applicable only within the range as shown below.

† During operation:

1G, 1ms max. X,Y and Z directions

† During storage:

2G, 2ms max. X,Y and Z directions

NOTE 1: For storage, check that the print head is capped.
2: Before transportation, check that the print head is capped, remove the ink
cartridges, and close the ink cartridge cover .
3: If the power to the printer is OFF with the printer head uncapped, turn the
power ON with the ink cartridges installed. Then wait until capping is
completed, and turn the power OFF.
4: If the printer is left standing at temperature of -15°C or below, the ink in the
print head and ink cartridges will freeze. If the ink is frozen, leave the printer
standing at temperature of 25°C for more than three hours before its use.

Humidity (%)

Temperature (°C)

Figure 1-2. Environmental Conditions: Temperature/Humidity

1.2.9.2 Vibration
† During operation:

0.15G, 10 ~ 55Hz X,Y and Z directions

† During storage:

0.50G, 10 ~ 55Hz X,Y and Z directions

Product Description

Basic Specifications

24

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.9.4 Surrounding Space
Provide the printer with an enough surrounding space to ensure proper installation of
accessories and replacement of consumables and easy work for daily maintenance.

† From the front of the printer:

Stylus Pro 7600
(without stand)

60 cm or more

15 cm or more

† From the rear and both sides of the printer: 15 cm or more
15 cm or more
60~80 cm or more

„ When Stylus Pro 7600 is not equipped with the dedicated stand:

15 cm or more

Stylus Pro 7600 ejects paper downward. To prevent the ejected paper from
being obstructed, install the printer on a table or desk 60 to 80 cm high above
the floor and provide the printer with a 60 cm or more space in front.
In doing so, locate the front rubber feet of the printer close to the front end of
the table or the desk.
60 cm or more

Stylus Pro 7600 (with stand)/
Stylus Pro 9600

15 cm or more

15 cm or more

15 cm or more

60 cm or more
* Shown above is Stylus Pro 7600

Figure 1-3. Surrounding Space

Product Description

Basic Specifications

25

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.10 Overall Dimensions

560.91

1181.21

604.94

1100

754.11
1033.94

Figure 1-4. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 7600

† Dimensions of Unit
Model

Stylus Pro 7600

Stylus Pro 9600

Note 1: For “rearward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the rear.
Condition

Width (W) × Depth (D) × Height (H) (mm)

Printer body

1100 ×805 × 561

Rearward paper eject

1100 × 754 × 1181

Frontward paper eject

1100 × 1034 × 1181

Frontward paper eject

1624 × 691 × 1178

Rearward paper eject

1624 × 697 × 1178

Frontward paper eject

1624 × 1076 × 1178

Product Description

2: For “frontward paper eject”, the paper exit tray is brought down toward the front.

Basic Specifications

26

Revision A

1178.41

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

697
1076.33

1624.1

Figure 1-5. Overall Dimensions of Stylus Pro 9600

† Weight
Model
Stylus Pro 7600

Condition

Printer body (without feet mounted) * About 43.5 kg
Feet

Stylus Pro 9600

Weight
About 10.5 kg

Printer body (without feet mounted) * About 62.0 kg
Feet

About 22.5 kg

Note "*": Excluding the ink cartridges

Product Description

Basic Specifications

27

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.2.11 Accessories
This section describes the accessories and options for Stylus Pro 7600 and Stylus Pro
9600.

† Special Consumables
„ Ink cartridge (110ml)
Name

1.2.11.1 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 7600
† Standard Accessories
„ AC Cable
„ Change Plug Adapter 3pin to 2pin
„ 24 (2/3) inch roll paper spindle
„ Roll paper sample
„ Roll paper belt
„ Ink cartridges (110ml PK, MK, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y)
„ Maintenance Tank
„ User's Manual
„ Driver & User's Manual
„ EPSON GrayBalancer & EPSON Printer Service Utility
„ Utility Software
„ Guarantee Card
„ Card holder
„ Carton Box
† Special Options
„ Special stand (PX70MCU)
„ Manual cutter unit 24” (PX70MCU)
„ Normal tension spindle 24”<2”/3”> (PX70RPSD)
„ Black ink replacement kit (Draining cartridge, Cleaning cartridge)

Product Description

Photo Black

Model Number
110 ml (Standard Product)
ICBK24

Matte Black

ICMB24

Light Black

ICGY24

Cyan

ICC24

Magenta

ICLC24

Light Cyan

ICM24

Light Magenta

ICLM24

Yellow

ICY24

Note : The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600.

„ Special paper (Refer to “1.2.5 Paper Specifications (p.15)” for paper type and
size)
„ Maintenance tank

† Options Common to Other Printers
„ Auto cutter blade (PM90SPB)
„ Leo 2.13 (PRIFNW3S)
„ Fairbanks (PRIF14)

Basic Specifications

28

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.2.11.2 Accessories and Options for Stylus Pro 9600
† Standard accessories
„ AC Cable
„ Change Plug Adapter 3pin to 2pin
„ Special stand
„ 44 (2/3) inch roll paper spindle
„ Roll paper sample
„ Roll paper belt
„ Ink cartridges (110ml PK, MK, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y)
„ Maintenance Tank
„ User's Manual
„ Driver & User's Manual
„ EPSON GrayBalancer & EPSON Printer Service Utility
„ Utility Software
„ Guarantee Card
„ Card holder
„ Carton Box
† Special Options
„ Manual cutter unit 44”(PX90MCU)
„ Normal tension spindle 44”<2”/3”> (PX90RPSD)
„ High tension spindle 44”<2”/3”> (PX90HSD)
„ Black ink replacement kit (Draining cartridge, Cleaning cartridge)

Product Description

Revision A
† Special Consumables
„ Ink cartridge (110 ml/220 ml (only for pigment))
Name
Photo Black

Model Number
110 ml (Standard Product)
ICBK24

220ml (Option)*
ICBK25

Matte Black

ICMB24

ICMB25

Light Black

ICGY24

ICGY25

Cyan

ICC24

ICC25

Magenta

ICLC24

ICLC25

Light Cyan

ICM24

ICM25

Light Magenta

ICLM24

ICLM25

Yellow

ICY24

ICY25

Note : The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600.

„ Special paper (Refer to “1.2.5 Paper Specifications (p.15)” for paper type and
size)
„ Maintenance tank

† Options common to other printers
„ Auto cutter blade (PM90SPB)
„ Take-up roller (PMARFU1)
„ Leo 2.13 (PRIFNW3S)
„ Fairbanks (PRIF14)

Basic Specifications

29

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.3 External View and Parts Names
EXTERNAL VIEW

Spindle Support
Paper Cover
Control Panel
Connector for Take-up Drive Unit
(Stylus Pro 9600 only)

Connector Cover
USB Interface Connector

Control Panel

AC Inlet
Paper Set Lever
Parallel Interface Connector

Paper Feed Slot

Maintenance Tank
Paper Receive Basket
Stylus Pro 7600: Option
Stylus Pro 9600: Standard

Ink Cartridge Box
Clamp
Dedicated Stand
Stylus Pro 7600: Option
Stylus Pro 9600: Standard

Note : Shown above is Stylus Pro 7600

Figure 1-6. External View and Parts Names

Product Description

External View and Parts Names

30

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

1.4 Operating Panel

Revision A

1.4.1.1 Functions of Buttons
Table 1-20. Panel Functions

1.4.1 Buttons and Functions
The operating panel contains the following buttons.

Switch

Function (Independent)

Function
(in SelecType mode)

Function
(+PowerOn )

-

-

Power

Power ON/OFF

Pause

Pause / ready,
reset (press for 3 seconds)

Leaving SelectType
mode

SelecType

† During printing

Selection of SelecType
menu (major
categories)

-

Confirm and save
setting values

-

Printer status menu shift
† Except above
Panel setting mode shift
Cutter replace menu
(press for 5 seconds)
Cut / Eject

† Eject sheet *1
† Feed roll paper from cutter

Maintenance
mode

mark to cutting position and
cut. (Auto Cut)*1
† Feed roll paper to the manual
cutting position (cutter
OFF).*1

Figure 1-7. Panel Design

„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„

Power
Pause
SelecType (Panel setting menu shift, setting item shift (down))
Paper Feed ∆ (setup value +)
Paper Feed ∇ (setup value -)
Paper Source (Item shift (up))
Cut / Eject (Enter)
Cleaning

Paper Feed ∆

Paper feed (reverse)*2

(setup value +)
Increase setup value

-

Paper Feed ∇

Paper feed (forward)*3

(setup value -)
Decrease setup value

-

Paper Source

Select paper source

Selection of SelecType
items (minor
categories)

-

Cleaning

Cleans all heads
(press for 3 seconds)

-

-

Paper Source+
Eject+paper feed

-

Eject + Paper
feedD + Paper feed
Cleaning + Paper
Source + Eject

Product Description

-

Operating Panel

Maintenance
mode 2
Self-diagnosis
mode

-

-

F/W download

31

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Note *1:
*2:

*3:

Revision A
Table 1-21. LEDs (continued)

It interrupts ink drying and runs the specified operation.
LED (color)

1.27cm/second (5.0 cps) paper feeding for 2 seconds after the button is pressed.
13.2cm/second (52. cps) paper feed if pressed for another 2 seconds. Maximum
reverse feeding is 20 cm by one press of the button.

Ink Out (Y) (Red)

1.27 cm/second (5.0 cps) paper feed for 2 seconds after the button is pressed.
13.2 cm/second (52. cps) paper feed if pressed for another 2 seconds.

Maintenance tank
(Red)

1.4.1.2 LEDs
The LEDs indicate printer status as follows:
Table 1-21. LEDs
Operate (Green)
Paper Out (Red)

Pause (Green)
Ink Out (K1) (Red)
Ink Out (K2) (Red)
Ink Out (C) (Red)
Ink Out (M) (Red)
Ink Out (LC) (Red)
Ink Out (LM) (Red)

Product Description

Display

Yellow ink end, or wrong yellow ink

Blink

Yellow ink low.

On

Maintenance tank full error, or No maintenance tank error

Blink

Maintenance tank almost full

Printer power ON.

Blink

Printer processing data, or in power OFF sequence.

On

Paper out, end of roll, confusion of roll paper and sheet,
paper set lever is released, or paper is thick for cleaning

Blink

Paper jam error, paper cutting error, paper not straight,
paper recognition error, or paper (sheet) eject failure

On

Pause.

Blink

Cleaning print head, or ink drying.

On

Black ink1 end, or wrong black ink

Blink

Black ink1 low.

On

Black ink2 end, or wrong black ink

Blink

Black ink2 low.

On

Cyan ink end, or wrong cyan ink

Blink

Cyan ink low.

On

Magenta ink end, or wrong magenta ink

Blink

Magenta ink low.

On

Light cyan ink end, or light cyan ink

Blink

Light cyan ink low.

On

Light magenta ink end, or wrong light magenta ink

Blink

Magenta ink low.

Roll, Auto cut is selected.

Blink

Confusion of roll paper and sheet, roll paper is not set.

Roll, Cutter off
(Green)

On

Roll, Cutter off is selected.

Blink

Confusion of roll paper and sheet, roll paper is not set.

Sheet (Green)

On

Sheet is selected.

Blink

Confusion of roll paper and sheet, sheet is not set.

Printer Status

On

Printer Status

On

Roll, Auto cut (Green) On

The printer is equipped with the following LEDs.

LED (color)

Display

Operating Panel

32

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.2 Indications on the Panel

Table 1-24.
Displayed functions

1.4.2.1 lED Indications in Normal Mode
† Operate
Table 1-22.
Displayed functions

Indicator status

While processing data, during power OFF sequence

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

On

With power ON and in status other than those above

On

F/W updating completed

On

During ink drying time

Blink

During ink sequence

Blink

On

Paper set lever is released

On

Paper is thick for cleaning

On

Paper jam

Blink

Paper cutting error

Blink

Paper not straight

Blink

Paper check error

Blink

Paper (sheet) eject failure

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Ink end (warning)

On

Displayed functions

On

† Pause
Table 1-24.
Indicator status

Indicator status

Out of corresponded ink
No cartridge for corresponded ink
Wrong cartridge for corresponded ink
Illegal cartridge for corresponded ink

On

Corresponded ink level low

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

On

F/W updating completed

On

† Maintenance tank
Table 1-26.
Displayed functions

On for 100ms at intervals of 5 seconds

F/W updating completed

Blink

F/W updating completed

On

Maintenance call

On

Table 1-25.

Confusion of roll paper and sheet

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

Off
Blink

Reset, timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

Indicator status
On

Product Description

Off

† Ink Out

Out of paper, end of roll

Displayed functions

Off

During pause

Fatal error

Table 1-23.

Print ready

In SelecType mode

Other errors

† Paper Out
Displayed functions

Indicator status

Maintenance tank full
No maintenance tank

Indicator status
On

Maintenance tank almost full warning

Blink

Fatal error

Blink

Reset, timer IC reset / NVRAM clear

On

F/W updating completed

On

On

Operating Panel

33

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.2.2 LCD Indications in Normal Mode

Table 1-27. Indications (in Normal Mode) (continued)

Table 1-27. Indications (in Normal Mode)
Functions

LCD panel display

Functions
Indicator

PG
setting

Ready to print

READY

*2

*1

Processing data

PRINTING

*2

*1

In power OFF sequence

POWER OFF

In ink sequence

WAIT

Initial filling

INK CHARGING nnn%

Pause

PAUSE

Reset

RESET

Initializing

WAIT

Waiting for paper initialize start
trigger

PRESS PAUSE BUTTON

Initializing paper

WAIT

Out of paper

PAPER OUT

Difference with roll paper and
sheet

LOAD XXX PAPER

Paper set lever is released

LOAD PAPER

Paper jam

PAPER JAM

Cover open

COVER OPEN

Paper set lever is released during
operation

SECURE PAPER LEVER

Paper cutting error

PAPER NOT CUT

Paper not straight

PAPER NOT STRAIGHT

Paper check error

RELOAD PAPER

End of roll

PAPER OUT

*1

LCD panel display

Command error

COMMAND ERROR

Type B interface error

OPTION I/F ERROR

Fatal error

SERVICE. REQ. nn

Maintenance request

MAINTENANCE REQ. nn

Timer IC reset/NVRAM clear

WAIT

Indicator

PG
setting

*1

After replacing ink cartridge
*2

*3

Ink cover open

CLOSE INK CART. COVER

Wrong ink cartridge (dye/
pigment)

WRONG CARTRIDGE

Non-genuine cartridge

INVALID CARTRIDGE

Maintenance tank almost full
warning

MAINTENANCE TANK
ALMOST FULL

Maintenance tank full

MAINTENANCE TANK FULL

No maintenance tank

NO MAINTENANCE TANK

Unable to print error

UNABLE TO PRINT

Paper is too thick for cleaning

REMOVE PAPER

Ink is not enough for cleaning

NOT ENOUGH INK

Ink cartridge replacing

SET INK CARTRIDGE

Ink drying

INK DRY nn MIN

Restart request

TURN PRINTER PWR OFF AND
THEN ON

Restarting request

TURN PWR OFF AND ON

Note *1:

*5

When PG setting = WIDE or WIDER, “W” is displayed at the left of lower line.
When PG setting = NARROW, “N” is displayed at the left of lower line.

Problem with paper output (sheet) RELOAD PAPER

*2:

Ink remaining / available rate of maintenance tank are displayed with indicator.

Ink out

INK OUT

*3:

Suction is displayed with indicator.

Ink low

INK LOW

*4:

No ink cartridge

NO INK CARTRIDGE

Character strings on the second line resulting from line feed above are displayed on
the second line of LCD panel.

Defective ink cartridge

SET INK CARTRIDGE

*5:

It is displayed only for page delay.

Wrong cartridge

WRONG CARTRIDGE

Product Description

*1

NOTE: For details of error display, refer to “3.2.1 Errors (p.123)”.

Operating Panel

34

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
† Termination

1.4.3 SelecType

• The printer enters the menu shift available status when the Pause button is

1.4.3.1 Outline

pressed in the SelecType mode.
• The printer enters the menu shift available status when the Paper source

† Startup

button is pushed once in setting menu select mode.

The SelecType mode is selected by pressing the SelecType button during print
ready, warning, or maintenance call status. The printer is then automatically
incapable of printing.

• The printer enters the menu shift available status when setting initialization is

executed.
• The printer enters the print ready status after the nozzle check pattern or the

† Operation
1. The Printer setting menu can be entered by pushing the SelecType button

2.

3.

4.
5.

6.

during menu shift available state (Print ready, no paper). It is shifted to setting
menu select mode, and the setting menu is displayed on the left side of the
LCD upper line.
Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting menu] is displayed on the
upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed on the lower line.
The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The ‘*’ represents the current setup value.
Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value can
be changed. The ‘*’ represents the current setup value.
When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started. No operation occurs if ‘*’ is already
displayed.
It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.

Product Description

status sheet is printed.
• The printer enters the menu shift available status after black ink is replaced.
• The printer enters the menu shift available status after the cutter is replaced.
• The printer returns to the menu shift available status when Pause button is

pressed in any modes.
NOTE: Under the special condition, it sometimes can not return to the status.

† Panel display
Character strings on the second line in the following list are displayed on the
second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of LCD
panel.

Operating Panel

35

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.2 Panel Setting Menu Item
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item
Top menu
(Panel display)

Printer setting menu
(PRINTER SETTING MENU)

Test print menu
(TESTPRINTMENU)

Item menu

Product Description

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

See

PG setting

PLATEN GAP

AUTO, NARROW, WIDE, WIDER

p.40

Page line

PAGELINE

ON OFF

p.41

Interface switching

INTERFACE

AUTO PARALLEL, USB, OPTION

p.41

Code page switching

CODEPAGE

PC437, PC850

p.41

Roll paper margin

ROLL MARG

T/B 15MM, 3MM,15MM

p.41

Detect paper width

PAPERSIZECHK

ON OFF

p.42

Detect skew error

PAPERALIGNCHK

ON OFF

p.42

Job timeout setting

TIMEOUT

OFF, 30sec, 60sec, 180sec, 300sec

p.42

No margin print setting

NO MARGIN

L / R ONLY, 1 CUT, 2 CUTS

p.43

Cutter adjustment

CUTTER ADJ

EXEC

p.44

Auto margin refresh

REFRESH MRGN

ON, OFF

p.44

Initialize setting value

INITSETTING

EXEC.

p.45

Nozzle check pattern print

NOZZLECHECK

PRINT

p.45

Status print

STATUSCHECK

PRINT

p.46

Job information print

JOBINFO

PRINT

p.48

VERSION

BXxxxx (D or P)

p.49

Black1

K1 xxxxxxxPG*

p.49

Black2

K2 xxxxxxxPG*

Firmware version

Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)

Panel display

Printable pages of ink
cartridge

Cyan
Magenta

C xxxxxxxPG*
PRINTABLEPG

M xxxxxxxPG*

Light Cyan

LC xxxxxxxPG*

Light Magenta

LM xxxxxxxPG*

Yellow

Y xxxxxxxPG*

Operating Panel

36

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)

Item menu

Ink remaining

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

See

Black1

K1 XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.49

Black2

K2 XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Cyan

C XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Magenta

Use counter clear

Printer status menu
(PRINTERSTATUS MENU)

M XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
LC XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Light Magenta

LM XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

Yellow

Y XXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)
MAINT TANK

Ink counter
Paper counter
Ink counter clear
Paper counter clear

USECOUNT
USECOUNTCLR

E F,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F

p.49

INK xxxxx.x ml

p.50

PPR xxxxx.x cm
INK EXEC

p.50

PAPER EXEC

Job history (10 jobs)

JOBHISTORY

No.0-No.9

p.50

Job history clear

JOB HSTRY CLR

EXEC

p.50

Total print pages

TOTAL PRINTS

nnnnnnPG (Max. 6 figures)

p.50

Cutter life

CUTTER XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.51

CR motor life monitor

CR MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.51

PF MOTOR XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.52

Head unit life monitor

HEAD UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.52

Cleaning unit life monitor

CL UNIT XXXXXXX (XXXXX is one of followings)
(0%,nn%,E* F,E** F,E*** F,E**** F,E*****F)

p.53

Use life

Product Description

INKLEFT

Light Cyan

Maintenance tank count
Use counter

Panel display

PF motor life monitor

SERVICELIFE

Operating Panel

37

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

User Paper Setup Menu
(PAPERCONFIG. MENU)

Item menu

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

Paper select

PAPERNUMBER

STD, 1~10

Print paper thickness detection pattern

THICKNESS PAT

PRINT*4
1~17 *5

Select paper thickness number

THICKNESS NUM

Cutting pressure

CUTPRESSURE

0%~100%

Cutting method

CUTMETHOD

3STEPS, 4STEPS

Paper feed adjustment

PPRFEEDADJ

-1.00%~1.00%

Ink drying time

DRYINGTIME

0.0sec~5.0sec

Vacuum

SUCTION

NORM, LOW

Print adjustment (MW)

PRINTADJ

0~5~9

See

p.56

PWRCLEANING

EXEC

p.60

Replace BK ink

BLKINKCHNG

EXEC

p.64

Release ink lever

RELEASE INKLEVER

-

Remove all ink cartridges

REMOVE ALL INKCARTRIDGES

-

SELECTINKSET

* Select 2 types from following depending on the situation
#1 PHOTO:#2 LGT
#1 MAT:#2 MAT
#1 MAT:#2 LGT
#1 PHOTO:#2LGT (2 cartridges change)
#1 MAT:#2 LGT
#1 MAT:#2 MAT (2 cartridges change)

Powerful cleaning

Select ink set after change

Maintenance menu
(MAINTENANCE)

Panel display

Black ink replacement
Set draining cartridge
(only for pigment printer)
Ink draining

INSERTDRAINING CARTRIDGEIN#X -

Set cleaning cartridge

INSERTCLEANING CARTRIDGEIN#X -

DRAINING

xxx%

Cleaning

CLEANING

xxx%

Cleaning solution draining

DRAINING

xxx%

Set draining cartridge

INSERTDRAINING CARTRIDGEIN#X -

* Repeat operation after “SELECT INK SET” for 2 cartridges change.

Cutter Replacement

Product Description

Ink charging

INKCHARGING

xxx%

Set all ink cartridges

INSERTALLINK CARTRIDGES

-

CSIC information

* See “ BK ink cartridge replacement (p64)” for details

Replace cutter

CUT.REPLACE

EXEC.

Cover open guide

OPENLOWERCOVER

-

Cutter replacement guide

REPLACECUTTER

-

Cover close guide

CLOSE LOWER COVER

-

Operating Panel

p.60

38

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-28. Panel setting menu item (continued)

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu

Setup value (Underlined: Default)

Paper thickness (in 0.1mm units)

PAPERTHKNS

STD, 0.0MMÅ`1.6MM

Adjustment pattern select and print

ALIGNMENT

BI-D BLACK, BI-D ALL, UNI-D ALL

Bi-D adjustment Black

240CPS

#1 K1

1~5~9

240CPS

#2 K1

1~5~9

190CPS

#3 K1

1~5~9

240CPS VSD1 Total 7 colors

#1 K1 ~ #1 Y

1~5~9

Bi-D adjustment All color 240CPS VSD2 Total 7 colors

#2 K1 ~ #2 Y

1~5~9

190CPS VSD4 Total 7 colors

#3 K1 ~ #3 Y

1~5~9

240CPS VSD1 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)

#1 K2

1~5~9

:

:

#1 Y

1~5~9

240CPS VSD2 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)

#2 K2

1~5~9

:

:

#2 Y

1~5~9

#3 K2

1~5~9

Gap adjustment menu
(HEADALIGNMENT MENU)

Head gap adjustment
(Uni-D)

190CPS VSD4 Total 6 colors
(K1 is standard)

Product Description

Panel display

:

:

#3 Y

1~5~9

Operating Panel

See

p.60

39

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.3 PG Setting

Table 1-29. PG Setting Values (continued)

Selecting this mode allows the user to set the platen gap. The relationship between
panel setting, command setting (SN command), and actual platen gap position is shown
below.
Table 1-29. PG Setting Values
Paper thickness
sensor
Less than 0.3mm

PH
command
00H

Panel
Narrow

SN command

Actual PG
position

Note

-

Minimum

*1

Minimum

*1

Standard

01H-06H

Wide

Small

Wider

Middle

Narrow

Standard

Wide

Wider

07H-12H

Product Description

-

Minimum

Minimum

Paper thickness
sensor
More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.7mm

PH
command
00H-06H

Panel
Narrow

Standard

Wide

SN command

Actual PG
position

Minimum

Small

Small

Small

Middle

Small

Big

Middle

Minimum

Small

Small

Small

Middle

Middle

Big

Big

Minimum

Small

Small

Minimum

Small

Middle

Middle

Small

Middle

Big

Big

Middle

Minimum

Minimum

Wider

Big

Big

Minimum

Middle

Small

Small

Small

Big

Middle

Middle

Middle

Big

Big

Big

Minimum

Small

Small

Middle

Middle

Big

Big

Big

Minimum

Middle

Small

Big

Middle

Big

Big

Big

-

Big

More than 0.7mm

Big

Big

07H-12H

-

-

Big

-

-

-

Big

Note

Note 1: Only in this case, SN command is ignored. When paper thickness is 0.15mm, it is
operated with minimum Bi-D value and minimum SN(PG).
2: When “Wide” or “Wider” is set, “W” is displayed on the left side of LCD lower line.
3: When “Narrow” is set, “N” is displayed on the left side of LCD lower line.

Operating Panel

40

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.7 Roll Paper Margin

The actual platen gap may be set to any of the following

Setting this panel allows switching roll paper margin, all sides 3 mm / all sides 15 mm
/ top and bottom 15 mm, right and left 3 mm. This setting is only valid for roll paper. It’
s not valid for sheets. This setting change only margin, and doesn’ t change image size.

Table 1-30.
Position

Gap width

Application

Wide

2.6 mm

Thick paper

Medium

2.2 mm

Reduce the smearing on the printed image
of thin paper.

Narrow

1.2 mm

Thin paper (Default)

Minimum

0.7 mm

Thin film (Film, glossy media)

† If margin = 3 mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are same as the theoretical
paper size.

† If margin = 15 mm, or Top/Bottom15 mm is set
Printing positions of vertical line and horizontal line are widened by 12 mm for all
sides or only top and bottom. (See Figure 1-8)

1.4.3.4 Page Lines
Selecting this mode allows the user to set the page line print mode. Setup is the same as
horizontal lines ON command (AC 02H 00H 00H 02H) in the automatic cutting setup.
The solid line type is used.

If printable area is more than X = 15 mm from the right edge of paper, the portion is
clipped.
Vertical line is not printed. (See Figure 1-9)

1.4.3.5 Interface Select
Selecting this mode allows selection of the parallel, USB, or optional interface, or
automatic interface selection.

1.4.3.6 Code Page Switching
Selecting this mode allows switching between PC437 and PC850 for the code page.

Product Description

NOTE 1: The top margin is also set with “Set the top margin” (SN command).
Actual top margin is decided as follows:
• Panel setup value (top margin)>Paper top margin
(Panel setup value is used as the top margin)
• Panel setup value (top margin):
N for Stylus Pro 7600, W for Stylus Pro9600
„ :
firmware version
„ :
D for dye, P for pigment
„ :
Maintenance tank available quantity
„ :
total ink counter just before print the last nozzle check
„ :
„ :
„ :
„ :
„ :

Versi n
:
Maintenance Tank :
Current Ink C unt :
Current Paper C unt:

pattern (7 figures)
total ink counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(7 figures)
value of - (7 figures)
total paper counter just before print the last nozzle check
pattern (5.1 figures)
total paper counter just before print the nozzle check pattern
(5.1 figures)
value of - (5.1 figures)

B 
%
g Prev.Ink C unt :g C - P:g
cm Prev.Paper C unt:cm C - P:cm

Figure 1-11. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing

Product Description

Operating Panel

45

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.16 Status Printing

Manufature

Display of manufacturer

Selecting this mode allows the user to print the current panel settings.

Ink Type

Display of ink kind

Ink Color

Display of ink color

Print status sheet with the following specifications.

Ink Capacity

Display of capacity to contain ink

„ Print paper size:A4
„ Font: Built-in font

Ink Cartridge *3

† Output procedure:
1. Press the [SelecType] button on the control panel to enter the panel setting
2.
3.

menu.
Press the [Paper Feed ∆] or [Paper Feed ∇] to display “TEST PRINT
MENU”.
Press the [SelecType] button to enter the item menu select status and then
press the [Paper Feed ∆] or [Paper Feed ∇] again to display [STATUS
CHECK].
Select the item by pressing the [SelecType] button again.
Press the [Enter] button to execute status sheet printing.

Note *1:

Ink Left

Display of volume of remaining ink *1

Production Date

Year and month of manufacture

Expire Date

Expiration of guaranteed period for use

Ink Life

Guaranteed period for use after unpacking

Passed

Time having elapsed after unpacking

Printable Sheet

Number of sheets which can be printed with the
remaining ink (calculated value)

Details of display of remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank
100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗

F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

20% ~ 10%

E∗

F

#1: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Color Adjust ID information (ID1) *4

Less than 10%

nn%

#2: XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX Color Adjust ID information (ID2M)

0% (End)

0%

4.
5.

† Explanation of contents:

Type-B

Whether optional Type-B I/F is mounted or not

Current Setting

Setting contents of “PRINTER SETTING MENU” in SelecType mode

Printer Status

Product Description

Version

Installed firmware version

Total Print

Total number of printed sheets

Use Ink

Ink consumption counter value (total cumulative
consumption by printing, flushing and cleaning)

Use Paper

Paper consumption counter value (total
cumulative paper feed amount by printing)

*2:

Details of display of remainder of cutter life, CR motor life, PF motor life, Print
Head life or Cleaning Unit life
100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗

F

Mainte Tank

Remaining ink volume in Maintenance Tank *1

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

Cutter Life

Remainder of cutter life *2

20% ~ 1%

E∗

F

CR Motor

Remainder of CR motor life *2

PF Motor

Remainder of PF motor life *2

Less than 1%

F

F

Head

Remainder of Print Head life *2

Cleaner

Remainder of Cleaning Unit life *2

Operating Panel

*3:

The ink cartridge information is displayed based on the information inside the CSIC
on the ink cartridge.

*4:

This Color Adjust ID information (ID1) is the same as can be checked through the
printer driver.

46

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

#1 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
#2 XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX
Type B
:Uninstalled
- Current Setting +------------------+- Printer Status -+----------------Platen Gap
:Standard
| Version
:BWxxxx P
Page Line
:On
| Total Prints
:xxxxxx PG
Interface
:Parallel
| Use Ink
:xxxxxx.x ml
Code Page
:PC437
| Use Paper
:xxxxxx.x cm
Margine
:T/B15mm
| Mainte. Tank
:E[*****]F
No Margine
:1 Cut
| Cutter Life
:E[*****]F
Refresh
:On
| CR Motor
:E[*****]F
Paper Size Check :ON
| PF Motor
:E[*****]F
Paper Align Check :ON
| Head
:E[*****]F
Time Out
:30sec
| Cleaner
:E[*****]F
- Ink Cartridge --+------------------+-----------------+----------------Manufacturer
: EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Ink Type
:
Pigment
Pigment
Pigment
Ink Color
:
Photo Black
LightBlack
Cyan
Ink Capacity
:
110ml
110ml
110ml
Ink Left
:
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
Production Date
:
`02/03
`02/03
`02/03
Expire Date
:
`03/10
`03/10
`03/10
Ink Life
:
06 months
06 months
06 months
Passed
:
02 months
02 months
02 months
Printable Sheet
:
120 pages
120 pages
120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+----------------EPSON GENUINE INK
EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK EPSON GENUINE INK
Pigment
Pigment
Pigment
Pigment
Magenta
LightCyan
LightMagenta
Yellow
110ml
110ml
110ml
110ml
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
E[*****]F
`02/03
`02/03
`02/03
`02/03
`03/10
`03/10
`03/10
`03/10
06 months
06 months
06 months
06 months
02 months
02 months
02 months
02 months
120 pages
120 pages
120 pages
120 pages
------------------+------------------+-----------------+-----------------

Figure 1-12. Status Sheet Print Pattern

Product Description

Operating Panel

47

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.17 Job Information Print
With this mode, users can print job information saved in the printer. (Max. 10Job)
Definition of job is followings;

„ Adjustment patterns and test patterns
(Gap adjustment, Nozzle check pattern, Status print, Cutter position, Paper
thickness detection)
„ Print data from host
„ Job information print
The printer prints job information print pattern in the following specifications;

„ Print paper size:A4
„ Font: Built-in font
„ Print sample: See the chart at right.
NOTE: For details of Job Information, see “1.4.3.30 Job information (p55)”.

No.0
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.1
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.2
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.3
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.4
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.5
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.6
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.7
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.8
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min
No.9
Doc Name :
User Name :
I/F Type : Unknown
Job State : Complete
UsedInk : 123.456 ml
Used Paper : 12345 mm (w) x 12345 mm (h)
Print Start Time : 00/00/0000 : 00
Used Time : 12345678 min

Figure 1-13. Job information print pattern

Product Description

Operating Panel

48

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.18 Firmware version

1.4.3.20 Ink remaining

Firmware version is displayed as following,

Table 1-35.
Ink remaining

Table 1-34.

Stylus Pro 9600

Ink end LED

100 ~ 81% remaining

E∗∗∗∗∗F

Off

VERSION
BNxxxx P(orD)

80 ~ 61% remaining

E∗∗∗∗ F

Off

60 ~ 41% remaining

E∗∗∗ F

Off

VERSION
BWxxxx P(orD)

40 ~ 21% remaining

E∗∗

F

Off

F

Off

Model
Stylus Pro 7600

Panel display

Display

Note 1: xxxx:interface controller version (4 letters)
2: N=Narrow machine: Stylus Pro 7600
W=Wide machine: Stylus Pro 9600
3: The character on the right of lower line represents Dye/Pigment mode.
P: Pigment mode, D: Dye mode

20% ~ just before near end

E∗

After near end ~ just before ink end

nn%

Blink

ink end

0%

On

Note 1: After ink remaining is near end, the ink remaining is displayed with % on the panel. 0%
is displayed on the panel for ink end.
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption for initial
filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed as 100%. Ink
use count is started at that time. When ink cartridge is replaced, ink use is counted/
displayed according to “Ink system specifications.”

1.4.3.19 Printable pages of each ink cartridge
Printable sheets (estimation) of installed each ink cartridge are displayed.
The formula is following;

1.4.3.21 Maintenance tank count

Printable sheets = ink remain after print / ink used

† How to calculate

Note 1: Printable pages within IR command range are calculated and displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.

Present available rate of maintenance tank is displayed.

† Display
Available rate
100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

20% ~ 10%

E∗

F

Less than 10% remaining

nn%

0%

0%

Note : When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, maintenance tank
indicator is displayed with E*****F for 100~71% remaining and E**** F for 70~61%.

Product Description

Operating Panel

49

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

† Warning
When available rate is less than 10% (Total capacity 1300g), Maintenance tank
almost full warning occurs. The Maintenance Tank LED blinks.

† Error

† Job NO.
It is a Job number saved in the printer. The latest job is NO.0.

† Paper use

When available rate becomes 0, Maintenance tank full error occurs.
The Maintenance Tank LED lights up.

Paper use of each job is displayed. (Area in m2)
NOTE: Paper use is counted from JS command to JE command.

† Counter clear
It is cleared with replacing maintenance tank.

† Ink use
Ink use of each job is displayed.

1.4.3.22 Use counter
† Ink used

NOTE 1: Ink use is counted within IR command or it is counted from JS command
to JE command.
2: When IR command is not set, ink use is not counted, and display value is not
changed.
3: When there is no value to display, “---” is displayed.

Ink used with following operations is counted;
• Print operation (irrespective of completion/discontinuation of printing)
• All flushing operation
• All cleaning operation

NOTE 1: Ink used within IR command range is accumulated and displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.

1.4.3.25 Job history clear

† Paper used
Paper used (paper fed) with print operation is displayed in centimeter. Manual
paper feeding is not counted.
NOTE 1: Paper used within JS ~ JE command range is accumulated and
displayed.
2: When there is no value to be displayed, the panel displays “---”.

1.4.3.24 Job history display

With this menu, job history saved in the printer is cleared.
Ink use and paper use of job history are displayed “---”.

1.4.3.26 Total prints
Total prints are displayed in decimal. (Max. 6 figures)

1.4.3.23 Clear use counter
† Clear ink used counter
Reset “Ink used” to 0.

† Clear paper used counter
Reset “Paper used” to 0.

Product Description

Operating Panel

50

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
† CR motor life monitor
„ How to calculate

1.4.3.27 Consumables life
† Cutter life
„ How to calculate
The number of times the cutter has been used is calculated by counting down
from 2000. The count is reduced by one every time one sheet is cut
irrespective of paper sizes.
The counter is cleared at replacing the cutter with a new one.
„ Display (Life)

It is displayed with tube life (B1 width), because tube friction causes CR
motor trouble. The tube life is calculated with the number of CR scan times.
Table 1-36. Reference value
Printer Model

B0/ Speed

Stylus Pro 9600

325 million passes

A1/ Speed

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

Note : 1 pass = 1 round trip

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

„ Display (Life)

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

Less than 1% remaining

F

F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

F

Less than 1% remaining

F

F

„
„
C H E C K
P O IN T

Not happen, because
Cutter condition can be checked with cutting.
It doesn’ t cause big obstacles.
Users can replace a cutter easily.
Fatal error
Not happen.
Counter clear
The counter is cleared at replacing the cutter with a new one.

„ Maintenance Req.

The indication as described above may not be accurate depending
on the conditions of use, thus it is given only as a yardstick.

It is happened when the life is less than 4%.
„ Fatal error
When the remainder of the life is judged to be 0 by taking into account
damage to the tube, service call occurs.
„ Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS CR MOTOR” or “CLEAR COUNTERS CR
TOTAL” in Maintenance mode 2 is executed, the counter is cleared.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Product Description

Condition

250 million passes

„ Maintenance Req.
•
•
•

Number of Passes

Stylus Pro 7600

Operating Panel

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

51

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

† PF motor life monitor
„ How to calculate

† Head unit life monitor
„ How to calculate

It is calculated for trouble examination in case that it is used beyond
production life, because parts of PF motor and paper feeding drive mechanism
are not supported to exchange within production life. It is displayed with ratio
of PF roller life and driven roller life, because their lives are shorter than PF
motor. PF roller life and driven roller life are calculated with total paper
feeding, because their lives are defined with paper feeding (positive direction/
negative direction).
„ Display (Life)

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

E∗∗∗∗∗F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

Less than 1% remaining

F

F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

F

Less than 1% remaining

F

F

100 ~ 81%

„ Maintenance Req.

„ Maintenance Req.
Not happen because it is out of service range within product life.
„ Fatal error
Not happen, because trouble mode is not Fatal.
„ Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS PF MOTOR” in Maintenance mode 2 is
executed, the counter is cleared.
„ Count continuance
Even if remaining is 0, it keeps counting until 32bit register is full, and stops
counting-up at the maximum of positive number. It counts not only with panel
display but also with trouble analysis from NVRAM detailed data.
C H E C K
P O IN T

The numbers of dot injection for each color are added up, the number of
injecting assured dots per nozzle × 96 nozzles is calculated as the life, and it is
calculated with the most number of total dots in each
„ Display (Life)

Maintenance request happens at 2.8 billion shot/Nozzle.
„ Fatal error
Not happen as a head unit.
„ Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS HEAD” in Maintenance mode 2 is executed,
the counter is cleared.
„ Count continuance
Same as PF motor.
C H E C K
P O IN T

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

Product Description

Operating Panel

52

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

† Cleaning unit life monitor
„ How to calculate

1.4.3.28 Suction adjustment for paper setting and indicator display

Cleaning unit life is same as pump motor life. Cap assembly, pump assembly,
flushing box, and wiper are exchanged at the same time by a service person.
„ Display (Life)

Users can adjust paper suction to set paper easily, only when paper set lever is released,
and paper is detected with rear sensor. Followings are displayed on the LCD panel at
that time;

† LCD display

100 ~ 81%

E∗∗∗∗∗F

80 ~ 61%

E∗∗∗∗ F

60 ~ 41%

E∗∗∗ F

40 ~ 21%

E∗∗

F

20% ~ 1%

E∗

F

Note :

Less than 1% remaining

F

F

† Suction display

LOAD PAPER
SUCTION

Suction

„ Maintenance Req.

High

When the life is TBD%, maintenance request happens.
„ Fatal error
When the life is 0%, service request happens.
„ Counter clear
When “CLEAR COUNTERS CLEANER2 in Maintenance mode 2 is
executed, the counter is cleared.
„ Count continuance
Same as PF motor.
C H E C K
P O IN T

„: Indicator (3 levels)
LCD display

100%

Middle

60%

Low

0%

Information on these values is needed only when service personnel
perform maintenance work. Do not inform users of the meaning of
these indications.

Product Description

Operating Panel

53

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
† Ink remaining display and font

1.4.3.29 Ink remaining indicator display
Ink remaining indicator is displayed on the lower line of LCD panel.

Ink remaining

† LCD display item and LCD panel display position

100 ~ 81% remaining*2

Ink type

80 ~ 61% remaining*3

Panel display position

Black1

8 th on the lower line

Black2

9 th on the lower line

Cyan

10 th on the lower line

Magenta

11 th on the lower line

Light Cyan

12 th on the lower line

Light Magent

13 th on the lower line

Yellow

14 th on the lower line

Maintenance*1

16 th on the lower line

60 ~ 41% remaining
40 ~ 21% remaining
20% remaining ~ just before near
end
Ink end
Note 1: Available quantity is displayed for the maintenance tank.
2: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, ink consumption for initial
filling is subtracted, and ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed as 100%. Ink
use count is started at that time. When ink cartridge is replaced, ink use is counted/
displayed according to “Ink system specifications.”

Note : It is counted from the left side

† Printer status at indicator display
Status

READY

Processing data

PRINTING

Ink low

INK LOW

Ink end

INK OUT

Pause

PAUSE

Product Description

3: When initial filling is done by user after the package opened, maintenance tank
indicator is displayed with “h01” font for 100~76% remaining and “h03” font for
75~61%.

LCD panel display

Ready to print

LCD panel display

C H E C K
P O IN T

Operating Panel

After detection of “Ink Low”, the display is changed from a graph
to a% indication.

54

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
† Job information

1.4.3.30 Job information

This printer saves following job information (68byte × 10job) in NVRAM.

† Definition of Job
The minimum unit of printer operation is defined as “Job” with this printer. The
job print information with character/image can be saved as a record.
Basic print job functions are followings;
Note "*": Cleaning is not defined as a Job, because it can be executed during printing.

Information saving

Printable

Information saving

Count Start
JS

Normal end

Count End
JE (Complete)

Printing

Table 1-37. Job information
Information

Explanation

Capacity

The quantity of saved The quantity of saved job
job information
information in NVRAM

0~10

1byte

Information No.

Saving order

0~9

1byte

ID No.

Job ID No.

0~255(•••,255,0,1,•••)

1byte

Using I/F

Using I/F type

00:Unknown
01:Parallel
02:USB
03:Option I/F
FF:I/F is not used

1byte

Job status

Current job status

00:Unknown
01:Printing
02:Complete
03:Abort

1byte

Cancel

Count End
JE (Cancel)

Range

Character strings code Character code recognizing code *

2byte

Job ID

Job name consisting of host
name and document name

User name 16byte
Document name 32Byte

48byte

Ink used

Ink used quantity for intended
job [ml]

0~65.535 ml

2byte

Paper used

Paper used
quantity for
intended job

0~65535

2byte

Horizontal [mm] 0~65535

2byte

Figure 1-14. Printing Job Transition

Vertical [mm]

Print start time

Print start time
[Year/month/date/hour/minute]

2255/12/31/24/59[MAX]

5byte

Time used for print

Time used for print [sec]

0~65535

2byte

Total

68byte

Note "*": 00h 00h fixed as Reserve for now.

Product Description

Operating Panel

55

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.31 User Paper Setting

Details of each setting item are following;

Selecting this mode allows detection of the thickness of the available paper, and
registration of up to four user-defined paper.
Paper feeding adjustment, ink drying time, cutting method, MW print adjustment and
suction may be registered for each paper format.

† Setting
1. Select user paper setting menu from the panel.
2. Select the paper number (‘STD’, ‘1’~‘10’)
3. Print the paper thickness detection pattern.
4. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enter the number of the pattern

Table 1-40.
Setting
Paper thickness

Print paper thickness detection pattern and enter the paper thickness
number. (When “STD” is selected, it is not executed.) *1

Cutting pressure

Paper cutting pressure is set. Lower the pressure for thin and soft
paper. Manufacture setting value (75%) is displayed as 100%, which is
the maximum setting value to be assured. Setting available range is
110%~0%.

Cutting method

Cutting method is selected, 4 step cutting for thin and soft paper. Paper
feed adjustment Paper feeding is adjusted. When 0.00% is not selected
for paper feed adjustment, it ignores driver command (SN 03H 00H
00H 04H m2) and setting value with SN menu of Maintenance mode1,
and uses this setting value.

Ink drying time

Ink drying time for each pass is set.- The carriage stops at the right/left
sides of paper for setting time.

Paper suction

Paper suction is set to make paper stable on the platen. Select “LOW”
for thin paper (film), which is difficult to feed.

MW print adjustment

Micro weave mode is adjusted. When print speed has priority, lower
the setting value. When quality has priority, raise the setting value.*2

with the least displacement for each adjustment item. (See p.58)
Table 1-38. Relationship between Pattern Numbers and Paper Thickness
Number
Paper
thickness

5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

0.0

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

Enter cutting pressure.
Select cutting method.
Enter the paper feeding adjustment value.
Enter the ink dying time for each pass.
Select paper suction.
Select MW print quality adjustment.

NOTE 1: Paper setting can be made independently for any paper number.
2: For details of patterns, refer to “Print paper thickness detection pattern (p.
58)”.

Operation

Note 1: When “STD” is selected for Paper selection, Paper thickness detection pattern print,
Paper thickness number selection, Paper feeding adjustment setting items are not
displayed. Only when Paper “1” ~ “10” is selected, they are displayed.
2: During pattern printing, “PRINTING ALGNMNT PATTERN” is displayed.
(<\n> is new line)
3: Default display of paper thickness number selection is the number same as gap
adjustment.

Paper setting and corresponding operation are as follows.

Note *1:

Table 1-39.
Paper setup
Standard
1 ~ 10

Product Description

*2:

Operation
When settings of cutting pressure ~ print quality are set with
commands, it follows the settings.

See “MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes (p.88)” for
selectable MW mode at MW print adjustment.
It prints with PG small or PG big depending on detection result of paper thickness
sensor.

User definition paper. Even when cutting pressure ~ print quality are
set with commands, user setting value is used.

Operating Panel

56

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Displays the paper number currently selected.
STD, A1 ~ 10

SelecType

READY
††††††† †

SelecType

PAPER CONFIG

PAPER CONFIG

Paper Source
Paper Source

PAPER NUMBER STD

PAPER NUMBER
STD

It is displayed only when paper number 1~10 is selected.

Paper Feed

It is entered with Enter button in order. Enter

Paper Feed

PAPER CONFIG
THICK. PAT.

No.1

SelecType
Paper Source

Paper Feed

Enter
THICKNESS PAT

Paper Feed

PRINT

No.10

PRINTING ALGNMENT
PAPER CONFIG
CUT PRESSURE
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PATTERN
CUT PRESSURE
00%

THICKNESS NUM

00%~99%

PAPER CONFIG
CUT METHOD
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

1
1~17

CUT METHOD
3 STEP

CUT PRESSURE
00%
00%~100%

4 STEP

PAPER CONFIG
PPR FEED ADJ
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PPR FEED ADJ

CUT METHOD
0.00%

3 STEP
4 STEP

-1.00~1.00

PAPER CONFIG
DRYING TIME
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PPR FEED ADJ

DRYING TIME
10.0~00.0

PAPER CONFIG
SUCTION
Paper Feed

SelecType
Paper Source

PRINT ADJ

SelecType
Paper Source

DRYING TIME

SUCTION

00.0sec
10.0~00.0

NORM
LOW

PAPER CONFIG

0.00%
-1.00~1.00

00.0sec

SUCTION
NORM
LOW

PRINT ADJ
5
1~5~9

PRINT ADJ
Enter

5
1~5~9

Figure 1-15. Level Structure of User Setting Menu

Product Description

Operating Panel

57

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

PRINT PAPER THICKNESS DETECTION PATTERN

† Printing Specifications
Table 1-41.
Head speed

240 cps

Pattern height

96 dots

Color

Black

Print direction

Upper patterns: Leftward
Lower patterns: Rightward

Pattern interval

Upper patterns: Equal intervals
Lower patterns:Centered on base position for gap adjustment
value, and displaced by an equal distance left and right.
Details are described in next clause.

10 mm

13.5mm(96dot)

13.5mm(96dot)

A4 width

9.0 mm (64dot)
feeding

† Relationship between numbers in print pattern and paper thickness.
Table 1-42.
Numbers in print pattern

1

2

3

...

...

15

16

17

Paper thickness (mm)

0.0

0.1

0.2

...

...

1.4

1.5

1.6

Product Description

Operating Panel

Figure 1-16. Paper Thickness Detection Pattern

58

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

† Displacement of bottom pattern
If the displacement in the gap adjustment value with a change of 0.1 mm in paper
thickness is assumed to be X microns, the following applies.

Head

„ AB:Gap adjustment value with paper thickness +0.1 mm
„ AC:Current gap adjustment value
„ AD:Gap adjustment value with paper thickness -0.1 mm

Paper thickness +0.1mm at gap
adjustment.

A fixed displacement is assumed with changes in paper thickness.
X = AC–AB = AD–AC

Paper thickness at gap adjustment.
Paper thickness -0.1 mm at gap
adjustment.

This adjustment value is saved into NVRAM and can be changed.
Example: With 0.2 mm gap adjustment paper thickness.
A

Table 1-43.
Pattern
number

Displacement of
bottom pattern relative to
top pattern

Pattern
number

Displacement of
bottom pattern relative to
top pattern

1

+2X

10

–7X

2

+1X

11

–8X

3

±0

12

–9X

4

–1X

13

–10X

5

–2X

14

–11X

6

–3X

15

–12X

7

–4X

16

–13X

8

–5X

17

–14X

9

–6X

Product Description

B C D

Figure 1-17. Displacement of Paper Thickness Detection Pattern

Operating Panel

59

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.3.32 Power cleaning

1.4.3.34 Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment)

With this mode, the printer has more power cleaning than normal cleaning.

Selecting this mode allows the user to adjust Bi-D and Uni-D depending on paper
thickness.

1.4.3.33 Cutter Blade Replacement
Selecting this mode allows the user to replace the cutter blade.
The procedure for cutter blade replacement is as follows:
1.

Select the cutter replacement menus from the panel. (The cutter replacement menu
can be selected by pressing the SelecType button for 5 sec.)

2.

Open the cover following cover open guide.

3.

Replace the cutter blade following cutter replacement guide.

4.

Close the cover following cover close guide.

† Setting
1. Set the paper.
2. Select the gap adjustment menu from the panel.
3. Set to 'STD' for 0.2mm or 1.2mm EPSON paper. When other paper is set
individually, set thickness in units of 0.1mm.

4. Select the adjustment pattern to be printed (Bi-D Black, Bi-D all or Uni-D
individual), and print. (“PRINTING ALGNMNT PATTERN” is displayed.)
5. Check the printed adjustment patterns and enter the number of the pattern
with the least displacement for each adjustment item.
6. Repeat (4)~(5) until adjustment of all items is completed.
NOTE: For details of patterns, refer to “Gap Adjustment Print Pattern (TBD) (p.
63)”.

† Adjustment
The adjustment values set above are saved in NVRAM as 4 types of adjustment
value depending on PG height (0.7mm/1.2mm/2.2mm/2.6mm). To calculate
adjustment value, PG height and paper thickness are necessary. Saving place of
adjustment value is selected as following list. Adjustment value saved in NVRAM
is updated when the value is adjusted again;

Product Description

Operating Panel

60

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
4: When the following paper is to be used, select [0S] or [3S].
[0S] = Films and special thin paper
[3S] = Recommended thick RC paper for borderless printing

Table 1-44.
Paper thickness sensor

Paper thickness
setting

Less than 0.7mm

STD

PG setting

More than 0.7mm
Less than 0.3mm

0S

More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.3mm

3S

0.0mm

0.7~1.6mm

More than 0.7mm

-

For PG1.2mm

-

PG2.6mm

-

For film media
(PG0.7mm)

*2

For glossy media
(PG0.7mm)

*3

5: When any paper other than authentic EPSON dedicated paper is to be used, set paper
thickness in increments of 0.1 mm.

*1

Note *1:

Adjustment values calculated with PG1.2mm for PG 0.7mm, 2.2mm, 2.6mm are
saved except adjustment value saved for PG 1.2mm at that time.

*2:

In this case, adjustment value is saved into PG0.7mm area as a special setting for
film media (paper thickness 0.15mm). This is used when special setting for film
media (00h) is set with PH command.

-

*3:

In this case, adjustment value is saved into PG0.7mm area as a special setting for
glossy media (paper thickness 0.3mm). This is used when glossy media is specified
with paper adjustment value of paper feed adjustment setting command.

*4:

Even when paper thickness sensor detects thin paper (less than 0.7mm), PG is set as
2.6mm if paper thickness setting is more than 0.7mm.

*5:

When paper thickness sensor detects thick paper (more than 0.7mm), PG is set as
2.6mm regardless of PG setting and paper thickness setting.

*7

0.1~0.6mm

More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.7mm

Notes

*6

More than 0.3mm
Less than 0.3mm

Saving place

0.0~0.6mm

Narrow

For PG0.7mm

Standard

For PG0.7mm

Wide

For PG1.2mm

Wider

For PG2.2mm

Narrow

For PG0.7mm

*6:

It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.0mm.

Standard

For PG1.2mm

*7:

It is saved into saving place for paper thickness 0.3mm.

Wide

For PG2.2mm

Wider

For PG2.6mm

-

For PG2.6mm

Narrow

For PG1.2mm

Standard

For PG1.2mm

Wide For

PG2.2mm

*4

Wider

For PG2.6mm

0.7~1.6mm

-

For PG2.6mm

*4

0S/3S/
0.0~1.6mm

-

For PG2.6mm

*5

Note 1: Paper thickness is saved to adjust with 0.1mm unit for paper thickness setting command
PH.
2: Paper thickness is firstly entered to reduce operation with the closest pattern print of
adjustment value saved in the printer.
3: Select "STD" when authentic EPSON dedicated paper is to be used. Then the paper
thickness sensors detect the paper thickness and make automatic setting.
(Thin paper = 0.2mm / Thick paper = 1.2mm)

Product Description

Operating Panel

61

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Pause

Revision A

Ready
††††††† †
SelecType
Paper Source
HEAD ALIGNMENT
SelecType

* Setting value 1~5~9 is selected with the Paper Feed button.
It returns to a status before pattern print with the Paper Source bottom.
* It always returns to “Ready” status with the Pause.

Paper Source

HEAD ALIGNMENT
PAPER THKNS
SelecType
Paper Source

* Same sequence
* Paper thickness sensor affects it.

PAPER THKNS
Enter

STD
Paper Source

ALIGNMENT
Bi -D BLACK

Paper Source

PRINTING ALGNMNT

ON

3N

Paper Feed

0.0mm

ALIGNMENT

ALIGNMENT
Bi -D ALL

Paper Source

Enter
Paper Source
#1 K1

#2 K1

SelecType

5
Enter
5
Enter

#2 Y

Paper Feed
Enter

#3 K1

#3 K1

Paper Feed
#3 Y

#3 Y

Paper Feed

5
Enter
#2 K2
5
Enter
#2 Y
5
Enter
#3 K2
5
Enter

Paper Feed
#3 Y

5
Enter

Paper Feed

5
Enter

#1 Y

Paper Feed
#3 K2

5
Enter

SelecType

Paper Feed
#2 Y

5
Enter

#1 K2

Paper Feed
#2 K2

5
Enter

Paper Feed

Paper Feed
#1 Y

#2 K1

5
Paper Feed

5
Enter
5
Enter

Paper Feed

#2 Y

#3 K1

SelecType

#1 K2

#1 Y

#2 K1

#2 K1

Paper Feed
#3 K1

#1 Y

#1 K1

Paper Source

#1 K1

Paper Feed

Paper Source

Paper Feed

Uni-D
Head gap
adjustmen
Enter

Paper Source

Enter

PATTERN

#1 K1

1.6mm

#3 Y
5
Enter

Figure 1-18. Level Structure of Gap Adjustment Menu

Product Description

Operating Panel

62

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
Table 1-45. Adjustment Item List (continued)

GAP ADJUSTMENT PRINT PATTERN (TBD)
Print specifications of gap adjustment print pattern
Adjusting items

3 items (Refer to next clause for details)

Adjustment pattern height

Bi-D Black (#1, #2, #3) 90mm

#1

Bi-D All (#1, #2, #3) 220mm
Uni-D All (#1, #2, #3) 145mm
Adjustment pattern width

Bi-D Black 65mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Uni-D All*1

Bi-D All 190mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)

#2

Uni-D All 185mm (24” 3set, 44” 5set)
Others

When it prints from paper edge, it feeds 100mm for roll paper,
50mm for sheet, and starts printing.
#3

„ Each adjustment item
Table 1-45. Adjustment Item List
Parameter

Adjusting item

#1

Bi-D All

#2

#3

Product Description

K1
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K1
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K1
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y

Parameter

Adjusting item

† Print specifications

Dot size

Head speed (CPS)

Nozzle No.

VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
190
190
190
190
190
190
190

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Bi-D Black

Note *1:

#1
#2
#3

Dot size

Head speed (CPS)

Nozzle No.

VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD1
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD2
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD4
VSD1
VSD2
VSD4

240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
190
190
190
190
190
190
240
240
190

2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
1

K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K2
C
M
LC
LM
Y
K1
K1
K1

For Uni-D All (between-row compensation), make each adjustment with the K1 row
as the reference.

„ The adjustment pattern printing method for each adjustment item is as
follows:
Print direction

Bar: Going back and forth every 4dot
Block: Upper patterns: Leftward Lower patterns: Rightward

Pattern interval

Upper patterns: equal interval
Lower patterns: Print No.5 to be always current setup value. No.5
is standard, and others have adjustment gap as
following;

„ The relationship between print pattern and adjustment gap is shown below.
Print pattern number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Adjustment gap N/1440 inch
(VSD1, VSD2, VSD4)

-4

-3

-2

-1

0

+1

+2

+3

+4

Operating Panel

63

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A
4. The printer reads CSIC of installed cartridge after the lever is locked.

1.4.3.35 BK ink cartridge replacement
C H E C K
P O IN T

a)

„ This menu is only displayed for pigment model. It is not displayed
for dye model.

b) When wrong ink cartridge is installed, following message is displayed
every 1 second, corresponded slot LED blinks, and go back to step 3-2.

„ The printer is not turned off during sequence even if Power button
is pushed.

1.

Select “BK INK CHANGE” in “MAINTENANCE” of panel setting menu and
start with “EXEC”.

2.

Select changing ink and push the Enter button. (The panel message is depended on
installed ink combination at that time.)

LCD panel message: “WRONG CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
c)

MATTE-K+LIGHT-K

4.

Panel message
#1 PHOTO:#2 LBK

MATTE-K+MATTE-K #1 MAT:#2 LBK

5.

#1 PHOTO:#2 LBK (2 cartridges)

Following message is displayed after the lever is released.
LCD panel message: “REMOVE ALL INK CARTRIDGES”

#1 MAT:#2 LBK
#1 MAT:#2 MAT (2 cartridges)

3.

Following messages are displayed every 1 second repeatedly, and all slot LEDs
are OFF, after necessary ink remaining for initial filling is checked,
LCD panel message: “REMOVE ALL INK CARTRIDGES”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

#1 MAT:#2 MAT

PHOTO-K+LIGHT-K

The printer checks available quantity of all color ink remaining for initial filling
except changing slot.

1. When ink remaining is enough, go to (4). When ink remaining is not enough,
following message is displayed, and corresponded slot LED blinks.
LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH INK”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

NOTE: The message is indicated until all ink cartridges are removed. LED turns
to ON after corresponded cartridge is removed. LEDs except changing
slot are ON until cartridges are installed.
6.

The printer checks available quantity of maintenance tank, after all cartridges are
removed.

NOTE: When 2 cartridges are selected to be changed for procedure (2), it counts
available quantity of maintenance tank for 2 cartridges.

2. Following message is indicated, and corresponded slot LED blinks until lever
is released, and new ink cartridge is installed.

1. The printer checks CSIC of maintenance tank. When available quantity is
enough, go to step 7. When available quantity is NOT enough, following
messages are displayed every 1 second, and maintenance tank LED blinks
until maintenance tank is replaced with new one.

LCD panel message: “REPLACE WITH NEW CARTRIDGE”

3. Following message is displayed, when new ink cartridge is installed, and
CSIC is contacted.
LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”

Product Description

When installed ink cartridge is not enough for initial filling, following
message is displayed every 1 second, corresponded slot LED blinks, and
go back to step 3-2.

LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH INK”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

LCD panel message: “SELECT INK SET”
Installed ink set

When all ink remaining except changing slot is enough for initial filling,
go to step 4.

LCD panel message: “NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN MAINTE TANK”
“REPLACE WITH NEW MAINTENANCE TANK”

Operating Panel

64

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

2. The printer checks CSIC after maintenance tank is replaced. When CSIC
detects that the maintenance tank have enough available quantity, got to step
7. When available quantity is NOT enough, repeat Procedure step 6-1 and step
6-2.
7.

8.

10. Following message is displayed, and all slots LEDs blink, after the draining
cartridge is removed.
LCD panel message: “INSERT ALL INK CARTRIDGES”

Following messages are displayed every 1 second, and #1 slot LED blinks, after
available quantity of maintenance tank is checked.

NOTE: Ink remaining for initial filling and wrong cartridge are checked as same
as procedure step3

LCD panel message: “READY FOR DRAINING”
“INSERT DRAINING CARTRIDGE IN #X”

11. Following message is displayed and all slot LEDs blink after all cartridges are
installed, and CSIC is connected.

The printer starts ejecting ink from corresponded ink tube.

LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”

1. Following message is displayed, and XX slot LED blinks, after draining

12. Ink filling starts automatically after all ink installation.

cartridge is installed, and CSIC is connected.

LCD panel message: “INK CHARGING XXX%”

LCD panel message: “SET INK LEVER”

2. The printer checks CSIC after ink lever is set. When the cartridge is correct,
go to step 8-3. When the cartridge is wrong, go to step 8-2-1. When the slot is
wrong, go to step 8-2-2.
1. When a cartridge except draining cartridge is installed, following
messages are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks until the
cartridge is removed. Go back to step 8-1.

13. Ink filling completed.
The manufacture logo, ink remaining, and printable pages, which are recorded in
replaced ink cartridge CSIC, are displayed.
14. Paper is fed, and cleaning (CL2) is done only for the first printing after ink
replacement.

LCD panel message: “WRONG CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

2. When the cartridge is installed in a slot except XX, following messages
are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks until the cartridge
is removed. Go back to step 8-1.
LCD panel message: “INSERT CARTRIDGE IN CORRECT SLOT”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”

3. Ink ejection starts and following message is displayed.
LCD panel message: “DRAINING XXX%” (0%~100%)

4. Following messages are displayed every 1 second, and XX slot LED blinks,
after corresponded ink tube ejection is completed.
LCD panel message: “REMOVE DRAINING CARTRIDGE”
“RELEASE INK LEVER”
9.

Repeat step 8 when 2 cartridges are replaced. Slot [XX] changes to [K2], and LED
shifts to #2.

Product Description

Operating Panel

65

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1

MAINTENANCE MODE 1 SETUP ITEMS
Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items

OUTLINE

† Startup
The maintenance mode 1 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
Pause button.

† Operation
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇

3.

4.
5.

6.

buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button.
[Setting menu] is displayed on the upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed
on the lower line.
The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The '*' represents the current setup value.
Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value
can be changed. The '*' represents the current setup value.
When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started.No operation occurs if '*' is already
displayed.
It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.

Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Print hexadecimal dump
HEX DUMP

(-)

(PRINT)

Panel display language
select
LANGUAGE
-LANGUAGE

(-)

(-)

ENGLISH, JAPANESE

Unit change
UNIT

(-)

(-)

METER, FEET/INCH

Parallel interface mode
PARALLEL I/F

(-)

(-)

ECP, COMPAT

Set IEEE1284.4
IEEE1284.4

(-)

(-)

ON, OFF

Initialize panel setting
DEFAULT PANEL

(-)

(-)

EXEC

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

† Termination
1. The printer is ready for printing following reset after selecting the panel
display language.

Ink information (K1)
(K1 CARTRIDGE)

Setup value
EXEC *1

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT K1)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE K1)

BLACK / MATTE K /
GRAY

Ink type
(INK TYPE K1)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP K1)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-K1)

E*****F, E**** F, E***
F,E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE K1)

/

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE K1)

/

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE K1)

 Month

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE K1)

2. Switch power OFF > ON.
† Panel display
Character strings on the second line in “Panel message translation” are displayed
on the second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of
LCD panel.

Product Description

Operating Panel

66

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Ink information (K2)
(K2 CARTRIDGE)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Setup value

Ink information (C)
(C CARTRIDGE)

Setup value

EPSON

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT M)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE K2)

BLACK / MATTE K /
GRAY

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE M)

MAGENTA

Ink type
(INK TYPE K2)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink type
(INK TYPE M)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP K2)

110ml/220ml

Ink capacity
(INK CAP M)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-K2)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-M)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE K2)

/

Product date
(PROD DATE M)

/

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE K2)

/

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE K2)

 Month

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT C)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE C)

Ink information (M)
(M CARTRIDGE)

Expire date

(EXPIR DATE M)
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE M)

/
 Month

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE M)

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Lc)

EPSON

CYAN

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Lc)

LGT. CYAN

Ink type
(INK TYPE C)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink type
(INK TYPE LC)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP C)

110ml/220ml

Ink capacity
(INK CAP LC)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-C)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-LC)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE C)

/

Product date
(PROD DATE LC)

/

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE C)

/

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE LC)

/

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE C)

 Month

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE LC)

 Month

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE C)

Product Description

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT K2)

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE K2)

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Ink information (Lc)
(Lc CARTRIDGE)

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE LC)

Operating Panel

67

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Ink information (Lm)
(Lm CARTRIDGE)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Table 1-46. Maintenance mode 1 setup items (continued)
Top menu
(Panel display)

Setup value

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Lm)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Lm)

LGT. MAGENTA

Ink type
(INK TYPE LM)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP LM)

110ml/220ml

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-LM)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE LM)

/

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE LM)
Ink life after open
(INK LIFE LM)

Ink information (Y)
(Y CARTRIDGE)

Item menu 2
(Panel display)

Setup value

Paper feeding adjustment
conversion table 1 (User
table pigment)
(XX1=:)

(-)

 :00H~C9H 
:00H~C9H,FFH

Paper feeding adjustment
conversion table 2 (User
table dye)
(XX2=:)

(-)

 :00H~C9H 
:00H~C9H,FFH

The whole paper feeding
adjustment offset (Pigment)
(XXO=)

(-)

 :-32~0~+32

(-)

 :-32~0~+32

/

The whole paper feeding
adjustment offset (Dye)
(XXP=)

 Month

System table version
(XXS=)

(-)

 : F/W Version

User table version
(XXU=)

(-)

 :00H~FFH

Initialize user table
(XXI)

(-)

EXEC

SN Menu
(SN MENU)

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE LM)

Ink information menu
(CRTG INFO MENU)

Item menu 1
(Panel display)

Manufacture logo
(MANUFACT Y)

EPSON

Ink color
(CARTRIDGE Y)

YELLOW

Ink type
(INK TYPE Y)

PIGMENT, DYE

Ink capacity
(INK CAP Y)

110ml/220ml

HEXADECIMAL DUMP

Ink remaining
(INK LEFT-Y)

E*****F, E**** F, E*** F,
E** F, E* F, E F

Product date
(PROD DATE Y)

/

Expire date
(EXPIR DATE Y)

/

Ink life after open
(INK LIFE Y)

 Month

The hex dump function allows data sent to the printer to be printed and displayed in
hexadecimal format. One line contains 16 data items in hexadecimal format, with the
equivalent characters printed at the right of each line. If no equipment characters exist
(control codes, etc.), a period is printed. It prints every 16 data. It prints the last data
with pressing the Pause button, when it is less than 16. Panel setting is not available in
the hex dump mode. Using this function, users can check that data has been sent
correctly from the computer to the printer. To terminate this mode, stop printing with
Pause button and shut off the power.

Passed time after open
 Month
(AGE Y)

Note *1:

When hexadecimal dump mode is executed, “PRINT” is displayed.

PANEL DISPLAY LANGUAGE SELECTION
Users can select English, French, Italian, German, Spanish, and Portuguese for display
on the LCD with this mode.

Product Description

Operating Panel

68

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

UNIT CHANGE

INK INFORMATION MENU

Users can change length unit of LCD panel / pattern print with this mode.

It displays ink information recorded in CSIC.

„ METER: meter (m)
„ FEET/INCH: Feet(ft)/Inch(in)

• Manufacture logo: Manufacture information saved in CSIC of each ink

cartridge is displayed.
• Ink Color: Ink color information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

Unit of following messages can be changed;

displayed.
• Ink Type: Ink type information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

Table 1-47.
Item
Panel LCD display

displayed.

Message
Meter

• Ink capacity: Ink capacity information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

Feet/Inch

Paper counter

xxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Job information display (Paper used)

xxxxxxxcm2

xxxxxx.xsqft

Current Paper Count

xxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Previous Paper Count

xxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Status sheet

Use Paper

xxxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Job information print

Paper used (vertical)

xxxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Paper used (horizontal)

xxxxxx.xcm

xxxxft xxin

Nozzle check pattern

Note : This function is available only for English.

PARALLEL I/F MODE
Users can switch parallel I/F receiving speed with this mode; ECP/compatibility
1284.4 SETTING (D4)
Users can set 1284.4mode with this mode ON.

displayed.
• Ink remaining: Ink remaining of each ink cartridge is displayed.
• Product date: Product date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

displayed with / form.
• Expire date: Ink expire date information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge

is displayed.
• Ink life after open: Ink life information saved in CSIC of each ink cartridge is

displayed.
• Passed time after open: Passed time after opened of each ink cartridge is

displayed.
NOTE: These are displayed every color (K~Y).
SSN MENU

† Paper feed adjustment table
m2 value set by mechanism sequence command “Paper feed adjustment” is converted
to the actual paper feed adjustment value with paper feed adjustment table saved in
NVRAM.
(The conversion is valid when mechanism sequence command “Paper feed adjustment
mode = ON”.)
Users can change following conversion table with this maintenance mode.
• User table for dye media
• User table for pigment media

† Change of paper feed adjustment table by users
„ Format
“XXx=nn:mm”

Product Description

Operating Panel

69

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

„  indicates conversion value of  designated with mechanism
•
•

„
•
•
•

sequence command
Conversion tables are XX1 ~ XX2.
When  = FFh, applicable input value is not converted.
Operation
The cursor shifts between  and  with SelecType button and Paper
Source button.
The value pointed with the cursor increases/decreases with Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons.
Setting value is saved into NVRAM with “Enter” button.

1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2
OUTLINE

† Startup
The maintenance mode 2 is selected by switching power ON while pushing the
Paper source, Cut/Eject, and Paper Feed ∇ buttons.

† Operation
1. The setting menu select mode is selected after power ON.
2. Each setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇

† Paper feed adjustment offset
Offset value is set to add to the actual paper feed adjustment value. The setup
value is always valid regardless of mechanism sequence command “Paper feed
adjustment mode” setting.

„ Format

3.

“XX0=” Bias value is set for pigment.
„ Operation
• The value increases/decreases with Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons.
• Setting value is saved into NVRAM with Enter button.

4.

† System table version
It displays version No. of paper feed adjustment conversion table saved in the
printer.
Format:

5.

“XXS=”
NOTE 1:  is 5 letters indicating version of engine controller.
(e.g. “0270C”)
2:  is 1-figure hexadecimal number indicating change history of conversion
table. (e.g.”0”)

† User table version
When a user change the table, the version No. is added 1 optionally.
Format:
“XXU=nn” * is 2-figure hexadecimal number

† User table initializing

6.

buttons in the setting menu select mode. It is shifted to setting item select
menu by pressing the SelecType button.
[Setting menu] is displayed on the upper line, and [Setting item] is displayed
on the lower line.
The setting menu is displayed one after another by pressing Paper Feed ∆∇
buttons in the setting item select mode. It is shifted to setting value select
mode of the setting item by pressing the SelecType button. [Setting item] is
displayed on the upper line, and [Setting value] is displayed on the lower line.
The '*' represents the current setup value.
Setting value is displayed on the lower line one after another by pressing
Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons in the setting value select mode if the setting value can
be changed. The '*' represents the current setup value.
When the Enter button is pressed in the setting value select mode, the
displayed setting value is entered as the current setting value. If it has a
corresponded operation, it is started. No operation occurs if '*' is already
displayed.
It returns to the setting item select menu by pressing the Paper Source button
in the setting value select mode. It returns to the setting menu select mode by
pressing the Paper Source button in the setting item select menu.

† Termination
Switch power OFF > ON.

† Panel display
Character strings on the second line in “Panel message translation” are displayed
on the second line of LCD panel. Setup values are displayed on the second line of
LCD panel.

Users can initialize user table to system table with this mode.

Product Description

Operating Panel

70

EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600

Revision A

MAINTENANCE MODE 2 SETUP ITEMS
Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items
Top menu
(Panel display)

Counter view menu
(VIEW COUNTERS)

Counter initialize menu
(CLEAR COUNTERS)

Product Description

Item menu 1 (Panel display)

Item menu 2

Panel display

Setup value

Cutter life counter value (CUTTER)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Cutter life total counter value (CUTTER TOTAL)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Total prints counter value (TOTAL PAGES)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Waste ink counter value (MAINTE TANK)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

CR motor life counter value (CR MOTOR)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

CR motor life total counter value (CR TOTAL)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

PF motor life counter value (PF MOTOR)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (K1) life counter value (HEAD K1)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (K2) life counter value (HEAD K2)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (C) life counter value (HEAD C)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (M) life counter value (HEAD M)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (LC) life counter value (HEAD LC)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (LM) life counter value (HEAD LM)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Head unit (Y) life counter value (HEAD Y)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Flashing box (FL BOX)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Cleaning unit life counter value (CLEANER)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Sponge for borderless print counter (SPONGE)

-

-

0~4294967295 (Decimal)

Initialize NVRAM, timer, life counter, mechanical
counter (INIT ALL)

-

-

EXEC

Initialize NVRAM (NVRAM)

-

-

EXEC

Initialize RTC (RTC)

-

-

//
/ Initialize cutter life total (CUTTER) - - EXEC Initialize CR motor life (CR MOTOR) - - EXEC Initialize total CR motor life (CR TOTAL) - - EXEC Initialize total PF motor life (PF MOTOR) - - EXEC Initialize head unit (HEAD) - - EXEC Initialize cleaning unit (CLEANER) - - EXEC Initialize total printed pages counter (TOTAL PAGES) - - EXEC Initialize waste ink capacity (MAINTE TANK) - - EXEC Initialize flashing box (FL BOX) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal) Initialize sponge for borderless print counter (SPONGE) - - 0~4294967295 (Decimal) Operating Panel 71 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Paper feeding adjustment conversion table 3 (System table pigment) (XX1=:) - - :00H~C9H :00H~C9H,FFH Paper feeding adjustment conversion table 4 (System table dye) (XX2=:) - - :00H~C9H :00H~C9H,FFH System table version (XXS=) - - : F/W version Parameter backup (BACKUP) - - EXEC Adjustment / setup menu (SERVICE CONFIG) Device ID change (D-ID) - - nk cartridge type setting (NPD) - - CSIC detection level (ED MODE) - - Operation time, environment (MENUE) Maintenance information menu (MAINTINFO) Carriage (MENUR) Product Description Setup value For R4C803P StylusPro7600 StylusPro7600D PX-7000 For R4C825P StylusPro9600 StylusPro9600D PX-9000 0,1,2 O/N/X RTC date E1
RTC initialized date E2
Environment temperature E3 First power ON date E4
Printer total energization time E5 Energy star non-sleep mode total time E6 Paper sensor total energization time E7 Suction fan total energization time E8 Front cover open/close times E9 Temperature at print less than 15°C E10 Temperature at print 15°C ~ 20°C E11 Temperature at print 20°C ~ 25°C E12 Temperature at print 25°C ~ 30°C E13 Temperature at print 30°C ~ 35°C E14 Temperature at print more than 35°C E15 The highest temperature at print E16 The lowest temperature at print E17 Carriage total turning times (190~240cps) R1 Carriage total turning times (240cps) R2 Carriage durable parts replacement date R3
Carriage turning times after durable parts replacement (190~240cps) R4 Carriage turning times after durable parts replacement (240cps) R5 Operating Panel 72 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information Ink system (MENUS) menu (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Total waste ink counter (sponge) S1 Total waste ink counter (flushing box) S2 Manual cleaning times S3 Cleaning times (CL1) S4 Cleaning times (CL2) S5 Cleaning times (CL3) S6 Cleaning times (CL4) S7 Cleaning times (CL5PowerCL) S8 Final CL5 cleaning date S9
Cleaning times (TCL1) S10 Cleaning times (TCL2) S11 Cleaning times (TCL3) S12 Cleaning times (TCL4) S13 Ink type replacement times S14 Ink replacement date (last time) S15
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S16
Ink type replacement times S17 Ink replacement date (last time) S18
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S19
Ink type replacement times S20 Ink replacement date (last time) S21
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S22
Ink type replacement times S23 Ink replacement date (last time) S24
Ink replacement date (2 times before) S25
Ink type replacement times S26 Ink replacement date (last time) S27
Ink treplacement date (2 times before) S28
Ink type replacement times S29 Ink type replacement (last time) S30 Ink type replacement (2 times before) S31 Maintenance tank replacement times S32 Maintenance tank replacement date (this time) S33
Maintenance tank replacement date (last time) S34
Maintenance tank replacement date (2 times before) S35
Operating Panel 73 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information menu Ink 1 (MENUA) (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Total ink use EPSON genuine ink P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) A1 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) A2 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink M.K A3 Total ink use Others Slot 1 A4 Total ink use Others Slot 2 A5 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink C A6 Total ink use Others C A7 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink M A8 Total ink use Others M A9 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink LC A10 Total ink use Others LC A11 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink LM A12 Total ink use Others LM A13 Total ink use EPSON genuine ink Y A14 Total ink use Others Y Ink cartridge replacement times P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) 110ml A15 A16 Ink cartridge replacement times P.K(K in slot 1 for dye model) 220ml A17 Ink cartridge replacement times L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) 110ml A18 Ink cartridge replacement times L.K(K in slot 2 for dye model) 220ml A19 Ink cartridge replacement times M.K A20 110ml Ink cartridge replacement times M.K 220ml A21 Ink cartridge replacement times C 110ml A22 Ink cartridge replacement times C 220ml A23 Ink cartridge replacement times M 110ml A24 Ink cartridge replacement times M 220ml A25 Ink cartridge replacement times LC 110ml A26 Ink cartridge replacement times LC 220ml A27 Ink cartridge replacement times LM 110ml A28 Ink cartridge replacement times LM 220ml A29 Ink cartridge replacement times Y 110ml A30 Ink cartridge replacement times Y 220ml A31 Operating Panel 74 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information Ink 2 (MENUB) menu (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Each color ink replacement date (Black1, this time) B1 Each color ink vendor (Black1, this time) B2
Each color ink replacement date (Black1, last time) B3
Each color ink vendor (Black1, last time) B4 Each color ink replacement date (Black1, 2 times before) B5
Each color ink vendor (Black1, 2 times before) B6 Each color ink replacement date (Black2, this time) B7
Each color ink vendor (Black2, this time) B8 Each color ink replacement date (Black2, last time) B9
Each color ink vendor (Black2, last time) B10 Each color ink replacement date (Black2, 2 times before) B11
Each color ink vendor (Black2, 2 times before) B12 Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, this time) B13
Each color ink vendor (Cyan, this time) B14 Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, last time) B15
Each color ink vendor (Cyan, last time) B16 Each color ink replacement date (Cyan, 2 times before) B17
Each color ink vendor (Cyan, 2 times before) B18 Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, this time) B19
Each color ink vendor (Magenta, this time) B20 Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, last time) B21
Each color ink vendor (Magenta, last time) B22 Each color ink replacement date (Magenta, 2 times before) B23
Each color ink vendor (Magenta, 2 times before) B24 Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, this time) B25
Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, this time) B26 Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, last time) B27
Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, last time) B28 Each color ink replacement date (LgtCyan, 2 times before) B29
Each color ink vendor (LgtCyan, 2 times before) B30 Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, this time) B31
Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, this time) B32 Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, last time) B33
Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, last time) B34 Each color ink replacement date (LgtMagenta, 2 times before) B35
Each color ink vendor (LgtMagenta, 2 times before) B36 Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, this time) B37
Operating Panel 75 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information menu Ink 2 (MENUB) (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Each color ink vendor (Yellow, this time) B38 Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, last time) B39
Each color ink vendor (Yellow, last time) B40 Each color ink replacement date (Yellow, 2 times before) B41
Each color ink vendor (Yellow, 2 times before) B42 Operating Panel 76 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information Paper (MENUP) menu (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Roll paper setting times P1 Sheets setting times P2 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 1) P3 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 1) P4 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 2) P5 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 2) P6 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 3) P7 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 3) P8 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 4) P9 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 4) P10 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 5) P11 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 5) P12 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 6) P13 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 6) P14 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 7) P15 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 7) P16 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 8) P17 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 8) P18 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 9) P19 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 9) P20 Print length of each paper size (Roll paper width 10) P21 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Roll paper width 10) P22 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 1) P23 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 1) P24 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 2) P25 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 2) P26 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 3) P27 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 3) P28 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 4) P29 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 4) P30 Print length of each paper size(Sheetwidth5) P31 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 5) P32 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 6) P33 Operating Panel 77 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Paper (MENUP) Item menu 2 Panel display Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 6) P34 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 7) P35 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 7) P36 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 8) P37 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 8) P38 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 9) P39 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 9) P40 Print length of each paper size (Sheet width 10) P41 Paper ejection times of each paper size (Sheet width 10) Maintenance information menu (MAINTINFO) Print mode (MENUM) Product Description Setup value P42 Print mode setting times 2880-1440 Uni-D M1 Print mode setting times 1440-0720 Uni-D M2 Print mode setting times 720-720 Uni-D M3 Print mode setting times 720-360 Uni-D M4 Print mode setting times 360-720 Uni-D M5 Print mode setting times Others Uni-D M6 Print mode setting times 2880-1440 Bi-D M7 Print mode setting times 1440-720 Bi-D M8 Print mode setting times 720-720 Bi-D M9 Print mode setting times 720-360 Bi-D M10 Print mode setting times 360-720 Bi-D M11 Print mode setting times Others Bi-D M12 Borderless print times Sponge 1 M13 Borderless printing times Sponge 2 M14 Borderless print times Sponge 3 M15 Borderless print times Sponge 4 M16 Borderless print times Sponge 5 M17 Borderless print times Sponge 6 M18 Borderless print times Sponge 7 M19 Borderless print times Sponge 8 M20 Borderless print times Sponge 9 M21 Borderless print times Sponge 10 M22 Borderless print times Sponge 11 M23 Borderless print times Sponge 12 M24 Borderless print (four edges) Operation times (1 cut) M25 Borderless print (four edges) Operation times (2 cuts) M26 Operating Panel 78 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information Panel setting (MENUO) menu (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value PC setting O1 Roll paper margin O2 Borderless print setting O3 Cutter position adjustment O4
Final cutter position adjustment O5 Nozzle check pattern print O6 Final nozzle check pattern print O7
Bi-D BLACK Adjustment times O8 Bi-D BLACK Final adjustment date O9
Bi-D COLOR Adjustment times O10 Final adjustment times/date Bi-D COLOR Uni-D Adjustment times Uni-D Final adjustment date O11
O12 O13
Cutting pressure O14 Cutting method O15 Paper feeding adjustment O16 Paper suction O17 Print adjustment O18 Operating Panel 79 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Maintenance information Fatal error (MENUF) menu (MAINTINFO) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Service call history1 (Type) F1 Service call history1 (Date) F2
Service call history2 (Type) F3 Service call history2 (Date) F4
Service call history3 (Type) F5 Service call history3 (Date) F6
Service call history4 (Type) F7 Service call history4 (Date) F8
Service call history5 (Type) F9 Service call history5 (Date) F10
Service call history6 (Type) F11 Service call history6 (Date) F12
Service call history7 (Type) F13 Service call history7 (Date) F14
Service call history8 (Type) F15 Service call history8 (Date) F16
Service call history9 (Type) F17 Service call history9 (Date) F18
Service call history10 (Type) F19 Service call history1 0(Date) F20
Operating Panel 80 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Normal error (MENUN) Maintenance information menu (MAINTINFO) Parts counter clear at replacement (MENUX) Product Description Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Normal error history 1 (Type) N1 Normal error history 1 (Date) N2
Normal error history 2 (Type) N3 Normal error history 2 (Date) N4
Normal error history 3 (Type) N5 Normal error history 3 (Date) N6
Normal error history 4 (Type) N7 Normal error history 4 (Date) N8
Normal error history 5 (Type) N9 Normal error history 5 (Date) N10
Normal error history 6 (Type) N11 Normal error history 6 (Date) N12
Normal error history 7 (Type) N13 Normal error history 7 (Date) N14
Normal error history 8 (Type) N15 Normal error history 8 (Date) N16
Normal error history 9 (Type) N17 Normal error history 9 (Date) N18
Normal error history 10 (Type) N19 Normal error history 1 (0Date) N20
Error times (Roll paper width) N21 Error times (Sheet) N22 Carriage unit clear at replacement X1 EXEC Cleaning unit clear at replacement X2 EXEC Head clear at replacement X3 EXEC Cutter solenoid clear at replacement X4 EXEC Operating Panel 81 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 1-48. Maintenance mode 2 setup items (continued) Top menu (Panel display) Item menu 1 (Panel display) Item menu 2 Panel display Setup value Operation time, environment information counter clear (INIT.MENUE) - - EXEC EXEC Carriage information counter clear (INIT.MENUR) - - Ink system information clear (INIT.MENUS) - - EXEC Head information counter clear (INIT.MENUH) - - EXEC Cutter information counter clear (INIT.MENUC) Maintenance information Ink information 1 counter clear (INIT.MENUA) initializing menu Ink information 2 counter clear (INIT.MENUB) (INITINFO) Paper information counter clear (INIT.MENUP) - - EXEC - - EXEC - - EXEC - - EXEC Print mode information counter clear (INIT.MENUM) - - EXEC Panel setting information counter clear (INIT.MENUO) - - EXEC Fatal error information counter clear (INIT.MENUF) - - EXEC Normal error information counter clear (INIT.MENUN) - - EXEC Note 1: The panel display is English that is common for Japanese / English / French / German / Spanish / Portuguese. 2: Roll paper widths XX are following, Stylus Pro 7600: 610mm and over ~ 160mm and under is classified at 50mm intervals. Stylus Pro 9600: 1018mm and over ~ 10mm and under is classified at 100mm intervals. 3: However, if the witdth of the installed paper is smaller than set width, the latter will be used. Product Description Operating Panel 82 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A INITIALIZE NVRAM, TIMER, LIFE COUNTER, MECHANICAL COUNTER INITIALIZE CLEANING UNIT LIFE Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the NVRAM, timer, life counter, and mechanical counter. Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the cleaning unit life counter. INITIALIZE TOTAL PRINTS INITIALIZE NVRAM Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the total printed page counter. Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the NVRAM. INITIALIZE INK CAPACITY INITIALIZE RTC Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the ink capacity counter. Selecting this mode allows the user to set RTC initialized time to NVRAM. The panel display is following; NVRAM COUNTER VALUE INDICATION RTC INIT = //
/ Selecting this mode allows the user to indicate each life counter in decimal. NOTE: : year, : month,
: day, : hour PARAMETER BACKUP The cursor shifts “year → month → day → hour → year···.” with SelecType button. Time is adjusted with Paper Feed ∆∇ buttons. RTC initialized time is set to NVRAM with Enter button, and RTC is initialized. NOTE: “RTC backup battery end” maintenance call is reset when RTC is initialized. INITIALIZE CR MOTOR LIFE Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the CR motor life counter. INITIALIZE CR MOTOR LIFE TOTAL Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the CR motor life total counter. Selecting this mode allows the user to move to parameter backup mode. In parameter backup mode, NVRAM responses and changes to manufacture setting commands are possible with minimal chance of error. When an error occurs, NVRAM contents are acquired and can be analyzed. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION MENU Read information for printer maintenance. MAINTENANCE INFORMATION INITIALIZING MENU Initialize information for printer maintenance. (Counter clear) PARAMETER BACKUP MODE MENU INITIALIZE PF MOTOR LIFE When this mode is selected, you can execute NVRAM backup or writing. Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the PF motor life counter. This mode does not support any printing data. In case printing data is sent, normal operation is not guaranteed. INITIALIZE HEAD UNIT LIFE Selecting this mode allows the user to initialize the head unit life counter. Product Description Only turning off the power works to terminate this mode. (Transition to any other menu is not allowed.) Operating Panel 83 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.4.6 Paper feeding adjustment conversion table The adjustment conversion table has four 256byte screens in NVRAM. The details are as follows. † How to change correction values „ User table The user table can be changed from the SN menu of Maintenance mode 1. (See “1.4.4 Maintenance Mode 1 (p.66)” for details.) It can be changed by registering the remote commands paper feeding adjustment offset value commands (SN83). It is necessary to save changes (SV). Table 1-49. Table name Description 1 Pigment user table For pigment ink media, can be changed by user, 256byte 2 Dye user table For dye inku media, can be changed by user 256byte 3 Pigment system table For pigment ink media, cannot be changed by user, 256byte 4 Dye system table For dye ink media, user cannot be changed by user, 256byte „ System table † Use during printing „ User table When the conversion mode is ON in the paper feeding adjustment conversion mode (SN 0A), the paper feeding adjustment setting (SN 04) m2 parameter will be media ID and indicate user table address. The value stored in this address is used as the paper feeding adjustment value. However, if the stored value is FFh, the table is divided into three parts as shown below. The m2 parameter of the paper feeding adjustment setting (SN 04) to be used as the paper feeding adjustment value changes depending on the corresponding ID value. The system table can be changed from the Maintenance mode 2 adjustment menu. (See “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2 (p.70)” for details.) † User table initialization „ Maintenance mode 1 Selecting “User table initialization” in SN menu allows the user to initialize Maintenance mode 1. „ Remote commands Setting m2=00h in paper feeding adjustment offset value registration (SN 83) allows the user to initialize remote commands. 1. 01h ~ 40h Use the value of ID+50h as the paper feeding adjustment value. 2. 41h ~ C0h Use ID as the paper feeding adjustment value. 3. C1h ~ FFh Use the value of ID-64h as the paper feeding adjustment value. NOTE: Designation of pigment/dye depends on ink type setting (NPD setting/IK). „ System table This table is not used during printing. The manufacture setting value is stored to use as backup for user table. Product Description Operating Panel 84 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 1.4.7 Firmware Reload Revision A 1.4.7.4 Compulsory start F/W DOWNLOAD mode Reload method from ROM-DIMM is following; When F/W installation fails for some reasons and start up from begins the backup area, F/W DOWNLOAD mode is automatically selected. See above for more information about F/W DOWNLOAD mode. 1. Write RCC format F/W file into ROM-DIMM (C309type). NOTE: This mode is released when F/W installation is completed properly. 2. Switch power OFF and unplug the cable. 3. Remove the rear cover and insert “1.” ROM-DIMM into the exclusive slot. 4. Switch power ON. 5. Installation starts and finishes automatically. 6. Switch power OFF and unplug the cable. 7. Remove ROM-DIMM from exclusive slot. 8. Switch power ON. 1.4.7.1 Reload from ROM-DIMM 1.4.7.2 Reload with F/W DOWNLOAD mode Reload method via parallel interface is following; 1. Connect the printer to the host with a parallel cable. 2. Switch power ON pushing Enter + Paper Source + Cleaning buttons. 3. Check the printer panel displays “F/W DOWNLOAD”. 4. Send UPG format F/W file from the host. 5. Installation is completed. 6. Restart the printer (Power Off → Power On) 1.4.7.3 Installation with service utility (F/W Update function) Installation via parallel interface is following; 1. Connect the printer to the host with a parallel cable. 2. Switch power ON. 3. Check that the printer panel displays “READY”. 4. Send UPG format F/W file from the host service utility. 5. Installation is completed. 6. The printer restarts automatically. Product Description Operating Panel 85 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.4.8 Function to prevent irregular printing 1.4.9 Initialization † Strong cancel data There are three kinds of initialization method. When 16KB DC1 is sent to the head of each job, the printer performs a special initialization operation. Refer to “1.4.9 Initialization (p.86)” for this initialization operation. 1.4.9.1 Hardware initialization † Skip reading of irregular data „ Unprintable characters † For initialization, printer operates as follows: „ Initializes printer mechanism. „ Clears input data buffer. „ Clears print buffer. „ Sets default values. It doesn't print characters including ASCII code with text print mode. Table 1-50. Unprintable hexadecimal code (Control character code) Code Character Code Character Code Character 00h NULL 10h DLE 7Fh DEL 01h SOH 11h DC1 - - 02h STX 12h DC2 - - 03h ETX 13h DC3 - - This printer is initialized when power to the printer is turned on. 1.4.9.2 Software initialization † The printer is initialized also by the ESC @ command. „ For initialization, printer operates as follows: • Clears print buffer. • Sets default values. 04h EOT 14h DC4 - - 05h ENQ 15h NAK - - 06h ACK 16h SYN - - 07h BEL 17h ETB - - 08h BS 18h CAN - - 09h HT 19h EM - - 0Ah NL (LF) 1Ah SUB - - 1.4.9.3 Panel initialization 0Bh VT 1Bh ESC - - 0Ch NP (FF) 1Ch FS - - The printer is initialized when the Pause button is pressed for more than 3 seconds, or the printer recognizes the -INIT signal. 0Dh CR 1Dh GS - - 0Eh SO 1Eh RS - - 0Fh SI 1Fh US - - NOTE: 0Ah, 0Ch, 0Dh, 11h, and 1Bh are ESCP command supported by the printer. The printer judges the command and decides to print it. „ Job timeout Refer to “1.4.3.10 Job Timeout Setting (p.42)”. Product Description † Cancel enhancement data(DC1×16kbyte) initializes the printer. „ For initialization, printer operates as follows: • Clears print buffer. • Sets default values. • Immediately cut only when some printing remain on the paper. † For initialization, printer operates as follows: „ Eject a paper. (If roll paper, it cuts paper skipping print part when Paper „ „ „ „ Operating Panel Source = Auto Cut, it doesn’t cut when Paper Source = Cutter Off with SelecType) Cap the print head. Clears input data buffer. Clears print buffer. Sets default values. 86 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.4.10 Default Setup Values 1.4.10.2 Ink Type Setting 1.4.10.1 Initial Setting for Operation In ink type setting during initial operation, dye ink will not be recognized if the switch No. 6 of the DIP Switches (SWD600) on the Main Board of the printer. Default setup values are as follows. The parameters for items that may be saved for panel setup, default setup, and remote commands are used as default values. „ Page position: Current paper position as page start position „ Line feed: 1/6 inch „ Left margin : Stylus Pro 7600 237th character : Stylus Pro 9600 437th character „ Right margin: 1st character „ Character pitch: 10 cpi „ Print mode: Text mode (non-raster graphics mode) There may be a case where "Ink Type" is not set (NPD=0) by ink detection at power on (with the cartridges installed and without any other error). In such a case, check the position of the switch No. 6 of the DIP Switches. NOTE: When the power is turned off without the cartridges installed, NPD=0 will be maintained. † When switch No. 6 is OFF (dye prohibited) „ When pigment has been installed • Sets "Ink Type" for the printer to "Pigment". • Initial charge is started if the initial charge flag has been set. • Every time the power is turned on after that, the printer will start as the „ • • • Pigment machine. When dye has been installed Displays "INVALID CARTRIDGE". (The LEDs for all colors flash even when dye for only one color has been installed.) Does not set "Ink Type" for the printer. (NPD=0 is maintained) NPD=0 even at the next start of the printer. † When switch No. 6 is ON • Determines the ink type from the ink set that has been installed properly. • If the printer is currently used as the dye machine (NPD=2), the printer does not make judgment at power on. Therefore, the printer can be used as the dye machine the same way as before. • Even when "Ink Type" is changed to "Dye" directly in NPD mode, the printer can be used as the dye machine. Product Description Operating Panel 87 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.4.10.3 MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes Table below indicates the relationship between the setting values by MW printing adjustment (setting on panel) and the printing mode numbers. Table 1-51. MW Printing Adjustment / Setting Values and Printing Modes No. ESC(K 4 03h n1 n2 – – 360×360 – 360×360 5 – Non-MW/FOL 6 – MW 7 – MW ESC(D Setting on Panel 1 8 – FOL – Non-FOL 10 – Non-FOL 11 – Non-FOL 3 5 – 360×360 5 9 FOL – 360×720 – 720×360 14 – FOL2/MW2 – 720×360 9 7 8 6 7 8 10 11 10 10 11 11 10 11 – – – 12 14 15 17 – – 66h 720×720 15 – 68h 720×720 15 720×720 16 15 17 16 16 16 12 14 01h 720×720 – 12 12 13 15 8 8 13 16 – 7 9 9 Non-FOL2/MW2 8 7 9 B0h 360×720 – 6 6 360×720 – 7 6 50h 360×720 13 6 5 360×360 12 5 5 – – 4 No.4 20h 360×360 9 2 17 17 18 18 18 17 18 18 – 19 – Non-8PASS – 1440×720 20 – 8PASS – 1440×720 21 – – – 2880×720 21 22 – – – 2880×1440 22 19 20 19 20 Note : For printing modes (Nos.), see “1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table (p.89)”. Product Description Operating Panel 88 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.4.10.4 Printing Mode Combination Table Valid print mode combination is following; Table 1-52. No. ESC ( K ESC( i n1 n2 ESC ( D ESC ( e Output resolution Output dot size Pass Nozzle Nozzle # POL nozzle Feeding CR speed [CPS] Notes Specified by ESC(v command Specified by ESC(v command Specified by ESC(v command 240 DMW 240 DMW 190 DMW 0 192/360” 240 #1~#95 #1~#95 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 #1~#96 0 0 35 22 21 35 43 14 22 14 0 14 26 30 4 8 1-189/360” 95/360” 61/360” 37/360” 75/720” 61/720” 53/720” 41/720” 37/360” 41/720” 2-93/720” 41/720” 35/720” 33/720” 23/720” 11/720” 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 240 #3~#94 0 23/1440” 190 1 - - - 180×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 180×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 - - - - 2 - - - 360×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×180 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 - - - - 3 - - - 720×180 VSD4 720×180 VSD4 - - - - 4 03H - - 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 192 #1~#96 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 - Non-MW/FOL MW MW FOL Non-FOL Non-FOL Non-FOL FOL Non-FOL2/MW2 FOL2/MW2 Except 8PASS 8PASS 20H 50H B0H 01H 66H 68H - 360×360 360×360 360×360 360×360 360×720 360×720 360×720 360×720 720×360 720×360 720×720 720×720 720×720 720×720 1440×720 1440×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 360×360 360×360 360×360 360×360 360×720 360×720 360×720 360×720 720×360 720×720 720×720 720×720 720×720 720×720 1440×720 1440×720 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 MD/ND/ND2/VSD1/VSD2 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 8 95 95 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 - - - 2880×1440 VSD4 2880×1440 VSD4 4 92 Pseudo 4 color highspeed color mode Color skip supported V resolution conversion Color skip supported Note : When an improper combination is set, it prints with default of setting resolution (designated dot size). Product Description Operating Panel 89 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.5 Controller † CPU: Hitachi SH7709S 100MHz † Code ROM: External, 2MB † Font ROM: None † RAM: „ Stylus Pro 7600: 32MB (Mounted RAM: IC4/6) „ Stylus Pro 9600:64MB (Mounted RAM: IC4/6, IC600/604) † Interface „ IEEE 1284 interface „ USB (HS, FS) „ Type B interface Product Description Controller 90 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.6 Interfaces Table 1-53. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Compatibility) (continued) Pin No. 1.6.1 Parallel Interface 10 Return GND pin 28 Signal Name -ACKNLG In/Out Function Out This signal, when the signal level is “Low”, indicates that the printer has received data and is ready to accept the next data. The pulse width is 1 µs or 3 µs. (See Figure 1-19) 1.6.1.1 Compatibility Mode 11 29 BUSY Out This signal, when the level is “HIGH”, indicates that the printer can not receive data. When the level is “LOW”, the signal indicates that the printer can accept data. This signal turns “HIGH” in one of the following cases: † During data entry † In error status 12 28 PE Out This signal, when the level is “HIGH”, indicates paper-out error. (Valid when ERROR = “LOW”) 13 28 SLCT Out Always at “HIGH” level when the power to the printer is on. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 kΩ. 14 30 -AFXT In Not used NOTE: It is recommended to use as short an interface cable as possible. 31 30 -INIT In The printer is initialized by input of a “LOW” pulse whose width is 50 µs or more. CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS 32 29 -ERROR For these signals, twist-pair wires are used, with the return side connected to the signal ground. 36 30 -SLIN 18 -- Logic H Out Always at “HIGH” level. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 KΩ. 35 -- +5V Out Always at “HIGH” level. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 kΩ. 17 16,33 19-30 15,34 -- Chassis GND - Chassis GND. -- GND - Signal GND. -- NC - Not used SPECIFICATION † Transmission mode: 8 bit parallel † Synchronization: By STROBE pulse † Handshaking: By BUSY and ACKNLG signal † Signal level: TTL level (IEEE1284Level 1 device) † Adaptable connector: 57-30360(amphenol) 36 pin or equivalent Table 1-53. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Compatibility) Pin No. Return GND pin Signal Name In/Out Function The strobe pulse. This signal is normally “HIGH” and read-in of data is executed after turning “LOW”. The pulse width required at the receive end is 0.5 µs or more. 1 19 -STROBE In 2 20 DATA0 In 3 21 DATA1 In 4 22 DATA2 In 5 23 DATA3 In 6 24 DATA4 In 7 25 DATA5 In 8 26 DATA6 In 9 27 DATA7 In Out In The “LOW” signal indicates that the printer is in error status. Not used Note 1: “-” is prefixed to each signal which is active at “LOW” level. 2: In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view. The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level when data is logical 1 and low level when data is logical 0. 3: The “return side” means twist-pair return, which is connected to the signal GND. For interface, each signal is connected with a twist-pair wire and the return side is also connected. For protection against noise, this cable is shielded and connected to the chassis GND for each of the center machine and the printer. 4: All the interface conditions are based on the TTL level standard. Each of the rise time and fall time is 0.2 µs or less. 5: See Figure 1-19 for details of signal timing. Product Description Interfaces 91 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 6: Do not perform data transfer by ignoring the -ACKNLG signal or BUSY signal. (Data transfer to this printer must be executed by checking the level of the -ACKNLG signal or when the BUSY signal is “LOW”.) PARALLEL INTERFACE TIMING CHART 7: Assign appropriate character codes to DATA0 ~ 7 of the interface connector (“1” for open to GND and “0” for short to GND) and connect the BUSY signal line and the STROBE signal line. Then without using any external equipment, you can conduct printing test of the printer including the interface circuit Figure 1-19. Timing Chart Table 1-54. Parameter Minimum Maximum tsetup 500 ns - thold 500 ns - tstb 500 ns - tready 0 - tbusy - 500 ns tt-out*1 - 120 ns tt-in*2 - 200 ns treply 0 - tack Note *1: *2: Product Description Interfaces Typical 2us tnbusy 0 - tnext 0 - Rise and fall time of every output signals Rise and fall time of every input signals 92 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.6.1.2 Nibble Mode CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS SPECIFICATION Table 1-55. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (Nibble) Pin No. † Transmission mode: 8 bit parallel † Synchronization: By STROBE pulse † Handshaking: By BUSY and ACKNLG signal † Signal level: TTL compatible (IEEE1284Level 1 device) † Data trans. timing: Refer to the IEEE-1284 specification Return GND Pin Signal Name In/Out * 1 19 HostClk In 2 20 DATA0 In In 3 21 DATA1 4 22 DATA2 In 5 23 DATA3 In 6 Function Host clock signal. The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level when data is logical 1 and low level when data is logical 0. 24 DATA4 In The printer responds affirmatively when the extensibility request values are 00H or 04H, that mean, 7 25 DATA5 In 8 26 DATA6 In „ 00H Request Nibble Mode Reverse Channel Transfer. „ 04H Request Device ID; Return Data Using Nibble Mode Rev Channel 9 27 DATA7 In 10 28 PtrClk Out Printer clock signal. 11 29 PtrBusy /DataBit-3,7 Out Printer busy signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 3 or 7. 12 28 AckDataReq /DataBit-2,6 Out Acknowledge data request signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 2 or 6. 13 28 Xflag /DataBit-1,5 Out X-flag signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 1 or 5. 14 30 HostBusy In 31 30 -INIT In 32 29 -DataAvail /DataBit-0,4 Out 36 30 1284-Active In † Extensibility Request: Transfer. † Device ID: „ When IEEE1284.4 is valid • • • • • • „ • • • • • • (Character strings, depending on ) MFG: EPSON; CMD: ESCPL2,BDC,D4; MDL: ; CLS: PRINTER; DES: EPSON;(:space) When IEEE1284.4 is not valid (Character strings, depending on ) MFG: EPSON; CMD: ESCPL2,BDC; MDL: ; CLS: PRINTER; DES: EPSONT; (:space) Product Description Host busy signal. Not used. Data available signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 0 or 4. 1284 active signal. 18 -- Logic H Out Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 K ohm resistor. 35 -- +5V Out Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 K ohm resistor. 17 16,33, 19-30 15,34 -- Chassis GND -- Chassis GND. -- GND -- Signal GND. -- NC -- Not used Note "*": In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view. Interfaces 93 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.6.1.3 ECP Mode CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS SPECIFICATION Table 1-56. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (ECP) † Transmission mode: IEEE-1284ECP mode † Synchronization: IEEE-1284 specification † Handshaking: IEEE-1284 specification † Signal level: TTL compatible (IEEE1284Level 1 device) † Data trans. timing: IEEE-1284 specification Pin No. Return GND Pin 1 19 HostClk 2 20 DATA0 In 3 21 DATA1 In 4 22 DATA2 In 5 23 DATA3 In 6 24 DATA4 In 7 25 DATA5 In † Extensibility Request: The printer responds affirmatively when the extensibility request values are 10H or 04H, that mean, „ 10H Request ECP Mode Reverse Channel Transfer. „ 14H Request Device ID; Return Data Using ECP Mode Rev Channel Signal Name In/Out* Function In Data or address information are transferred from a host to a printer. 8 26 DATA6 In 9 27 DATA7 In 10 28 PeriphClk Out Data is transferred from a printer to a host. PeriphAck Out A printer uses this signal for a flow control of forward direction. Also this signal offers the data bit 9 that use it to judge whether or not it is information command information or data to be output on the data signal of reverse direction. A printer does drive to Low and approve nReverseRequest. Transfer. † Device ID: „ When IEEE1284.4 is valid • • • • • • „ • • • • • • (Character strings, depending on ) MFG: EPSON; CMD: ESCPL2,BDC,D4; MDL: ; CLS: PRINTER; DES: EPSONT;(: space) When IEEE1284.4 is not valid (Character strings, depending on ) MFG: EPSON; CMD: ESCPL2,BDC; MDL: ; CLS: PRINTER; DES: EPSONT; (: space) Product Description The DATA0 through DATA7 signals represent data bits 0 to 7, respectively. Each signal is at high level when data is logical 1 and low level when data is logical 0. 11 29 12 28 nAckReverse Out 13 28 Xflag Out X-flag signal and reverse channel transfer data bit 1 or 5. 14 30 HostAck In A host uses this signal for a flow control of reverse direction. Also this signal offers the data bit 9 that use it to judge whether or not it is information command information or data to be output on the data signal of forward direction. 31 30 nReverseRequest In This signal is made a low, to change a channel toward reverse. 32 29 nPeriphReques 36 30 1284-Active Out In This signal uses to produce a host interrupt. 18 -- PeriphLogic Out 35 -- +5V Out 17 16,33 19-30 15,34 -- Chassis GND -- Chassis GND. -- GND -- Signal GND. -- NC -- Not connected. 1284 active signal. “HIGH” in ECP mode Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 3.9 K ohm resistor. Always “HIGH”. Pulled up to +5 V via 1.0 K ohm resistor. Note "*": In/Out refers to the direction of signal flow from the printer's point of view. Interfaces 94 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 1.6.2 USB interface Revision A CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT AND SIGNALS Table 1-57. Connector Pin Assignment and Signals (USB(FS) SPECIFICATION † Standard: † Bit rate: “Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 2.0” “Universal Serial Bus Specifications Revision 1.1” “Universal Serial Bus Devices Class Definition for Printing Devices Version 1.1” Pin No Signal name In/Out Function description 1 VCC - Cable power. Maximum power consumption is 100mA 480Mbps (High Speed Mode) 12Mbp (Full Speed Device) † Data format: NRZI † Adaptable connector: USB Series B 2 -Data bi-directional data 3 +Data bi-directional data, pull up to +3.3V via 1.5K ohm resistor 4 Ground - Cable ground † Acceptable cable length: 2m † Device ID: „ When IEEE1284.4 is valid • • • • • • „ • • • • • • (Character strings, depending on ) MFG : EPSON; CMD : ESCPL2,BDC,D4; MDL : ; CLS : PRINTER; DES : EPSONT;(: space) When IEEE1284.4 is not valid (Character strings, depending on ) MFG : EPSON; CMD : ESCPL2,BDC; MDL : ; CLS : PRINTER; DES : EPSONT;(: space) Product Description Figure 1-20. Pin Assignment Interfaces 95 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 1.6.3 Optional Interface Revision A REPLY FOR OPTION COMMAND Type-B interface (level 2, 1200mA type) is supported. Table 1-58. Reply List Option command number REPLY MESSAGE Command name Reply-A Reply-B (Case of using Type-B I/F card except above) 00h No-operation Accept None † Card in Type-B slot 1: Accept Execute OK 01h Start Hardware Reset Main-Type 02h Start Software Reset Reject „ Stylus Pro 7600: 03h Send Main System Type Accept 04h Send Name Data Reject 05h Inquire Name Data Accept MT48p,PW240cl10cpi,PRG(BNxxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,GDI „ Stylus Pro 9600: MT48p,PW440cl10cpi,PRG(BWxxxx)rev,AP800ma,SPD0fast,GDI 06h Send Product Name Accept NOTE: xxxx is F/W version. 07h Send Software Emulation Type Accept † Product-Name: 08h Complete Buffered Data Accept Check Condition 09h Stop Procedure Reject Execute OK 0Ah Return Buffered Data Reject 0Bh Send Entity Type Accept 0Ch Send Status Accept 0Dh Quit Procedure Reject † Emulation-Type : ESCPL2-00 † Entity-Type : EPSONLQ2 0Eh Inquire ASCII Message Reject 0Fh Send ASCII Message Accept None Unknown None 10h-13h Product Description Interfaces 14h Inquire Emergency Message 15h Send Emergency Reply Accept Execute OK Accept 16h-1Fh Unknown None 20h-FFh Reserved None 96 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A SUPPORTED MAIN COMMAND AND SENDING TIMING Table 1-59. Commands and Sending Timing Main command number Command name Sending timing 1.6.4 Supplements PREVENTION HOSTS FROM DATA TRANSFER TIME-OUT When data is received from the parallel interface or the type B interface while no error has occurred (including the pause condition), the printer receives data a rate of 2 byte/ second while buffer free space is less than 16 kbytes in order to prevent host timeout. When buffer free space is more than 32kbytes, the 2 byte/second receive rate is cleared, and receive is halted when free space reaches 16 bytes, and returns to the 2 byte/second rate when free space reaches 512 kbyte or more. 01h Start Software Reset -Init signal on the std. parallel -Type B I/F Option command: 01h -Panel Reset -Cold start 04h Send Name Data -Type B I/F Option command: 05h 07h Inquire Software Emulation Type -Changing Software Emulation type INTERFACE SELECTION 0Eh Inquire ASCII Message -Writing to DBIN-register The printer has the parallel interface, the USB interface, the optional interface. These interfaces are selected manually by the default setting mode or selected automatically. 14h Inquire Emergency Reply -Reply for Emergency command 15h Send Emergency Message -Receive Emergency command Sending BDC-ST through DBIN register When State-Reply is set “ON” by ST from Type-B I/F, sending BDC-ST through DBIN register is started. When State-Reply is started, “Start” and “End” of BDC-ST characters are announced by sending the Main command 0Eh. † Emergency command (BGJC): † Manual selection One of 3 interfaces can be selected; the parallel interface, the USB interface, the optional interface. † Automatic selection Select a interface which the printer received data first after power ON. If it passes 10 seconds after interruption of data receiving, it will be idle status (any interface is not selected) and will select a interface which the printer received data first. † Interface state and interface selection „ When the parallel interface is not selected, the interface goes into the busy status. Only reverse communication can be done at this time. „ When the printer is initialized or returned to the idle state, the parallel interface becomes ready status, the USB interface becomes non NACK reply status, and the option interface resets OFF-LINE bit of Main Status Register (MNSTS). „ INIT signal on the parallel interface is not effective while that interface is not selected or nibble Mode , ECP Mode. “0x00”: Get device ID “0x01”: Get all status “0x08”:LFP Bi-D command (For acquisition of job information) Product Description Interfaces 97 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.7 Optional Units and Consumables † Storage temperature Condition 1.7.1 Ink Cartridge Selection of ink types, detection of cartridges and the amount of remaining ink are controlled by CSIC. C H E C K P O IN T „ When installing the pigment ink cartridges, shake them gently a couple of times beforehand to ensure the designed print quality. „ The 220 ml ink cartridges are supported only by Stylus Pro 9600. temperature Remarks Packed -30°C ~ 40°C Within 1 month when 40°C Installed -20°C ~ 40°C Within 1 month when 40°C Packed transportation -30°C ~ 60°C Within 1 month when 40°C Within 120 hours when 0°C C H E C K P O IN T If you remove an ink cartridge before it reaches the ink end state, you should store it under the same ambient conditions as for the printer body in such a way that the ink discharge opening is protected from dust intrusion. The ink cartridge stored as such and installed again can be used if it is within the term of availability. SPECIFICATION † Ink life: 2 years from production date † Type: Pigment / Dye ink cartridge † Print quality assured: pigment: † Form: Exclusive ink cartridge 6 months after open / dye: 2 years from production date † Ink capacity: „ 110ml (Model Number: ICxx24) „ 220ml (Stylus Pro 9600 only) (Model Number: ICxx25) INSTALLATION LOCATIONS The locations to install the ink cartridges are assigned from the left side of the ink cartridge holder as indicated below: † Dimension: „ 110ml: 25.1 mm (W) × 165.8 mm (D) × 105.3 mm (H) „ 220ml: 25.1 mm (W) × 280.8 mm (D) × 105.3 mm (H) Table 1-60. Locations to Install Ink Cartridges Dye † Total weight: 110ml: approx. 200g 220ml: approx. 385g † Effective ink: 110ml: more than 97.0 g 220ml: more than 205.0 g † Color: Photo Black, magenta, light magenta, cyan, light cyan, yellow Light Black (pigment only), Matte black (pigment only) † Environment condition Temperature: 10°C ~ 40°C Relative humidity:: 5% ~ 85% Product Description C H E C K P O IN T Optional Units and Consumables Pigment 1 Pigment 2 Pigment 3 1 K Photo K Matte K Matte K 2 K Lk Lk Matte K 3 C C C C 4 M M M M 5 LC LC LC LC 6 LM LM LM LM 7 Y Y Y Y Any ink cartridge other than the K and LK ink cartridges is equipped with a wrong insertion preventing mechanism so that it can be installed only at its position and in the correct orientation. 98 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 1.7.4 Maintenance Tank 1.7.2 Cleaning cartridge C H E C K P O IN T The cleaning cartridge is the same as the 220-ml ink cartridge in shape except that it does not have the projection for a color block. The maintenance tank is located in the lower space at the right side of the printer body and constructed in such a way that the user can replace it when “maintenance tank full” is detected. † Type: Exclusive maintenance tank for waste ink † Dimension: Width: 102.5 mm × Depth: 235 mm × Height: 79.5 mm † Type: Exclusive cleaning cartridge † Capacity: 1000ml approx. † Dimension: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge † Total weight: TBD † Capacity: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge † Waste ink permitted limit: 650ml † Total weight: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge † Environment condition: TBD † Effective cleaning solution: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge † Environment condition: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge † Storage temperature: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge † Life: Same as 220ml exclusive ink cartridge 1.7.3 Draining cartridge C H E C K P O IN T The draining cartridge is the same as the 110-ml ink cartridge in shape except that it does not have the projection for a color block. † Type: Exclusive draining cartridge (no ink pack) † Dimension: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge † Capacity: None † Total weight: 75g approx. † Effective cleaning solution: None † Environment condition: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge † Storage temperature: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge † Life: Same as 110ml exclusive ink cartridge Product Description Optional Units and Consumables 99 2 CHAPTER OPERATING PRINCIPLES EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.1 Overview This chapter explains the print mechanism and operating principles for the EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600. The explanation is composed as follows: † 2.2 „ „ „ „ „ Print Mechanism Components (p.102) 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5 Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.103) Paper Feed Assembly (p.113) Cleaning Mechanism (p.115) Ink Supply Mechanism (p.117) Others (p.118) † 2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board (p.119) † 2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board (p.120) Operating Principles Overview 101 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.2 Print Mechanism Components Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components (continued) The major electrical parts used in the printer mechanism of this printer are as shown below. Hereafter, we will explain each printer mechanism focusing on these parts. Table 2-1. Printer Mechanism Components Part Drive voltage Description Refer to The number of nozzles: 96 Nozzle x 7 colors Head thermistor +3.3V Incorporated in the print head CR motor +42V DC motor CR_HP sensor (Carriage origin) +3.3V p.105 Transmission type photo-interrupter p.104 CR encoder sensor +5V Linear encoder (180LPI) Pump motor +42V DC motor p.104 p.115 HD_SLID sensor (Head slide origin) +3.3V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.107 P_EDGE sensor (Paper edge) +5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.108 Cutter solenoid +24V DC solenoid p.112 p.113 p.113 Description Refer to +5V, +3.3V CSIC p.117 Maintenance tank +5V, +3.3V CSIC p.115 +3.3V Limit switch p.118 Printer control/drive circuit board p.119 Others (p.118) MAIN board Radiator cooling fan p.104 Drive voltage Ink ID Cover open sensor (Cover Open L) Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.103) Print head Part +5V DC brushless fan Dip swich – Dip swich Jumper – Jumper Power supply board – p.207 p.120 Paper Feed Assembly (p.113) PF motor +42V DC motor PF encoder sensor +5V Linear encoder (360LPI) Paper suction fans +24V The number of DC blowers Stylus Pro 7600: 2 Stylus Pro 9600: 3 p.114 P_REAR sensor (Paper rear) +5V Reflection type photo-interrupter p.114 +3.3V/ +5V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.114 P_THICK sensor (Paper thickness) +5V Transmission type photo-interrupter p.114 Release Sensor (I/H lever) +5V Limit switch p.114 +42V DC motor p.115 P_THICK_0.3 sensor (Paper thickness) Ink Supply Mechanism (p.117) Pump motor Cleaning Mechanism (p.115) Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 102 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.2.1 Carriage (CR) Mechanism Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is equipped with a unique carriage mechanism which enables reliable, high-precision movement of the on-carriage head for high-precision printing in the printing range (= carriage movement range). P_EDGE sensor Carriage CR_HP Sensor and Flag Encoder Sensor and Timing Fence HD-SLID Sensor and Slide Gear Figure 2-1. Carriage Mechanism Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 103 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A CARRIAGE MOVING UNIT In place of the carriage holding system in which 2 CR guide shafts extending in the column direction were used, as in the conventional models, a structure with the carriage mounted via multiple rollers (bearings) on a CR guide rail made of a square extruded aluminum pipe is used. Steel rails are incorporated in the roller contact and running surface, and the result is a reduction in friction in the direction of movement, reduced vibration and improved durability. C A U T IO N Projection on Carriage CR_HP Sensor (Mounted on the mechanism’s right end.) Outside HP range Inside HP Range Encoder Sensor (On Carriage) The screws used to fasten the CR guide rail should not be taken out and the carriage should not be removed. These are adjusted and assembled to the nearest 1/100 mm at the factory. Step Ruler (Slit Plate) † CR motor A DC motor is used for the CR motor and the slit in the timing fence affixed on the bottom of and parallel with the CR guide rail is read by the encoder sensor mounted on the carriage (linear encoder system), and this signal is compared to logical control values in the control circuit on the MAIN board, which carries out feedback speed control. Through this control, high print precision is maintained. Encoder Sensor HP Flag Drive transmissions from the CR motor to the carriage use the easy-to-maintain, durable timing belt. CR Motor The sensors used in the carriage moving unit are described below. Carriage CR Timing Belt CR_HP Sensor Figure 2-2. Carriage Mechanism Unit, Carriage Moving Unit † CR_HP Sensor (Carriage Home Position) This is a transmissive photosensor which is mounted on the right end of the printer mechanism and detects the entry position of the flag (projection) provided on the carriage as the carriage moving home position. Outputs from this sensor are “OFF” in the HP range and “ON” outside the HP range. † CR encoder sensor (Linear Encoder) This encoder is mounted on the back of the carriage and outputs pulses (2 channels) corresponding to the position of the slit on the timing fence that is incorporated into the CR guide rail which are used for CR motor servo control and PTS (Print Timing Signal) generation. The resolution is 1/180 inch. Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 104 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Paper Feed Direction PRINT HEAD „ Nozzle pitch: F Row G Row „ Black: „ Color: E Row 96 nozzles x 7 rows = 672 nozzles (See Figure 2-3 for nozzle arrangement.) D Row † Nozzle configuration: C Row On-demand ink-jet B Row † Printing method: A Row Stylus Pro 7600/9600 employs a single print head which incorporates both functions for black and color. (The preceding model has two print heads, namely, head B and head C.) The print head incorporates a thermistor. According to the temperature around the head detected by the thermistor, the CPU on the Main Board controls the ink discharge speed and the amount of ink to be discharged. 192 nozzles (96 nozzles for each of Black1 and Black2) 480 nozzles (96 nozzles for each of cyan, magenta, light cyan, light magenta and yellow) 0.141mm (1/180 inch) for each color Table 2-2. Relationship between Nozzle Rows and Colors Ink Type Pigment Dye Operating Principles Nozzle Row Color A Photo Black or Matte Black B Gray or Matte Black C C D Lc E M F Lm G Y A Bk B Bk C C D Lc E M F Lm G Y Carriage Moving Direction Figure 2-3. Nozzle Arrangement † Drive waveform: There are three printing modes (drive waveforms) for each of use of pigment ink and use of dye ink. Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms) Waveform Name Ink Discharged (ng) Drive Frequency Print Resolution CR Speed VSD1 13.8-27.6-41.5 8.64 KHz H360 x V360 H720 x V360 240 CPS VSD2 4.5-9.5-23.0 8.64 KHz H720 x V720 H1440 x V720 240 CPS VSD4 4.5 2 shots at 6.84 KHz H2880 x V1440 190 CPS Ink Type Pigment ink Print Mechanism Components 105 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 2-3. Printing Modes (Drive Waveforms) Ink Type Waveform Name VSD1-Dye Dye ink Ink Discharged (ng) Drive Frequency Print Resolution CR Speed 13.8-27.6-41.5 8.64 KHz H360 x V360 H720 x V360 240 CPS 240 CPS 190 CPS VSD2-Dye 5.4-9.5-23.0 8.64 KHz H720 x V720 H1440 x V720 VSD4-Dye 2.5 2 shots at 6.84 KHz H2880 x V1440 CR Guide Rail Right Side of Carriage Bearing Carriage Bearing PLATEN GAP ADJUSTMENT UNIT In order to maintain the print precision, it is necessary to maintain the carriage (= head) mounting position so that it is always a constant distance from the surface of the paper. In this printer, the print head nozzle surfaces and platen surface are variable mechanisms so that the gap between the paper printing surface and the head nozzle surface can be kept constant. The carriage has a 2-body construction with a sub-carriage on which the print heads are mounted attached to the carriage which forms the base. The sub-carriage moves in the vertical direction with respect to the paper surface. This movable system uses a cam. The sub-carriage to paper surface distance changes linearly from the cam (= PG) home position. When the carriage is in the HP position (= right end), the pump motor and the gear mounted on the cam shaft engage, the motor's rotation (reverse) drives the cam and the sub-carriage is positioned at the proper gap position. In order to maintain the distance between the print head nozzle surface and the paper properly, the thicknesses of the paper used are classified into 3 levels for PG setting, namely, PG small (1.3 mm), PG medium (2.2 mm) and PG large (2.7 mm). Sub-carriage (head mounted) PG (Head SLID) Slide Gear HD_SLID Sensor Pump motor driving force (CCW) HP Detection Flag The sensors used in the platen gap adjustment unit are explained below. Right Side of Printer Mechanism Figure 2-4. Carriage Mechanical Unit and PG Adjustment Unit Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 106 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † HD_SLID (Head Gap Home Position Detection) Sensor This sensor detects the mechanical home position when the position of the subcarriage (head height from the paper surface) on the carriage undergoes change. A reflective type photosensor is used and the position of the flag on the gear mounted on the camshaft is detected. The cam is so shaped as to realize the four head positions relative to the mechanical home position. Start Sequence for moving to pseudo-vacuum position Slide Sensor OFF ? „ Detecting distance up to the reflector: 7.5 ± 0.5 mm No Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns OFF NOTE: Error number displayed when the total pulse count has exceeded 1000: 0001000C Head slide origin detection error (Service Call Error) Table 2-4. Pulse Positions Application No Pulse Count from Origin (Converted to 22 Phase Excitation) Position Gap Width Large 2.6 mm Platen gap for thick paper 37 Medium 2.2 mm Platen gap for paper which can be soiled if setting is for thin paper 121 1.2 mm Platen gap for thin paper 204 Minimum 0.7 mm Platen gap for film 287 Slide Sensor OFF ? Yes Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns ON No Small One round Yes Slide Sensor ON ? Yes After head slide origin sensor turns ON, pump motor runs forward by 10 pulses 333 Pump motor runs forward until head slide origin sensor turns OFF No Slide Sensor OFF ? Yes Pump motor runs forward by 204 pulses (till the “Small” platen gap position) Pump motor runs forward by 18 pulses (till epicyclic gear release) End Figure 2-5. Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 107 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † P_EDGE (Paper Width Detection) Sensor This sensor, mounted at the left side of the cutter unit of the carriage, detects paper edges by moving the carriage. It detects four points of paper edges, namely, left and right points on the front edge and a front point on the left and right edges of the paper. Each position is calculated from the difference in reflection value between the platen and the paper. A reflective type photosensor is used. Each paper edge position (presence or absence of paper) is determined by an A/D converted value of the output from the photosensor. During printing, the sensor monitors the left and right edges of the paper to detect a skew. Carriage Left edge Scanning of HP side → Opposite side „ Detecting distance up to the paper surface: 7.0mm ± 0.5 C H E C K P O IN T Right edge Scanning of opposite side → HP side P_EDGE Sensor HP Side „ It must be ensured that the reflection value of the least reflective paper is greater than the reflection value of the platen. „ The paper must be free from floating at the detection point. „ If external light, such as sunlight, can enter the sensor due to the construction, mis-detection must be prevented by LED ON/ OFF control. (Same as with Stylus Pro 7000) „ In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, the P_EDGE Sensor works also to detect the paper front edge. (Stylus Pro 7600/9600 does not have the P_FRONT Sensor for exclusive use to detect the paper front edge which is incorporated in the conventional printer models.) Figure 2-6. Carriage Unit Paper Width Detection Sensor NOTE: It is possible to turn this sensor off by “SelecType” (p.35). The following pages show paper size detection sequence (left and right edges and front edge). Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 108 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A „ Paper size detection sequence (left and right edges) Error display: Set the paper correctly C H E C K P O IN T Transition to this sequence is allowed only at paper initial. At inter-page skew checking, transition to Simplified detection sequence for left and right edges (skew check) (p.111) takes place. Solid Line: Paper Broken Line: Printable Area Right edge detection position Note "*1": Paper presence position = 215.4 mm Paper absence position = 132.9 mm LED turns off upon completion of front detection. "*2": Printing area MAX position CR moves to the paper presence position (100CPS). Stylus Pro 9600: Flashing during acceleration on Fl_Box 1260.5mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width) Stylus Pro 7600 752.5mm + 7.0mm (Reserved width) Moving to paper absence position. Threshold value is "*3": Printing area MIN position 142.9mm –4.0mm (Reserved width) calculated during moving to paper presence position. After determination of threshold value, edge sensor LED is kept on. "*4": To prevent wrong recognition as paper *1 presence when there is no paper as a result of wrong detection of the rib of the platen by the edge sensor, a paper width detected While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves outward to be not greater than A4 size - 20 mm is toward the printing area MAX position (350CPS). *2 judged to be paper absence. Left and right edge detection start Left edge detection position Paper absence detected ? No Yes From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR moves by 2 mm toward the home. (240CPS) While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves outward at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is detected is judged to be the right edge position of the paper. While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward the home to the printing area MIN position (350CPS). *3 Paper absence detected ? No Yes From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR moves by 2 mm outward (240CPS). While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward the home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is detected is judged to be the left edge position of the paper. Paper width>210 – 20mm ? *4 Yes Return No Edge sensor LED is turned off. Error Figure 2-7. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Left and Right Edges) Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 109 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A „ Paper size detection sequence (front edge) Note "*1": Paper left upper detection position = Paper left edge position +27.5mm "*2": PF maximum travel = –260mm CR moves onto Fl_Box. (350CPS) (Self-diagnostics mode –340mm) No change in sensor output even 1 CR moves to the paper left upper detection position. * when this travel has been exceeded is handled as an error. Stylus Pro 9600: 1260.5mm + 7.0mm While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the (Reserved width) negative direction (picks up paper). (40CPS) Stylus Pro 7600: 752.5mm + 7.0mm PF stops if paper absence is detected. *2 (Reserved width) "*3": PF moving target position = 1st nozzle position (0.00 mm) No Paper absence detected No change in sensor output even ? when this position has been passed is handled as an error. Yes "*4": Paper right upper detection position = While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the Paper right edge pos. –27.5mm positive direction (gets paper off). (5CPS) The position where "*5": In the figure below, the left upper paper presence is detected is judged to be the left front edge leading edge is handled as the paper position of the paper. *3 size front position. (On the assumption that the paper front edge CR moves to the paper right upper detection position. is not correctly perpendicular to the 4 (350CPS) * paper feed direction) Front edge detection start Conditions: For execution of this processing, the paper level threshold value must be known. (Execute this processing after detection of the right and left edges.) Error display: Set the paper correctly When the paper width detection function is turned off, use the paper size front position as the user paper setting position. (On the assumption that detection is not made by the edge sensors) No Solid Line: Paper Broken Line: Printable Area Paper absence detected by edge sensor? Yes While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the positive direction (gets paper off) (40CPS). PF stops if paper presence is detected. (Prevention of skew at leading edge) *3 Paper presence detected ? No Yes While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the negative direction (picks up paper) (40CPS). PF stops if paper absence is detected. *2 Paper absence detected ? Detection position for right upper leading edge position Detection position for left upper leading edge position No Yes While monitoring the edge sensor output, PF moves in the positive direction (gets paper off) (40CPS). The position where paper absence is detected is judged to be the right front edge position of the paper. *3 The paper left front edge position and the right front edge position are compared and the one in the positive direction (upper one) is judged to be the paper size front position. *3 Edge sensor LED is turned off. Edge sensor LED is turned off. Return Error Figure 2-8. Paper Size Detection Sequence (Front Edge) Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 110 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A „ Simplified detection sequence for left and right edges (skew check) a Note "*1": Paper presence position = 215.4 mm Paper absence position = 132.9 mm LED turns off upon completion of skew check. "*2": Printing area MIN position =142.9 mm –4.0 mm (Reserved width) A4 size (210.0 mm) – 20.0 mm = 190.0 mm When the paper width detection function is turned off, left and right edge detection (skew check) is not carried out. Error display: 1: Set the paper correctly 2: PAPER NOT STRAIGHT C H E C K P O IN T Left and right edge detection start CR moves to the paper presence position (100CPS). Flashing during acceleration on Fl_Box Transition to this sequence is allowed only at inter-page skew checking (at cut/eject, etc.) At paper initial, transition to “Paper size detection sequence (left and right edges)” (p.109) takes place. Right edge detection position Solid Line: Paper Broken Line: Printable Area Left edge detection position Moving to paper absence position. Threshold value is calculated during moving to paper presence position. After determination of threshold value, edge sensor LED is kept on. *1 CR moves to the position "printing area MIN position + A4 size - 20 mm = 328.9 mm" (350CPS) *2 While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward the home to the printing area MIN position (350CPS). Paper absence detected ? Previously determined paper width X mm No Yes From the position where the sensor output has changed, CR moves by 2 mm outward (240CPS). Edge sensor LED is turned off. Error 1 While monitoring the edge sensor output, CR moves toward the home at 5 cps. The position where paper absence is detected is judged to be the left edge position of the paper. The paper width determined by the previously executed left and right edge detection (at paper initial or skew check) is added to the left edge position. The resultant position is regarded as the paper right edge position. Paper right edge position deflected by 3 mm from previously determined position? No Paper left edge position deflected by 3 mm from previously determined position? No Edge sensor LED is turned off. Return Yes Yes Edge sensor LED is turned off. Error 2 Figure 2-9. Simplified Detection Sequence for Left and Right Edges (Skew Check) Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 111 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Cutter Solenoid This DC solenoid controls the cutting pressure of the roll paper cutter. It also unlock the carriage. This function can be set On or Off using the Panel buttons. Cutter Solenoid Carriage Roll Paper NOTE: See “1.2.6.3 Cutting Specification” (p.22) Cutter Figure 2-10. Carriage Unit Cutter Solenoid Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 112 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † PF motor 2.2.2 Paper Feed Assembly This printer uses friction feed to carry out highly precise feeding of roll paper and cut sheets, and comprises a unique paper feed mechanism. The paper feed mechanism unit is configured from a grid roller (one piece construction), and pressurizing and follower roller assemblies mounted on the back of the CR guide rail opposite the front surface. The PF motor is a DC motor. The grid of the loop scale mounted on the Grid Roller is read by the PF_ENC sensor and the output pulse is fed back to control the motor. This feedback control ensures high printing accuracy. Driving of the grid roller is accomplished by the PF motor via the PF timing belt which attaches to a reduction pulley that is connected to the grid roller. Secondary Roller Assembly Grid Roller CR Guide Rail Secondary Roller Assembly Grid Roller R = Paper width flag L = Paper Set Lever flag Speed-Reduction Gear Center Frame Platen Sub Platen PF Motor Paper Set Lever Paper Paper Guide L1, L2 Figure 2-11. Paper Feed Mechanism Unit 1/2 PF Motor Figure 2-12. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit PF Rail Unit Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 113 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Paper Suction Fans The printer is equipped with suction fans in the lower space in the rear. The space in the column direction behind Paper Guide L2 is divided into 2 compartments (Stylus Pro 7600) or 3 compartments (Stylus Pro 9600), and one fan is mounted in each compartment. By drawing air through multiple holes punched in Paper Guide L2 in the back surface of the paper path and blowing it out through the rear of the printer housing, suction is applied to the surfaces of Paper Guides L1 and L2 and the paper is stabilized (prevented from flying up) as it passes through the printer. The suction fans undergo air flow control (fan rotation duty control), which is carried out by firmware control based on the printer's operating state (when paper is set and during printing, etc.) and the type of paper used. Table 2-5. Modes Paper Thickness Shield Plate Sensor Output P_THICK_0.3 P_THICK P_THICK_0.3 Absent (Open) Absent (Open) L L 0.3 mm to 0.8 mm incl. Present (Closed) Absent (Open) H L 0.81 mm or above H Below 0.3 mm P_THICK Present (Closed) Present (Closed) H Connector not connected - - H H Pressure release (Hi-Up) - - L H Paper suction fans NOTE: Fans mounted Stylus Pro 7600: 2 fans Stylus Pro 9600: 3 fans P-Rear sensor The following sensors aid in the paper feeding process. † P_REAR sensor This sensor is attached to the Upper Paper Guide and is an optical (photoreflective) sensor. This sensor detects the rear edge of the paper and detects the front edge when the paper is first loaded in the paper path. The position of this sensor is stored in EEPROM. † Paper set lever, paper thickness detection (P_THICK, P_THICK_0.3) „ P_THICK_0.3 Sensor: Transmission type photosensor, left side. „ P_THICK Sensor: Transmission type photosensor, right side. The mechanism is so designed that the threshold values for paper thickness are 0.3 ~ 0.4 mm (P_THICK_0.3 sensor) and 0.8 ~ 0.9 mm (P_THICK sensor). The sensors operate just when the pressure lever is brought down. The designed detection values of the sensors for the UP and DOWN positions of the pressure lever are 0.3 mm and 0.8 mm. The pressure lever in the UP position is detected by a combination of both sensors. “Thick paper state” occurs when the connections are open. There is no error processing since this mechanism can not determine whether it has broke down or not. Since the mechanism is always in recognition of thick paper, printing on thin paper is carry out with the platen gap kept large. Operating Principles Figure 2-13. Paper Feed Mechanical Unit (Stylus Pro 7600) 2/2 Print Mechanism Components 114 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.2.3 Cleaning Mechanism Cleaning Mechanism (Maintenance ASSY) The cleaning mechanism in this printer is compatible with the cleaning mechanism in the Stylus Pro 5000/9000. The cleaning mechanism is located on the right side of the printer. The waste ink from the cleaning mechanism is channeled to the waste ink pad (Maintenance Tank) in the lower right side through the tube. The cleaning mechanism components are installed above the sub-frame and some are fixed on the main frame as shown below. † Pump assembly (head cleaner) When the head is in the capped position (valve closed), the pump motor creates a vacuum that sucks ink from the nozzles. This is used for removing ink from the nozzles and nozzle plate, initial ink charge, as well as cleaning. The waste ink flows through one small tube to the waste ink pads. † Head cleaner The head cleaner has felt on one side and rubber on the other, and is used to wipe or rub off ink and foreign materials from the nozzle surface. † Pump motor (stepping motor) The pump motor runs normally (the pump wheel turns clockwise as viewed from the pump wheel side) and reverses (the pump wheel turns counterclockwise) to execute the following functions: Maintenance Tank Figure 2-14. Cleaning Mechanism Components „ Clockwise rotation (CW): pump assembly drive for cleaning and so on (Suction, wiper setting) „ Counter clockwise rotation (CCW): Pump release, wiper reset, HD_SLIDE (head gap adjustment) cam drive. See “Platen Gap Adjustment Unit” (p.106). Pump assembly Head cleaner Flushing box Table 2-6. Pump Drive Modes Suction Speed Name (Drive Mode) Low speed (IS5) Pump Wheel Revolving Speed 0.46 rev/sec Pump Wheel Motor Frequency Revolving Speed (2-2 phase conversion) 0.15 ml/sec 186 Hz Standard (IS4) 1.6 rev/sec 0.6 ml/sec 648 Hz High speed (IS3) 2.6 rev/sec 0.9 ml/sec 1053 Hz Super-high speed (IS2) 4.2 rev/sec 1.1 ml/sec 1702 Hz Super-high speed (IS1) 5 rev/sec 1.2 ml/sec 2026 Hz Pump motor Note : The values for Motor Frequency above, given only for information, are obtained by 2-2 phase drive conversion with a drive system consisting of the pump wheel with P.C.D of φ 30.4 and motor gear with P.C.D of φ 6. Operating Principles Cap assembly CR Lock Print Mechanism Components Figure 2-15. Cleaning Mechanism Components 115 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Cap assembly Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation (continued) When not printing, the print head (should) rest on the cap assembly to ensure that the nozzles don't clog. Also, the print head is in the capped position during ink charging, cleaning, and so on. † Flushing box Flushing (dummy printing) is performed over the flushing box, and the flushed ink flows through the pipe to the waste ink pads. Operation Empty Suction Operation • Wiping Operation The carriage is moved from right to left along the rubber side of the wiper (the right half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so that the head surface is rubbed with the rubber of the wiper. Purpose: • Before ink suction, removes the ink and other substances adhering to the head surface. • Ensures close contact of the cap. Rubbing Operation The carriage is moved from left to right along the felt side of the wiper (the left half of the wiper plate) incorporated in the pump unit so that the head surface is rubbed with the felt of the wiper. For easy removal of adhering substances, the nozzle surface is wetted before rubbing operation by suction of a small amount of ink. Purpose: • Removes ink and other substances adhering strongly to the head surface. • Ensures close contact of the cap. Capping In order to prevent the ink viscosity from increasing while it is being kept, a rubber cap is placed over the print head nozzles when entering a shutdown operation. † CR Lock Mechanism If the carriage moves from the printable area to beyond the capping (CR_HOME) position to the right, the carriage moving prevention lock is engaged. The CR lock mechanism uses the cutter solenoid in common. When the cutter solenoid goes ON in the capping position, the CR lock is released. † Maintenance Tank (Waste ink absorber) NOTE: The Ink System Terms used in the above text are explained in the following table. Table 2-7. Explanation of Operation Operation Explanation Carriage (CR) Lock • This is the carriage stop position when the power is Off. • The time when the carriage is in the standby position (home position) with the power On and with no paper loaded and no print data to print. Ink Initial Filling Flushing Explanation After ink is sucked up, the remaining ink inside the cap is sucked up and the ink adhering to the head nozzle surface is removed. • Through flushing, etc., the ink that has accumulated in the cap is sucked up and discharged. • This is the operation where the head is filled with ink for the first time. When the first ink cartridge is inserted (after all 6 colors have been inserted), the ink initial filling operation is performed automatically. • The initial filling flag is set when the printer is shipped from the factory, then after this operation, the initial filling flag is reset. The initial filling flag is also set after the “ Input Rank” (p233) is run. • In order to prevent the viscosity of the ink inside the head nozzles from increasing, the ink inside the flushing box is flushed out. • Flushing is done when paper is set, when printing from the standby state, during continuous printing, during paper Eject, during paper cutting, etc. Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 116 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.2.4 Ink Supply Mechanism Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is so constructed that the 7 cartridges for different colors are installed in the respective ink holders (I/H) in the left area of the printer. A projection and unique marking are placed on each color ink cartridge case to prevent wrong insertion so that the correct cartridge is inserted in the right direction. Ink cartridge holder (I/H: x7) Ink tube (x7) To each color head damper † Explanation of valve mechanism mounted on the cartridge Pump motor (stepping motor) (p.115) The valve automatically opens and closes when the ink cartridge is mounted and removed. Ink cartridge holder (Opening/closing) Ink cartridge Ink cartridge (x7) To print head Maintenance Tank Figure 2-16. Valve Mechanism The ink flow is as shown below. Each color's ink cartridge → Each color's I/H (Ink Holder) → Each color's ink tube → Each color's head dumper (carriage) → Print Heads The information in EEPROM of each color ink cartridge is sent through the CSIC Relay Board in each ink holder and stored in memory on the CSIC Board. The CSIC Board stores various pieces of information, such as ink colors and remaining amount of ink. (Refer to “Ink information menu (p.69)”) Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components Figure 2-17. Ink Supply Mechanism 117 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.2.5 Others COVER SENSOR Panel Unit In order to detect whether the front cover on the lower front of this printer is open or closed, a cover sensor is mounted on the printer on the left side where the front cover opens and closes. Cover Sensor This sensor carries out control of operating and stopping of the CR motor and PF motor drive circuits via the MAIN board's logic circuit after detecting the cover's status. This control is the same when the paper support level is in the release state. CIRCUIT BOARD PLACEMENT The panel unit is located i the right front of the printer and the AC inlet, power supply circuit board and the MAIN circuit board are mounted in the compartment on the printer's rear side. Front Cover Flag Front Cover Figure 2-18. Cover Sensor Panel Unit AC Inlet Power Supply Circuit Board MAIN Circuit Board Figure 2-19. Circuit Board Layout Operating Principles Print Mechanism Components 118 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.3 Outline of Control Circuit Board Note "*": Stylus Pro 7600: IC4/6 only (32MByte) Stylus Pro 9600: IC4/6 and IC600/601 (64MByte) This section describes the operation of C472MAIN Board, which controls and drives the printer mechanism of Stylus Pro 7600/9600. NOTE: For details of each circuit, refer to Chapter 7 Appendix (p.281). † Explanation of major elements on C472MAIN Board Table 2-8. Major Elements Name/Code SH-3 HD6417709A Location CY24242PVC IC602 E09A42AA IC607 E05B80CD IC35 E09A41RA IC34 E05C02BA IC603 Flash Memory SD-RAM L6203 LB11847 IC10 IC9 IC4/6 IC600/601 IC31/32 IC30 Operating Principles Function 32 bit RISC-CPU • Drive clock frequency = 100 MHz System clock controller • CPU clock • SDRAM clock • Clock for I/O control Custom ASIC 1. Print data processing • Rasterizer • Head drive control 2. Mechanism control (motors and solenoids) 3. Sensor control Custom ASIC • External I/O control IEEE1284 (bidirectional parallel) I/F Type-B port Custom ASIC • Head drive voltage waveform generation control Custom ASIC • USB-I/F (2.0) control Flash Memory (16Mbit) • For storage of control program (firmware) • Saving of various setting parameters and control information System memory * 128mbit x 16 PF/CR Motor Drivers IC • PWM constant current drive control Pump Motor Driver IC Outline of Control Circuit Board Block01.eps Figure 2-20. C472MAIN Board-Circuit Block Diagram 119 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 2.4 Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board There are three control signals between the C472MAIN Board and the Power Supply Circuit Board. Table below describes details of the control signals: The 100 V AC power from the wall outlet is supplied via the power cable, an accessory of Stylus Pro 7600/9600, into the Inlet of the printer and to the Power Supply Circuit Board. Table 2-10. Control Signals between C472MAIN Board and Power Supply Board The power switch constitutes a secondary power switch system. The secondary power switch system operates as follows: even with the power switch turned off, the Power Supply Circuit Board is operating by a slight power as long as the power cable is connected. C A U T IO N Even after the power switch is turned off, the Power Supply Circuit Board does not stop operating immediately, but power is kept on until the ink system ending sequence is completed. Do not disconnect the power cable or do not shut off power by turning off any power switch other than that on the printer. Signal Name REM_ON (MAIN→ Power Supply) Operating Turned ON/OFF by C472MAIN Board. • When these terminals are shorted, the drive system power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC are active. Off • When these terminals are open (= L), the drive system power supplies 28 VDC and 42 VDC are 0 VDC. • The 5 VDC power is not controlled with these terminals. Operating (= H) When each output from the Power Supply Circuit Board has become inactive because of turning off of the power switch or when the input voltage has dropped below the rated voltage value, “H” signal is sent to the C472MAIN Board. Off (= L) The power switch is turned on and the Power Supply Circuit Board Unit starts operating so that each output becomes active. “H” signal is sent to the C472MAIN Board. POW_ON/OFF Operating (Panel / MAIN→Power Supply) Connected to the power switch on the Panel Unit. • These terminals are shorted when the switch is ON. The Power Supply Circuit Board becomes active. Off • These terminals are open when the switch is OFF.The Power Supply Unit keeps operating for about ten and several seconds to a few minutes and then turns off. AC_OFF (MAIN← Power Supply) The Power Supply Circuit Board is equipped with a fuse for overcurrent protection. Table 2-9 below indicates the rating of the fuse: Table 2-9. Fuse Rating Input Voltage Range [V AC] 100 +/– 10% Operating Principles Fuse Rating 125 V AC / 6.3A Function Outline of Power Supply Circuit Board 120 3 CHAPTER TROUBLESHOOTING EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.1 Outline This section explains procedures for rapid and efficient troubleshooting if trouble occurs in the printer. C H E C K P O IN T When disassembling the printer, turn the printer's power switch Off, then after making sure that the panel display is off, pull out the power cable from the outlet and disconnect the interface cable. C A U T IO N „ Only the specified printer tools should be used so as to maintain 3.1.1 Introduction First of all, when performing troubleshooting, the following basic parts should be checked. 1. Look in the printer for any foreign matter and make sure there is nothing there to hinder normal operation. 2. Carry out printing by setting the printer in the “Pause” state, then press the [SelecType] button 2 times. Next using the [Paper Feed] switch in the “TEST PRINT MENU,” select “STATUS CHECK”, then press the [Enter] switch and print. From the status sheet, you can Check to see if the cause of the trouble is that the printer (either the printer unit itself or some major unit) is at the end of its service life, and check the user inherent panel settings, etc. 3. There should be no market soiling of the outside or the inside of the printer. If it is extremely soiled, carry out cleaning. 4. Each of the units and parts in the printer should not be missing or damaged, and should have the normal shape and configuration. 5. Each of the harnesses should be undamaged, and should be correctly connected to the relevant connector (perpendicularly and in the correct direction). 6. Each cam and gear in the printer mechanism should have no uneven wear or be overly worn, and the combinations should be correct. 7. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should be cleaned and it should be ascertained whether the cause of the trouble is because of dirt or due to some other cause. 8. Each type of rubber roller in the printer mechanism should not be unevenly worn or excessively worn, and their combinations should be correct. 9. As necessary, initialize the NVRAM on the C472MAIN Board (return the individual customer settings and panel settings to the factory settings). Carry out initialization by executing “INIT. NVRAM” from the “CLEAR COUNTERS MENU” in “Maintenance Mode 2." 10. Make certain that the DIP Switches and Jumpers have been set correctly. (Refer to “DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment” (p.209)) Troubleshooting Outline the printer's quality. „ Only the specified lubricants and adhesives should be used. „ The specified adjustments should definitely be carried out. 122 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2 Error Display Table 3-1. Error Indications on LCD (continued) LCD Panel Message The printer displays the relevant error message on the LCD and the error status by LEDs. At the same time, it stops not only printing operation but also receiving data from the host PC. (Among the interface signals, the “-ERROR” signal is turned “low” and the “BUSY” signal is turned “high” to inhibit data input.) 3.2.1 Errors Errors, Warnings and service call errors (fatal errors) are described below. 3.2.1.1 Error Indications on LCD Printer Status Refer to p.127 LOWER PAPER SET LVR Paper set lever is released REMOVE PAPER Paper is too thick for cleaning RELOAD PAPER Paper check error p.129 PAPER NOT STRAIGHT Paper not straight p.128 INVALID CARTRIDGE Non-genuine cartridge p.130 SET INK LEVER Ink lever released p.130 NO MAINTENANCE TANK No maintenance tank p.131 COMMAND ERROR Command error p.131 OPTION I/F ERROR Type-B I/F error p.128 Table 3-1. Error Indications on LCD LCD Panel Message Printer Status Refer to SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnn Fatal error* COVER OPEN Cover open error p.127 LOAD PAPER Paper set lever is released during operation p.126 PAPER JAM Paper jam p.127 INK OUT Ink out error p.130 NO INK CARTRIDGE No ink cartridge p.130 INVALID CARTRIDGE Wrong ink cartridge p.130 SET INK CARTRIDGE Defective ink cartridge p.131 Paper out error p.126 PAPER OUT COMMAND ERROR • Ink sequence currently executed • Paper currently initialized • Timer IC reset /NVRAM clear LOAD XXX PAPER • Wrong setting with roll paper and sheet (Roll paper) • Wrong setting with roll paper and sheet (Sheet) – p.126 RELOAD PAPER Problem with paper output (sheet) p.129 MAINTENANCE TANK FULL Maintenance tank full p.131 PAPER NOT CUT Paper cutting error p.128 Troubleshooting Note : The status can't be replied during service call. Error Display 123 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.1.2 Warning Indications on LCD Warning warns the user of the occurrence of a corresponding event by replacing the “READY” or “PRINTING” message on the LCD with the warning message. But it has no effect on any other operations of the printer. The warning message will not be cleared until the cause is resolved. Table 3-2. Warning Indications on LCD LCD Panel Message Printer Status Refer to Photo Black Ink Low Cyan Ink Low Magenta Ink Low Yellow Ink Low INK LOW Light Cyan Ink Low p.132 Light Magenta Ink Low Light Black Ink Low Matte Black Ink Low (K1) Matte Black Ink Low (K2) MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST FULL Maintenance tank full warning MAINTENANCE REQ. nnnn Maintenance request (Set RTC date) p.132 Maintenance request (CR motor life) p.132 Maintenance request (Head life) Troubleshooting Error Display 124 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors Table 3-3. Service Call (Fatal) Errors (continued) Error Code Table 3-3. Service Call (Fatal) Errors Error Code Description Refer to 00000101 CR motor life p.134 00010000 PF motor encoder check error p.135 00010001 PF motor out of step p.135 00010002 PF motor overcurrent p.136 00010003 PF motor in-position time-out p.136 00010004 CR motor encoder check error p.137 00010005 CR motor out of step p.137 00010006 CR motor overcurrent p.138 00010007 CR motor in-position time-out p.138 00010008 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out p.139 00010009 System interrupt watchdog time-out p.139 0001000A CR home position sensor error p.139 0001000B PF home position sensor error p.139 0001000C Head slide (PG) home position sensor error p.140 0001000F CR motor PWM output faulty p.140 00010010 PF motor PWM output faulty p.141 0001001B Head driver (TG) temperature error p.141 0001001D CR servo parameter error p.142 0001001E PF servo parameter error p.142 00010020 CSIC reed/right error p.143 00010022 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) p.143 00010023 RTC analysis error p.143 00010025 CSIC ROM communication error p.144 00010026 RTC communication error p.144 00010028 Head error p.144 00010029 Unidentified NMI p.144 0001002A CR ASIC ECU error p.144 0001002B PF ASIC ECU error p.144 00020000 NVRAM error p.144 Troubleshooting Description Refer to 00020002 SDRAM error p.145 00020003 BOOT program SUM error p.145 00020009 Flash memory SUM error p.145 0002000A Program load error p.145 0002000B Internal memory shortage error p.145 0002000C Review error p.146 100000E0 CPU address error (load misalignment) p.146 10000100 CPU address error (storage misalignment) p.146 10000180 CPU reserve command code exception error p.146 100001A0 CPU slot illegal command exception error p.146 100005C0 CPU DMA address error p.146 10000xxx CPU error p.146 Error Display 125 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.2 Errors 3.2.2.2 Wrong paper source is selected on panel Table 3-5. Item 3.2.2.1 Paper End/End of roll Table 3-4. Item LCD PANEL MESSAGE LOAD xxx PAPER LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up. The LED blinks corresponding to paper path set with PP command of remote command. (See Table 3-6) Explanation Different paper source is selected on panel from the paper source that is selected by PP command. Recovery Replace the paper into one that is selected by command, or the error will be also cleared by toggle the paper source setting on panel, if only the panel setting is wrong. After it is cleared, it is ready to print. Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE PAPER OUT LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up. Explanation The error occurs in following cases. † [A]: Paper is not set. † [B]: The printer detects end of the roll. In this time the paper feed roller holds and keeps the end of the roll. † [C]: The printer completed a printing on a sheet or detects end of the sheet. In this time the paper feed roller holds and keeps the end of the sheet. Table 3-6. LED Indications for Wrong Setting (Roll Paper/Sheet) † Set paper. Recovery Troubleshooting Description In the case of [B] and [C] above, remove the paper and set new paper. After setting new paper, the error will be cleared. If the printing data remains in the printer, the printing job will continue on the newly set paper. When printing job continue, the printer ejects buffer content, cuts or ejects the paper, and starts printing after developing new data. Remained data is printed and ejected with paper length designated with the command. † If the error is not cleared even after paper setting, Possible causes are problems with the following sensors. Take corrective action as instructed below. • P_REAR sensor • P_EDGE sensor 1. Check for paper dust or foreign matters on the sensor and clean it. 2. Check the operation of each sensor and make AD adjustment in the self-diagnostics menu. (Rear AD Adjustment (p.231) / Edge AD Adjustment (p.232)) Note: Change the location of the printer if there may be an effect of any strong external light, such as the sunlight. PP Command Roll paper auto cut LED Roll paper manual cut LED Sheet LED Roll Paper Blink Blink Off Sheet Off Off Blink 3.2.2.3 Paper set lever is released during operation Table 3-7. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE SET PAPER LEVER LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up. Explanation Paper set lever is released during operation Recovery It is cleared with pushing down the lever, and the printer continues the operation. Error Display 126 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.2.4 Paper set lever is released 3.2.2.6 Front Cover Open Table 3-8. Item LCD PANEL MESSAGE Table 3-10. Description Item Description LOWER PAPER SET LVR LCD PANEL MESSAGE FRONT COVER OPEN LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED lights up. LED STATUS None Explanation Paper set lever is released during paper set operation. Explanation Front cover is opened. Under this error, all of CR motion and ink sequences are halted. Therefore it may give damages to printing head if this situation continues very long time. The error display will be cleared after finishing paper set and pushing down the lever, and message “PRESS PAUSE BUTTON” will appear. Refer to user's manuals for paper setting procedure. Recovery † Close the front cover. If it is happened with print ready status 3.2.2.5 Paper Jam Recovery Table 3-9. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE PAPER JAM LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking. Explanation While printing, feeding or cutting, a jammed paper prevents the CR motion. Paper jam is detected if one of rear and front paper sensor detect paper existing and over drive current or missynchronization of CR motor is detected. during printing, it recovers to print ready status automatically. If it is happened during pause, it recovers to pause status automatically. If the cover is opened during printing, the suspended printing pass is never resumed. Therefore there may appear a stripe on the printout. It is better to make the printer PAUSE by pressing the Pause button prior to open the cover while printing, however there may appear a uneven-coloring on some media because of the difference of printing time. † If the error is not cleared even after cover closing, Execute Checking Cover Sensor Operation in the selfdiagnostics menu and if any problem is found, take corrective action. 1. Check that the cover is closed properly. 2. Replace the sensor. † After removing the jammed paper, “TURN PWR OFF AND Recovery ON” is displayed and then reboot by turning off and on according to the message. † Check the paper path for foreign matters or any deformed parts which can cause a paper jam. Note : Errors in the drive system can occur in case of out-of-step, overcurrent or any other significant deviation from command values to the servo motor. Troubleshooting Error Display 127 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.2.7 Type-B I/F error 3.2.2.9 Paper Not Straight Table 3-11. Item Table 3-13. Description Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE OPTION I/F ERROR LCD PANEL MESSAGE PAPER NOT STRAIGHT LED STATUS None LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking. Explanation A non-supported option Type-B I/F card is installed into the printer. This error occurs when the printer is turned on. Explanation Recovery Turn off the printer, remove the option Type-B I/F card, and then turn on again. If the error recurs, repeat checking by installing another Type-B interface. When a skew exceed 3mm between top and end of the paper is occur, user should confirm the previous printout because it may not be printed completely. And also smudges on back of following printouts may occur because of poured ink on the platen. Recovery This error is cleared by paper set operation. • User should set the paper according the description of User's guide exactly in order to prevent the occurrence of this error. • The roll edge should be neatly arranged. • This error can be prevented at following printing by paper set operation. This error may also cleared by turning OFF→ ON, but this error may occur at following printing. 3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error Table 3-12. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE PAPER NOT CUT LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking. Explanation The paper cannot cut whole paper completely by the cutter, or cut paper remains over the front paper sensor. † Remove the cut paper, or cut manually the paper using scissors Recovery Troubleshooting or else. User should lift the paper set lever and reset the paper or push the Pause button. Thereby the printer will execute paper initialize operation and will be printable status. In this time, if the paper is so disarranged that it may cause head friction or paper jam, user should cut the disarranged part neatly and reset the paper. User should replace the cutter blade if it becomes dull. † Checking the operation of the Cutter Solenoid: Execute “Actuator 2 (p.229)” in the self-diagnostics menu and if any problem is found, replace the actuator. Error Display 128 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.2.10 Paper check error/Paper eject error (sheet) 3.2.2.11 Paper is too thick for cleaning Table 3-14. Item Table 3-15. Description Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE RELOAD PAPER LCD PANEL MESSAGE REMOVE PAPER LED STATUS “PAPER OUT” LED is blinking. LED STATUS PAPER OUT LED is blinking. Explanation This error occurs when cleaning is executed although a paper thickness of with1.2mm is set. Recovery Cleaning is executed automatically when paper is removed and the paper set lever is set. Explanation This error occur in following cases 1. The top length of ejected paper is too long to be back-fed when paper is set. 2. Paper's horizontal position exceeds the normally printable area when paper is set. 3. Paper's horizontal position exceeds the normal cutting permission area just after printing. 4. Length of sheet exceeds the ejectable length and cannot be ejected completely. 5. After recovery of cutter error. See “3.2.2.8 Paper cutting error (p.128)”. Recovery Troubleshooting In case of 1,2,3, user should set the paper again according the User's guide exactly. If the top of the paper has indentation, it should be trimmed. In case of 4,5, the ejected portion of paper top should be removed and then user set paper again. User can cut the portion using auto cutter after paper set lever is lifted up (in this time, it shifts to “RELOAD PAPER”), horizontal position is reset straight, paper set lever is pushed down, roll paper auto cut is selected, and “Paper Cut/Eject” button is pushed if the paper cutting is possible. 3.2.2.12 Not enough ink for cleaning Table 3-16. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE NOT ENOUGH INK LED STATUS INK OUT LED goes on Explanation This error occurs when cleaning is executed although the amount of ink necessary for cleaning is not left in each ink cartridge. The amount of ink necessary differs with each cleaning. *Timer CL and others are excluded. Recovery This error clears automatically after about 5 seconds. Error message appears again during cleaning, unless all the installed cartridges are replaced with ones with enough ink for cleaning. The message “NOT ENOUGH INK” is displayed on the panel for 5 seconds. The corresponding “INK OUT” LED goes on for 5 seconds to alert the user to the error. The error is cleared by pressing Pause button during the 5 second period. Error Display 129 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.2.13 Ink-related Errors 3.2.2.14 Defective ink cartridge Table 3-18. „ Ink End (error) : Ink end error occurs when the defined amount of ink have been consumed after NearEnd is detected. It occurs when NearEnd cartridge is inserted, whether the defined amount of ink have been consumed or not. „ No Ink Cartridge : There detected any ink cartridge slot without cartridge. „ Wrong/Non-genuine Ink Cartridge (dye / pigment): This error occurs when wrong ink type (dye / pigment) is installed. Table 3-17. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE “INK OUT”, “NO INK CARTRIDGE” or “INVALID CARTRIDGE“ LED STATUS Corresponding color LED lights up Recovery Check the CSIC contact terminal on the I/C Holder and the CSIC terminal on the ink cartridge. (damage or deformation) If no problem with the CSIC terminals is found, install a new ink cartridge. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE INK OUT LED STATUS This error occurs when the ink cartridge CSIC has some problems with the contents and has loose connection. Corresponded “INK OUT” LED goes on. Explanation There detected some problems with the contents of the ink cartridge CSIC. Reading/writing into ink cartridge was failed. Recovery In case of loose connection, release the ink lever (at this time the massage “SET INK” is displayed and reload the ink cartridge. When the error is not recovered, open the ink compartment, and then replace cartridge with new full one. 3.2.2.15 Ink lever released Table 3-19. Item Troubleshooting Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE SET INK LEVER LED STATUS None Explanation It is happen when ink lever is released. Recovery Set the ink lever. Error Display 130 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.2.19 Wrong IK designation 3.2.2.16 Illegal ink cartridge Table 3-20. Item LCD PANEL MESSAGE Table 3-23. Description Item Description INVALID CARTRIDGE LCD PANEL MESSAGE COMMAND ERROR LED STATUS Corresponding color LED lights up LED STATUS All color LEDs blink Explanation This error occurs when illegal ink cartridge is installed. Recovery Push the Pause button. Explanation This error occurs when ink type (dye / pigment / black ink type) designated with IK command is different from ink cartridge installed in the printer, or when non-supported ESC/P3 format data is received. Recovery Stop data transmitting from the host and reset the panel. 3.2.2.17 Maintenance tank full 3.2.2.20 Fatal Error Table 3-21. Item Table 3-24. Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE MAINTENANCE TANK FULL LED STATUS Item Description Maintenance tank LED lights up LCD PANEL MESSAGE SERVICE REQ. nnnnnnnn nnnnnnnn indicates type of error. Explanation This error occurs when maintenance tank is full. LED STATUS All color LEDs blink Recovery Replace a maintenance tank. Explanation This error occurs in following cases • A serious failure is detected which can not fixed by users. • A life end of a unit is detected and the continuous operation may cause a more fatal problems. • Printer halted by an un-expected operation or command receiving. Recovery Once turn off the printer and on if the error is cleared, then user can use the printer. If the fatal error of the same code occurs again and results in impossible printer operation, find the cause of the trouble by consulting “3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors (p.134)” and replace the relevant defective parts. Fatal error type Refer to “3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors (p.125)”. 3.2.2.18 No Maintenance tank Table 3-22. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE NO MAINTENANCE TANK LED STATUS Maintenance tank LED lights up Explanation This error occurs when maintenance tank is not installed properly. Recovery Replace a maintenance tank. Troubleshooting Error Display 131 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.3 Troubleshooting for Warning 3.2.3.3 Maintenance request Warnings warn users the occurrences of corresponding events by replacing “READY” or “PRINTING” messages into each warning messages on LCD. But it gives no effect to any other operations. The warning messages will never cleared until the cause is resolved. † LCD PANEL MESSAGE “MAINTENANCE REQ. nnnn” NOTE: The code “nnnn” designates the unit to be maintained. † Maintenance request type The acquired value with applying exclusive OR process to bits designated as the following table is displayed on nnnn in hexadecimal form. 3.2.3.1 Ink Low Table 3-27. Table 3-25. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE INK LOW LED STATUS Corresponding INK OUT LED blinks Explanation The warring occurs if CSIC detects “Near End”. Recovery Replace the ink cartridge with new one. 3.2.3.2 Maintenance tank full warning Bit Request object 0 Life of discharged ink tank * 1 CR life Reciprocating time of CR has reached predetermined amount. 2 Continue nozzle check error * 3 Battery shutoff RTC backup battery shutoff 4 White dot detector AGC error * 5 Head unit Shot time has reached predetermined amount. Execute head unit life initialization in Maintenance mode 2. 6 Cleaning unit Pump counter has reached predetermined amount. Execute cleaning unit life initialization in Maintenance mode 2 7 Date is not set Date is not set. Set with RTC initialization in Maintenance mode 2. 8 Battery pressure RTC backup battery pressure is low temporarily Wait for a while 9 Reserved - - Reserved - - Table 3-26. Item Description LCD PANEL MESSAGE MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST FULL LED STATUS Maintenance tank LED blinks Explanation The warring occurs when the maintenance tank is almost full. Recovery Replace the maintenance tank with new one. Cause How to recover errors Execute CR motor initialization in Maintenance mode 2. Replace RTC backup battery. - : 31 Note : In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, Bit0, Bit2, Bit4 are also treated as Reserve. Troubleshooting Error Display 132 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † LED STATUS C H E C K P O IN T Paper Out LED goes on at intervals of 5 seconds † Explanation The life of the unit that designated by the code “nnnn” is almost run out. It prompts users to call the service person to maintain it. „ Maintenance requests for head unit occur at the time of 28 billion shots/nozzle. „ A cap, pump, pump motor, wiper, flushing box are replaced together when replacing the cleaning unit. † Recovery This message is cleared only when the printer is maintained by the service person. Table 3-28. “MAINTENANCE REQ nnnn” Message Assigned bit 3 4 5 6 7 8 9-31 (NA) 1 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 0 0 0 (RSVD) 0002 CR pass count reaches the limit Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / CR MOTOR] (NA) 0 (NA) 1 (NA) 0 0 0 0 (RSVD) 0008 RTC backup battery is empty Install the battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC] (NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 1 0 0 0 (RSVD) 0020 The number of shots (per nozzle) reaches the limit Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / HEAD] (NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 1 0 0 (RSVD) 0040 Pump motor operation count reaches the limit Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / CLEANER] (NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 0 1 0 (RSVD) 0080 Date is not specified Perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC] (NA) 0 (NA) 0 (NA) 0 0 0 1 (RSVD) 0100 RTC backup battery drops instantaneously (Wait for a while) *2 (NA) 0 (NA) 1 (NA) 0 0 1 0 (RSVD) 0088 RTC backup battery is not installed Install the battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC] (Nozzle check error - Continue) *1 Battery empty (Dot missing detector - AGC error) *1 Print head - Life end Cleaning unit - Life end Date not specified Abnormal battery voltage (Reserved: Not used) How to clear 2 CR Motor - Life end Conditions *1 Cause 1 (Maintenance Tank life-end) *1 ex. nnnn 0 Not applicable to the Stylus Pro 7600/9600. Troubleshooting *2 Error Display “If the same message appears again, replace the RTC backup battery and perform Maintenance Mode 2 [CLEAR COUNTERS / RTC].” 133 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4 Troubleshooting for Service Call Errors 3.2.4.1 CR motor life (00000101) If any service call error has occurred, Stylus Pro 7600/9600 inhibits interruption, restores the actuators to their respective initial positions, writes the NVRAM values as a rule, and makes all the LEDs on the panel flash. † Problem: † Description: „ Occurrence of any error from which the user can not recover the printer. „ Life expiration of a long-life part which can cause secondary problems if the part is further used. The number of carriage round trips has reached the specified value. † Specified value: Stylus Pro 9600: 2,500,000 passes (B0/Speed) Stylus Pro 7600: 3,250,000 passes (A1/Speed) NOTE: 1 Pass = 1 round trip † Remedy: „ The printer has been brought into malfunction by unexpected operation or by 1. 2. receiving an unexpected command. † Solution: Replace the CR Motor and Driven Pulley. Check the Head FFC for breakage, scratches on the surface or damage. Check the ink supply tube for cracks, breakage or ink leakage. 3. 4. Turn the power off once and turn it on again. If the error display is cleared, try to continue using the printer. If the error of the same code has occurred again, the service technician must replace the relevant part with a new one. Then the error display will be cleared. „ • NOTE: See “3.2.1.3 Service Call (Fatal) Errors (p.125)”. „ • C H E C K P O IN T Check the CR motor life by “SelecType” (p.35). ([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU” → “SERVICE LIFE”) When the life of the CR motor has been almost expired: Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). When the CR motor has still an adequate life remaining.: Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). „ After replacing the CR Motor, execute “ Initialize CR motor life” (p83) in “Maintenance Mode 2". „ Do not initialize the CR Motor cumulative counter value (“CR TOTAL”). Troubleshooting Error Display 134 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.2 PF motor encoder check error (00010000) 3.2.4.3 PF Motor out of step (00010001) † Explanation: † Explanation: During initial operation at power on or during PF Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal can not be recognized at specified intervals. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: Broken wire for the PF motor encoder, inverted wiring for A and B pulses, disconnected connector for the encoder or motor, or inverted wiring for the motor. During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal within the specified range is not input within a specified period of time or the pulse width is extremely long. In such a case, the PF Motor is judged to be out-of-step, so that this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: • During paper feed operation, the error counter has reached the out-of-step pulse count. † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8 Ω). If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. • Defective motor. † Points to be checked: 1. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω) If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. † Remedy: • Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186). (Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272)) † Remedy: • Replace the PF Motor (p.185). • • • • (Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264)) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). Troubleshooting Error Display PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264) Replace the PF Motor (p.185). Replace the PF motor extension cable Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 135 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.4 PF motor overcurrent (00010002) 3.2.4.5 PF motor in-position time out (00010003) † Explanation: † Explanation: During PF Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal current out of the specified limits is detected in the PF Motor drive circuit on the C472MAIN Board or a current exceeding the specified value is required. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: At PF stop processing in PF Motor control, there may be a case where the paper can not move to the final target position within a specified period of time. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without completing paper feed. Hardware has detected overcurrent in the PF motor circuit. † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. † Points to be checked: Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω) If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. By visual inspection, check the PF Loop Scale for any defect, such as damage or soiling, which can cause faulty reading by the sensor. By visual inspection, check the harness of the PF Motor for any problem causing a short circuit to the frame. 1. 2. 3. 4. † Remedy: 5. • Replace the PF Motor (p.185). • Replace the PF motor extension cable • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 6. The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω) If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. † Remedy: • Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186). (Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272)) • Replace the PF Motor (p.185). (Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264)) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the PF motor extension cable Troubleshooting Error Display 136 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.6 CR motor encoder check error (00010004) 3.2.4.7 CR motor out of step (00010005) † Explanation: † Explanation: During initial operation at power on or during CR Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal is not input at specified intervals. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: Broken wire for the CR motor encoder, inverted wiring for A and B pulses, disconnected connector for the encoder or motor, or inverted wiring for the motor. During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where the encoder pulse signal within the specified range is not input within a specified period of time or the pulse width is extremely long. In such a case, the CR Motor is judged to be out-of-step, so that this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: • The error counter has reached the out-of-step pulse count because of impossible movement of the carriage, bumping of the carriage or dirty timing fence. • Defective motor. † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω) Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. † Remedy: 6. • Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178). (Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268)) 7. • Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). (Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263)) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Check to see if the timing fence for detection of the encoder pulse is removed • Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the timing fence The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω) Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. Check the carriage home position sensor. † Remedy: • Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). (Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263)) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183). • Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178). (Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268)) • Replace the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) (p.184). • Check to see if the timing fence for detection of the encoder pulse is not installed correctly. • Check for dirt, paper dust or damage to the timing fence Troubleshooting Error Display 137 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.8 CR motor overcurrent (00010006) 3.2.4.9 CR motor in-position time-out (00010007) † Explanation: † Explanation: During CR Motor operation, there may be a case where an abnormal current out of the specified limits is detected in the CR Motor drive circuit on the C472MAIN Board or a current exceeding the specified value is required. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: At carriage stop processing in CR Motor control, there may be a case where the carriage can not move to the final target position within a specified period of time (as per pulse detection). In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: Hardware has detected overcurrent in the CR motor circuit. There are pulses smaller than out-of-step pulse remaining without completing paper feed. † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω) If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. By visual inspection, check the T Fence for any defect, such as damage or soiling, which can cause faulty reading by the sensor. By visual inspection, check the harness of the CR Motor for any problem causing a short circuit to the frame. † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. † Remedy: • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). 6. (Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263)) • Correct the carriage home position. • Remove the foreign matters. Clean the timing fence. The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor. (5.8Ω) Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. † Remedy: • Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178). (Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268)) • Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). (Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263)) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183). Troubleshooting Error Display 138 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.10 Servo interrupt watchdog time-out (00010008) 3.2.4.12 CR home position sensor error (0001000A) † Explanation: † Explanation: During the CR Motor or PF Motor operation, there may be a case where watch dog time-out is detected in the DC motor control circuit or on the ASIC. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: During initial operation at power on or during printing operation, there may be a case where the home position can not be detected at the home position detection timing or within a specified period of time. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: System trouble. Shield plate detection error due to no change in the signal from the CR home position sensor. † Remedy: Since the cause is deemed to be a defective CPU or ASIC, replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). † Points to be checked: 1. 3.2.4.11 System interrupt watchdog time-out (00010009) 2. † Explanation: In the data processing stage on the C472MAIN Board, there may be a case where runaway or defective cash occurs on CPU or ASIC. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. Check that the sensor functions properly. (Refer to “5.2.2.3 Sensors ”(p224) in the self-diagnostics menu.) Check that the sensor is free from adhesion of any foreign matters. † Remedy: • Replace the CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183). • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). † Cause of trouble: System trouble. 3.2.4.13 PF home position sensor error (0001000B) † Remedy: Does not occur (there is no function to detect PF home position). Since the CPU or ASIC is deemed defective, take the following action: If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on again, replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). Troubleshooting Error Display 139 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.14 Head slide (PG) home position sensor error (0001000C) 3.2.4.15 CR motor PWM output faulty (0001000F) † Explanation: † Explanation: During initial operation at power on or during head platen gap fluctuation (change) operation after paper setting, there may be a case where the head slide home position can not be detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows during CR Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which does not reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon 00010005 in the carriage drive system has occurred and the running speed of the motor has been detected to be too low, so that the current is increased to raise the running speed of the motor. Thus, this message appears to prevent the CR Motor from being overheated. † Cause of trouble: • • • • Home position detection error due to head slide out-of-step Defective head slide home position sensor Defective head slide motor, disconnected connector or broken cable Gears not engaged properly † Cause of trouble: • A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept † Points to be checked: „ Head Slide Detection Sensor applied). • Carriage related mechanism out of step or carriage bumped. • Check that the sensor functions properly. • Check that the sensor and the head platen gap drive gear are free from „ • • • † Remedy/Points to be checked: obstruction by adhesion of foreign matters or soiling. Head Slide Motor (Pump Motor) Measure the resistance value. (9.2Ω) If the motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Check that the motor operates properly. (Refer to “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the self-diagnostics menu.) Check that the gear train including the head platen gap drive gear is free from any obstruction. † Remedy: 1. • • • • • • 2. 3. Check the load on the CR Motor. Running load of CR Motor (check by manual operation) Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω) Damage to or wear in the CR Driven Pulley Damaged or worn bearing of the CR Unit Flaws in the CR Rail caused by roller running Tension of the steel belt Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY (p.182). • Replace the Pump Motor ASSY (p.200). NOTE: Refer to “Head Slide (PG Change) Initialization Sequence” (p.107). Troubleshooting Error Display 140 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.16 PF motor PWM output faulty (00010010) 3.2.4.17 Head driver (TG) temperature error (0001001B) † Explanation: † Explanation: There may be a case where a current exceeding the specified value flows during PF Motor operation. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. This error can be displayed in the following case: an abnormal load which does not reach the level causing an out-of-step phenomenon 00010001 in the paper feed drive system has occurred and the running speed of the motor has been detected to be too low, so that the current is increased to raise the running speed of the motor. Thus, this message appears to prevent the PF Motor from being overheated. During printing operation, there may be a case where the temperature inside the print head has risen above the specified value and the thermistor in the print head detects it as abnormal temperature. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: • Head broken down. • Faulty contact of tape electric wire, broken wire or wire out of position. † Remedy: † Cause of trouble: 1. • A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept applied). 2. • Paper feed related mechanism out of step. † Remedy/Points to be checked: Turn off the power to the printer once and turn it on again and check for recovery. If the same error occurs immediately or in a short time, replace the print head with a new one. 1. Check the load on the PF Motor. • Measure the resistance value of the PF Motor (5.8Ω) If the PF Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. • Running load of PF Motor (check by manual operation) • Rotation load of PF Roller 2. Replace the PF Motor (p.185). 3. Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). Troubleshooting Error Display 141 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.18 CR servo parameter error (0001001D) 3.2.4.19 PF servo parameter error (0001001E) † Explanation: † Explanation: There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is about to be applied to the CR Motor. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: † Cause of trouble: • A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept • A small PWM output is kept on for a certain period of time (load is kept applied). • Carriage related mechanism out of step or carriage bumped. • Paper feed related mechanism out of step. applied). † Points to be checked: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. There may be a case where a voltage exceeding the specified value is about to be applied to the PF Motor. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Points to be checked: The CR Encoder and the T Fence must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The CR Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The carriage must slide smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω) If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. † Remedy: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. † Remedy: • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178). • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186). (Refer to “CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment” (p.268)) (Refer to PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment (p.272)) • Replace the CR Motor ASSY (p.180). • Replace the PF Motor (p.185). (Refer to “CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment” (p.263)) (Refer to PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (p.264)) • Make the mechanism adjustment for the carriage-related mechanism. • Remove the foreign matters. Troubleshooting The PF Encoder and the PF Loop Scale must be free from dust and dirt or any other foreign matters. The PF Timing Belt must be free from any defects and the belt must be in proper tension. The grid roller must rotate smoothly, free from undue load. Measure the resistance value of the CR Motor.(5.8Ω) If the CR Motor is found in short mode, replace the C472MAIN Board at the same time. Execute encoder checking by “5.2.2.4 Encoder ”(p225) in the selfdiagnostics menu. All the harness must be connected properly and free from short circuit or broken wire. • Clear the cause of paper feed related mechanism out-of-step. Error Display 142 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.20 CSIC reed/right error (00010020) 3.2.4.21 Ink type error (setting on printer body side) (00010022) † Explanation: † Cause of trouble: At turning on or off the power, at opening or closing the I/C Cover or at completion of one-page printing, there may be a case where it is impossible to read the data from the CSIC of the ink cartridge or write the latest ink information in the CSIC. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. • An ink type other than dye/pigment has been set. • “Ink type: neutral” setting with “CSIC detection: OFF” setting. † Remedy: • Install the correct cartridge. • With the ink lever released, set “ink type” in “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70). † Cause of trouble: Read/write for CSIC (ink cartridge) is impossible. NOTE: If setting is performed with the ink lever in the set position, initialization will start again and the service call error will occur again. † Remedy: • Faulty contact with the CSIC • • • • • • (Deformation of the CSIC contact connector / Replace the Holder Assembly IC.) Defective CSIC Board (Replace the ink cartridge.) Replace the CSIC Board (ink cartridge). Tape electric wire out of position Replace the supply valve unit. (Faulty contact with the CSIC) Replace the C472_SUB-B Board (p.192). Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.22 RTC analysis error (00010023) † Explanation: There may be a case where the absolute time data stored on NVRAM indicates an impossible date or hour. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: Various values of the absolute time data stored in NVRAM are abnormal. † Remedy: „ Initialize RTC (p.83) 1. With the paper set lever in the up position, start “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70). (Power OFF→ [Paper Source] + [Cut/Eject] + [Paper Feed ∇] → Power ON) 2. Input a date and hour in “Initialize RTC” in the counter initialize menu and turn off the power. (“CLEAR COUNTERS”→ “RTC”) „ Remove the lithium battery once and install it again. „ Replace the lithium battery with a new one. „ Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). Troubleshooting Error Display 143 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.23 CSIC ROM communication error (00010025) 3.2.4.26 Unidentified NMI (00010029) † Explanation: † Cause of trouble: Only when the starter cartridge is used, there may be a case where an error occurs in communication with the CSIC and Main Board. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. CPU has detected undefined NMI. † Remedy: If this error is not cleared even when the power is turned off once and on again, replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). † Cause of trouble: Faulty contact of ink cartridge (Only with the starter cartridge or with individual cartridges for which writing has been performed by the factory setting command.) † Remedy: 3.2.4.27 CR ASIC ECU error (0001002A) † Cause of trouble: Make sure that the ink cartridge is connected properly. Faulty firmware or damaged drive circuit board † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.24 RTC communication error (00010026) † Explanation: There may be a case where the RTC circuit on the Main Board operates incorrectly. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. 3.2.4.28 PF ASIC ECU error (0001002B) † Cause of trouble: † Cause of trouble: The RTC on the circuit board is operating abnormally (operating in test mode). † Remedy: 1. 2. 3. Remove the battery once with the power turned off and after waiting for a while, install the battery again and turn the power on. Repeat step 1 above until this error does not occur at power-on. After making certain that the error does not occur, set the date and hour for the RTC by Initialize RTC (p.83) in “Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70) or by booting the printer in the normal mode and sending the timer IC value change command of the factory setting commands. 3.2.4.25 Head error (00010028) † Cause of trouble: Faulty firmware or damaged drive circuit board † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.29 NVRAM error (00020000) † Explanation: There may be a case where the parameter data in NVRAM is broken. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: NVRAM erase error or write error (Check in 2 bytes) † Remedy: The head is damaged. • Download the parameter data from another model. (However, make the necessary adjustments.) † Remedy: • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the Print Head (p.171). Troubleshooting Error Display 144 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.2.4.30 SDRAM error (00020002) 3.2.4.32 Flash memory SUM error (00020009) † Explanation: † Explanation: In memory check of SDRAM executed at power on, there may be a case where a bit error is detected. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: This error is displayed when the firmware has not been installed in flash memory or when the firmware has not been installed successfully. † Cause of trouble: SUM check error for program area. SDRAM check error at power-on. † Remedy: † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.31 BOOT program SUM error (00020003) 3.2.4.33 Program load error (0002000A) † Explanation: † Cause of trouble: There may be a case where the boot program of firmware is broken. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. (Only at power on) † Cause of trouble: SUM check error for program area on RAM. † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). SUM check error for BOOT program area. † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.34 Internal memory shortage error (0002000B) † Explanation: This error appears when the cash area is insufficient. There may be a case where the assigned work area varies with the I/F mode and I/F mode setting does not agree or decoding of a command is impossible. Then the work area is consumed up, thus memory runs short. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: Faulty program. † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Check I/F mode. • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). Troubleshooting Error Display 145 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Remedy: 3.2.4.35 Review error (0002000C) • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). † Explanation: There may be a case where the combination of the DIP Switch setting positions on the Main Board is not supported by the firmware. In such a case, this message is displayed and the printer stops operating. † Cause of trouble: Driver circuit board review and the state of the DIP switch are not consistent with the program version. 3.2.4.39 CPU slot illegal command exception error (100001A0) † Cause of trouble: Faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error. † Remedy: „ Check driver circuit board review and state of DIP switch. „ Check the DIP Switch setting. (See p.209) † Remedy: 3.2.4.36 CPU address error (load misalignment) 3.2.4.40 CPU DMA address error (100005C0) • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). (100000E0) † Cause of trouble: † Cause of trouble: Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error. Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error. † Remedy: † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.37 CPU address error (storage misalignment) (10000100) 3.2.4.41 CPU error (10000xxx) † Cause of trouble: † Cause of trouble: Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error. Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error. † Remedy: † Remedy: • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). • Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) • Replace the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207). 3.2.4.38 CPU reserve command code exception error (10000180) † Cause of trouble: Defective circuit board or faulty CPU soldering. Program trouble or generation error. Troubleshooting Error Display 146 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.3 Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout † The actions above do not work to recover the printer, check the following points: „ If trouble occurs in all the ink colors: This section describes conceivable print quality problems that may occur with this printer and the troubleshooting points for those errors. • • • • Table 3-29. Diagnosing trouble based on printout Item Description Refer to 1 Dot missing p.147 2 Uneven printing/poor resolution p.148 3 Smudged or marred printout on front side p.148 4 Smudged or marred printout on reverse side p.149 5 White/black banding p.149 • • „ • 3.3.1 Dot Missing If the printer is kept for a long time without being used, the viscosity of the ink on the nozzle surfaces of the print heads, and in the nozzles themselves, increases, and may cause skipping of dots during printing. In such cases, execute Power cleaning (p.60) in SelecType mode first (execute several times). If normal printing is not recovered even after this power cleaning, check the following particulars. † Execute powerful cleaning of the ink head. 1. 2. C H E C K P O IN T Execute Initial filling (p.259) or [KK2] cleaning. Execute “Initial charge or [KK2]” in the Cleaning (p.259) menu of Selfdiagnostic Function (p.220). (Power OFF→[Paper Feed ∆]+[Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] →Power ON) → “Cleaning” → “Init.Fill” Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.45) Execute “Nozzle Check Pattern Printing” in the SelecType menu. ([SelecType] → “TEST PRINT MENU” → “NOZZLE CHECK”) • „ • • • Are the print heads and cap assemblies sealed during ink filling? If the cap assembly / pump tubes have come off. If the life of the cleaning unit has expired. If the gear train between the pump motor and pump unit has been assembled improperly. If the cap assembly has failed. (The tension spring has come off, the cap rubber is damaged, etc.) If the pump unit has failed. (The tubes are crushed, etc.) If the trouble occurs with a specific ink color: Abnormal connections between the ink cartridge, ink holder, tube, damper, print head. (Fastening nuts loose, or the O-ring deformed or damaged, causing ink to leak, etc. could occur.) Print head failure If the trouble still has not been recovered from with the items up to this point, replace the following electric system related parts and check again. Check the connections to the CR cable (FFC long) and if there is any damage to it or not. Check the connections to the head cables (FFC short; x 2), and if there is any damage to them or not. MAIN Board C A U T IO N „ If you replace the MAIN board or the print heads, the In initial filling, a large amount of ink will be discharged into the Maintenance Tank. Therefore, check the counter indication (remaining value) beforehand. (If deemed necessary, prepare another Maintenance Tank as a spare.) Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout connection state of the connection cables (FFC) should be checked. Particularly in cases where the connector is inserted at a slant, etc., when the power is turned on, it could cause destruction of the circuit and the insides of the heads, so sufficient caution should be exercised. 147 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.3.2 Uneven Printing/Poor Resolution 3.3.3 Smudged or Marred Printout (Front) If the print quality is abnormal (uneven printing, diffused image, etc.), the following items should be checked. If smudging or marring occurs due to rubbing by the head, etc. on the paper's printed surface, check the following items. 1. Adjust the gap In the SelecType (p.35) or the Self-diagnostic Function (p.220) menu, carry out gap adjustment (“Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment) (p.60)” and “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) (p.248)”). 1. 2. If the trouble occurs only when the user is using a specific type of paper (thick paper), carry out “User Paper Setting” using the panel setting procedure. (By setting the information concerning the thickness of the paper the user is using and correcting the print position (correction of changes in the position where ink hits the paper surface due to differences in paper thickness), avoid influencing the print position.) If smudging is occurring at the front end of the roll paper or at the rear end, widen the margins at the front end and rear end. (Set the “Roll Paper Margin” front end and rear end on “15 mm”.) (If high duty printing was done close to the front end and rear end (margin = 3 mm), the paper will contain a large amount of ink and deformation of the paper will be accelerated, and depending on the case, the paper will touch the heads.) 2. If paper with weak edges which cannot move smoothly along the paper path is being used, Select “NORM” for “SUCTION” in the “PAPER CONFIG. MENU”, which is in the “Panel Settings”. 3. If there is rubbing and smudging due to slow drying in printing of user paper. 3. If the this problem occurs after replacing the Main Board with a new one: „ Set the stand basket paper Eject direction on Front. „ In the item “DRYING TIME” in the User Paper Setting Menu”, in “Panel • Transfer the backup parameters on the old Main Board to the new board. (p.219) Settings,” set the drying time (the time until auto paper cutting is carried out after printing is finished. (Default: 0 second; Maximum: 10 seconds) • Execute “Write D/A Correction Values” in the diagnostic mode.(p.236) 4. If the printer's condition is not improved by the above items (adjustments), check the following items using the self-diagnostic function. „ Head Slant Checking (p.246) C H E C K P O IN T Once you have made the “Head Slant Adjustment”, be sure to make the “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) (p.248)” and “Gap Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment, Uni-D Adjustment)” (p.60). Troubleshooting 4. If the trouble cannot be resolved by the above methods, check the following. „ The cap assembly / tension spring is off. (If this spring comes off, cap will collect inside the cap and ink that adheres around the head nozzle surface ends up adhering to the paper. „ Check to see if dust containing ink, foreign matters or paper is adhering to the side surface of the head. Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 148 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.3.4 Smudged or Marred Printout (Reverse side) If smudging or marring of the paper back surface with ink occurs, the following items should be checked. 1. Check to see if there isn't ink adhering to the paper feed path. If there is ink adhering, it should be wiped off. „ „ „ „ 2. 3.3.5 White or Black Banding in the carriage running direction If white or black banding (uneven density) in parallel with the carriage running direction appears on your printout, check the following points: 1. Sub-platen A/B Surface Grid roller surface Paper guide L surface Paper guide L2 surface „ Dot missing „ Head ID setting value One likely cause of ink adhering to the above parts is the following cause. If dot missing is found, execute head cleaning. (If deemed necessary, select and execute “Power cleaning (p.60)” in the SelecType mode or “Cleaning (p.259)” by self-diagnostic function.)If the Head ID value is wrong, set the correct value. „ Paper feeding at a slant during printing (at the point when 1 page is finished) „ The ink absorbing sponge for “borderless printing” is deformed or swelling. C A U T IO N If the Paper Skew Detection setting is off in “Printer Settings” → “Panel Setting Menu” → “Paper Width Detection,” if the user's paper size setting is not correct, the surface of the platen will be printed. Nozzle Check Pattern Printing (p.45) Select “Adj: Check Nozzle” in the Adjustment (p.230) menu by the self-diagnostic function. Check the following points: 2. Adjustment If dot missing is not found, perform the following adjustments and check for improvement: „ Paper feed correction (driver) „ Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment) (p.247) If each line of nozzles in the head is perpendicular to the carriage running direction correctly, the raster lines printed with nozzles can overlap or be dislocated, so that black banding (uneven density) or white banding (blank spaces between raster lines) may occur. If the adjustments above do not work enough to improve the quality, try to improve by executing Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment (p.239) by the self-diagnostic function. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 149 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 3.3.6 Banding in the paper feed direction If banding (uneven density, rough image) in parallel with the paper feed direction is found on the print, perform the following adjustment: † Bi-D adjustment: The Bi-D adjustment can be executed by any of the following methods. „ “Gap Adjustment” in the panel setting menu „ Adjustment by printer driver If the adjustment above does not work to improve the print quality, you may improve it by adjusting the “Paper thickness” setting value (± 0.1 ~ 0.2 mm) in “User Paper Setting Menu” of the panel setting menu. Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Based on Your Printout 150 4 CHAPTER DISASSEMBLY & ASSEMBLY EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.1 Summary W A R N IN G This Chapter describes the disassembly and reassembly procedure chiefly for Stylus Pro 7600, with descriptions added to particulars specific to Stylus Pro 9600. Unless otherwise specified, disassembled units or components can be reassembled by reversing the disassembly procedure. Things, if not strictly observed, that could result in injury or loss of life are described under the heading “Warning”. Precautions for any disassembly or assembly procedures are described under the heading “CAUTION”. Chips for disassembling procedures are described under the heading “CHECK POINT”. If the assembling procedure is different from the reversed procedure of the disassembling, the procedure is described under the heading “REASSEMBLY”. Any adjustments required after disassembling the units are described under the heading “ADJUSTMENT REQUIRED”. Be sure to make the specified adjustments by referring to Chapter 5 “ADJUSTMENT”. When you have to remove any units or parts that are not described in this chapter, refer to the exploded diagrams in the appendix. 4.1.1 Precautions Before proceeding with any disassembly or assembly work, make absolutely sure of the following. Disassembly & Assembly Summary „ The power switch for Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is incorporated in the secondary circuit of the power supply circuit. Therefore, the printer is always supplied with electric power, unless the power cable is disconnected. Before servicing, unless otherwise stated, be sure to unplug the power cord from the wall outlet to prevent injury, burn, and electric shocks or damage to the circuit. In doing so, be sure to turn the printer off and wait several seconds first and then unplug the power cord. If you must keep the power supplied to measure voltage, be aware of the potential for electrical shock and do all tasks with the most care. „ With the front cover open, the cover sensor stops the operation of the CR motor and PF motor. To ensure safety, you are prohibited from disabling this interlock function. „ A lithium battery for memory backup is installed on the main circuit board of Stylus Pro 7600/9600. To prevent accidents caused by the battery, never fail to observe the following instructions when serving the main circuit board: • Keep the battery away from any metal or other batteries so that electrodes of the opposite polarity do not come in contact with each other. • Do not solder on any part of the battery. (Doing so may result in leakage of electrolyte from the battery, burning or explosion. The leakage may affect other devices close to the battery.) • Do not charge the battery. (This may cause burning or explosion.) • Do not dismantle the battery. (The gas inside the battery may hurt your throat. Leakage, burning or explosion may also be caused.) • Do not short-circuit the terminals of the battery. Do not put the battery on a conductive table in such a way that the terminal face comes in contact with the table. • Do not remove and install the battery. Do not install the battery in the wrong direction. • Do not heat the battery or put it near fire. 152 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 W A R N IN G Revision A „ Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacture. Dispose the used batteries according to government's law and regulations. „ Wear protective goggles to protect your eyes from ink. If ink gets in your eye, flush the eye with fresh water and see a doctor immediately. „ Wear a pair of gloves to protect your hands from the sharp edge in the printer mechanism. „ If ink comes into contact with your skin, wash it off with soap and water. If irritation occurs, contact a physician. C A U T IO N „ Before servicing or performing maintenance on the printer, „ „ „ W A R N IN G „ Avant de commencer, assurez vous que l'imprimante soit „ eteinte et que le cordon d'alimentation soit debranche. „ Lorsque vous changez la pile au lithium, assurez vous que la „ „ nouvelle respecte bien les caracteristiques requises. „ Lorque que vous installez la pile au lithium, faites attention a l'inserer dans le bon sens en respectant la polarite. „ Veillez a jeter les piles usagees selon le reglement local. „ Ne rechargez pas les piles au lithium. C A U T IO N „ Risque d’explosion si la pile est remplacée incorrectment. Ne remplacer que par une pile du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant. Eliminer les piles déchargées selon les lois et les règles de sécurité en vigueur. Disassembly & Assembly Summary „ make sure you have enough space. If you need to move the printer, make sure the space you move to is safe. Because the printer is much heavier than most printers you need to take extra care. If you need to take apart the printer and the stand from each other or put then together, two people are necessary. If you remove and replace any parts of the ink path system, be sure to discharge the ink beforehand by executing “Ink Blowing” in “Clean Head” process. Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”. After removing any of the ink related parts, double check to make sure all parts are secured; otherwise you're going to be in big trouble. Use only recommended tools for disassembling, assembling or adjusting the printer. Apply lubricants and adhesives as specified. Ink may leak onto other printer parts or the printer basket when removing printer parts, so it is recommended to put a sheet or cloth under the printer, especially when working on or near ink-related parts. When working on the electrical circuit boards, be careful concerning static electricity which can cause damage to the board. It is recommended you use an anti-static wrist band or similar grounding device to prevent static electricity buildup. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 uses many FFCs (Flexible Flat Cables). Improper connection, such as slanting insertion, of an FFC can cause a short circuit resulting in broken elements on the circuit board. Be sure to connect the FFCs to the connectors properly with great care. 153 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 C A U T IO N Revision A „ In reassembly, place the wiring of electric parts in specified „ „ „ „ „ Top positions. (If wiring is located in places other than specified, cables can come in contact with a sharp edge or the anti-noise margin may lessen.) As necessary, if you remove each cover and operate the printer, care should be taken not to get injured by the operation of the drive system units. The cutter blade is extremely sharp, so care should be taken not to injure yourself when handling it. An ultra-hardened blade is used for the cutter blade, and physically, it is extremely brittle material, so care should be taken not to bump it against any of the metal parts of the printer, etc. and damage it. When performing service operations on items which are controlled as after service parts but which no procedures have been provided for, the state of the parts should be observed closely before beginning the operation to get a thorough idea of how to proceed. If you have to loosen a screw that has blue screw-lock applied to its head, make sure you apply blue screw-lock again when reassembling. Rear L Front R Bottom Figure 4-1. Directional View of the Printer Disassembly & Assembly Summary 154 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.1.2 Tools 4.1.3 Screw List This section lists the tools necessary to disassemble or assemble the printer. The following table lists all the screws used in this printer. Table 4-1. Necessary Tools Tool (+) Phillips screwdriver #2 (+) Phillips screwdriver #1 Table 4-2. Screws Part Code Commonly available tools, no special tools necessary Notes Type longer than 250mm is helpful Color Description CB M3×6 White (+) Bind CBP M3×6 Silver (+) Bind P-tight CBP M4×10 Black (+) Bind P-tight (-) Standard screwdriver CBS M3×10 White (+) Bind S-tight Round-nosed pliers CBS M4×6 White (+) Bind S-tight Tweezers CBS M2×8 White (+) Bind S-tight CBS M3×6 White (+) Bind S-tight CBS M4×8 White (+) Bind S-tight CBS M3×10 White (+) Bind S-tight CUPS M3×6 White (+) Cup S-tight CUPS M4×6 White (+) Cup S-tight CUPS M4×8 White (+) Cup S-tight CPP M3×8 White (+) Cup P-tight CPS M3×12 White (+) Crosshead Pan S-tight CP M3×6 White (+) Crosshead Pan CP(W) M2×12 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer #E 589 Torque Wrench (6 mm x 1.0 kg) or #f760 Torque Wrench Hex Wrench B765106901 1059914 For tube coupling screws. *1 Part with Exclusive Stand (Commercially available part) 5.5 mm PF Loop Scale ASSY Assembly tool 1051765 Exclusive tool No. #f730 PF Loop Scale Attachment tool 1051767 Exclusive tool No. #731 Ink Cartridge*2 Draining cartridge*2 Maintenance Tank*2 PF_ENC CR_ENC Cutter Note *1: *2: CP(W) M2×8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer CP(W) M3×6 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer CP(W) M3×8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer CP(W) M3×25 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer This hex wrench is necessary only when removing the stand (feet). CP(W) M4×8 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer 7 of these cartridges are necessary for one operation. CP(W) M4×10 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer Disassembly & Assembly Summary CP(W) M4×40 Silver (+) Crosshead Pan, washer Flush head screw M3×6 White (+) Flush head Truss screw M4×6 White (+) Truss screw Toothed washer M3 White Outer teeth Toothed washer M4 White Outer teeth 155 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.1.4 Disassembly Flow Refer to Figure 4-2 when determining the disassembly flow. C A U T IO N This printer has been assembled with high accuracy of 1/100 mm. Therefore, you are prohibited to disassemble the frames or some specific parts. Permission of disassembly and assembly or removal and installation is limited to the parts provided with a parts number in the ASP List in Chapter 7. (If any parts other than specified are disassembled or removed, there may be a case you can not repair the printer except at the factory.) Disassembly & Assembly Summary 156 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.1 Panel Unit (p.159) 4.2.3 L Side Cover (p.163) 4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover (p.169) 4.2.9 Front Cover (p.170) 4.2.2 R Side Cover (p.160) 4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 (p.168) 4.2.4 I/H Cover (p.164) 4.2.6 Rear Cover (p.166) 4.2.5 H Top Cover (p.165) 4.3.1 Print Head (p.171) 4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197) 4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY (p.183) 4.3.2 Damper ASSY (p.173) 4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board (p.192) 4.4.1 PF Motor (p.185) 4.7.1 Power Supply Board (p.205) 4.3.3 CR Board ASSY (p.174) 4.7.2 AC Inlet (p.206) 4.3.4 Cutter Section (p.175) 4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207) 4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY (p.175) 4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186) 4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale (p.187) 4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY (p.193) Release Sensor (I/H Lever) (p.193) CSIC Relay Board (p.193) 4.4.4 Suction Fans (p.189) 4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid (p.177) 4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178) 4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY (p204) 4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179) 4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal (p.199) 4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY (p.200) 4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY (p.180) 4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY (p.182) 4.6.3 Cap ASSY (p.200) 4.6.4 Pump ASSY (p.201) 4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) (p.203) 4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) (p.184) 4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing (p.158) 4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190) 4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism (p.185) 4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191) Note: The italic bold characters represent consumables or regular replacement parts. 4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism (p.171) 4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism (p.192) 4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism (p.198) 4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards (p.205) Figure 4-2. Disassembly Process Flowchart Disassembly & Assembly Summary 157 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2 Removing the Panel Unit and Housing This sections describes the removal procedure for printer housing parts. See below for an illustration of the housing parts. 4.2.5 H Top Cover (p.165) 4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover (p.169) 4.2.3 L Side Cover (p.163) 4.2.2 R Side Cover (p.160) 4.2.4 I/H Cover (p.164) 4.2.9 Front Cover (p.170) Paper Set Lever 4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 (p.168) 4.2.1 Panel Unit (p.159) Figure 4-3. Housing Part Diagram Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 158 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.1 Panel Unit 1. Release the clips on both sides of the control panel unit and pull slightly away from the R Side Cover. (See Figure 4-4) 2. Remove the FFC cable from the connector and hook. (See Figure 4-5) Panel Unit Lock Make sure that the Panel FFC does not get twisted round the carriage driven pulley inside the printer. Push Push Figure 4-4. Panel Unit Removal 1/2 Panel Unit (back side) Connector Clip Clip Hook Clip FFC Figure 4-5. Panel Unit Removal 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 159 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.2 R Side Cover Lever Blind Cap 1. Remove the Panel Unit. (p.159) 2. Push back the Paper Set Lever to the released position.(See Figure 4-6) 3. Remove two black screws (CBP: M4×10) from the lever handle, and remove the handle. 4. Using a (-) driver or similar tool, remove the lever blind cap. C H E C K P O IN T Paper Set Lever Take care not to drop the lever blind cap into the printer. Black screws (CBP: M4×10) ×2 5. Open the roll paper cover. (See Figure 4-7) 6. Remove the one black screw (CBP: M4×10) from inside the printer. Adjust the height of the Paper Set Lever by means of the black screws so that the Paper Set Lever does not come in contact with the Lever Blind Cap. Figure 4-6. R Side Cover Removal 1/5 Roll Paper Cover Black screws (CBP: M4×10) Figure 4-7. R Side Cover Removal 2/5 Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 160 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 7. From the rear side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8). 8. From the right side remove two screws (CUPS: M4×8). 9. Remove the Maintenance Tank. Revision A Screw (CUPS: M4×8) Screws (CUPS: M4×8) ×2 Maintenance Tank Figure 4-8. R Side Cover Removal 3/5 Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 161 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 10. Open the Front Cover. (See Figure 4-9) 11. Remove one black screw (CBP: M4×10). 12. Bring down the Paper Set Lever to the front. (See Figure 4-10) 13. Remove the R Side Cover by lifting it outward. Black screw (CBP: M4×10) In installing the R Side Cover, install the Lever Blind Cap before tightening the screws. If you have dropped the Lever Blind Cap into the printer body, remove the R Side Cover from the printer body and take out the Lever Blind Cap. Front Cover Figure 4-9. R Side Cover Removal 4/5 Paper Set Lever Figure 4-10. R Side Cover Removal 5/5 Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 162 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.3 L Side Cover 1. Open the roll paper cover. (See Figure 4-11) 2. Remove the one black screw (CBP: M4×10) inside the printer. 3. From the back side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8). (See Figure 4-12) 4. From the outside, remove two screws (CUPS: M4×8). 5. Remove the L side cover. Roll Parer Cover Black screw (CBP: M4×10) Figure 4-11. L Side Cover Removal 1/2 Screw (CUPS: M4×10) Screws (CUPS: M4×10) ×2 Figure 4-12. L Side Cover Removal 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 163 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.4 I/H Cover 1. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 2. Open the I/H Cover Lid. 3. Remove one black screw (M3×6), then remove the lever cap.(See Figure 4-13) 4. Remove two screws (CBS: M3×10), then remove the I/H Cover and I/H Cover Lid. (See Figure 4-13) C H E C K P O IN T Lever Cap Black screw For easy removal and installation of the I/H Cover, set the I/H Lever in the raised (Release) position. I/H Lever Screws (CBS: M3×10) ×2 I/H Cover Lid Release Figure 4-13. I/H Cover Removal Lock Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 164 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.5 H Top Cover Screws (CUPS: M4×8) ×2 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Open the Front Cover. 5. From the left side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8). (See Figure 4-14) 6. Remove the screw (CUPS: M4×8) at the front left of the printer. 7. Remove the screw (CUPS: M4×8) at the front right of the printer. 8. From the right side, remove one screw (CUPS: M4×8). (See Figure 4-15) 9. To avoid damaging the P_THICK Sensor or P_THICK_0.3 Sensor, bring down the Paper Set Lever toward you (to the paper holding position). Screw (CUPS: M4×8) 10. Pull up the H Top Cover rearward and remove it. In doing so, take care not to lose the plate which is also locked with the front left screw. C A U T IO N Figure 4-14. H Top Cover Removal on left side Screw (CUPS: M4×8) When removing the H Top Cover, care should be taken not to damage the P_THICK Sensor and P_THICK Sensor_0.3. To avoid damaging them, bring down the Paper Set Lever toward you (to the paper holding position) first and shift the H Top Cover rearward in an oblique direction for its removal. Screw (CUPS: M4×8) Plate Figure 4-15. H Top Cover Removal on right side Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 165 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.6 Rear Cover Screws (CPS: M3×12) ×2 1. From the rear side, remove two screws (CPS: M3×12), and remove the blank panel. (See Figure 4-16) 2. Remove the two screws (CP: M3×6) securing the parallel interface and remove the one screw (CBS: M3×6) securing the USB interface. 3. Remove one screw (CBS: M3×6) holding the AC inlet top. (See Figure 4-17) 4. Remove the three screws (CBS: M4×8) (six screws for Stylus Pro 9600) holding the rear cover bottom. 5. Open the Roll Paper Cover. 6. Remove the three screws (CBS: M4×8) (six screws for Stylus Pro 9600) holding the rear cover top, then remove the rear cover, while pulling it rearward. Blank Panel Screws (CPS: M3×6) ×2 Screw (CPS: M3×6) C A U T IO N To avoid getting hurt with sharp frame edges, be sure to wear gloves when performing the following work: „ Removing and installing the Rear Cover „ Inserting your hand through the opening in the Access Cover (see Check Point on the next page) Figure 4-16. Rear Cover Removal 1/2 Screw (CPS: M3×6) Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×3 Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×3 Figure 4-17. Rear Cover Removal 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 166 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 C H E C K P O IN T Revision A Removing the Access Cover For disconnecting connectors for various units from the Main Board Assy, it is not always necessary to remove the Rear Cover. Remove the Access Cover, and you will be allowed to do almost all such work. Loosen the screw Main Board Access Cover Remove the screw Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 167 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.7 Paper Guide L2 1. From the front, remove four screws (Truss: M4×6). (See Figure 4-18) 2. Remove the Paper Guide L2. Install the Paper Guide L2 so that all its projections are fit in the notches of the Paper Guide L properly. (See Figure 4-19) „ Number of notches: Stylus Pro 7600: 5 Stylus Pro 9600: 8 Screws (Truss: M4×6) ×2 Screws (Truss: M4×6) ×2 Figure 4-18. Paper Guide L2 Removal Paper Guide L Notch Cushion tape Projection Paper Guide L2 Figure 4-19. Paper Guide L2 Installation Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 168 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.8 Roll Paper Cover Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×2 1. Open the Roll Paper Cover. (See Figure 4-20) 2. Remove two screws (CPS: M4×8) securing the black spindle support (Spindle Support L) on the left, and then remove the spindle support. 3. Remove the two screws (CPS: M4×8) and one screw (M4×12)securing the gray spindle support (Spindle Support R) on the right, and then remove the spindle support. (See Figure 4-20) When installing the white spindle support (Spindle Support R), install the transparent washer, wave washer and printer body frame on the outside of the Roll Paper Cover in the named order. Spindle Support L Roll Paper Cover Transparent washer Figure 4-20. Roll Paper Cover removal Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×2 Wave washer Spindle Support R Screw (M4×12) Figure 4-21. Roll Paper Cover removal Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 169 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.2.9 Front Cover Hooks 1. Open the Front Cover. 2. Push in the two hooks to the left of the cover and remove the Front Cover Support. (See Figure 4-22) 3. Release the Front Cover Spring L from the Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft on the left side of the Front Cover. (See Figure 4-23) 4. Remove the Plastic Stop Wheel E5 on the left side of the Front Cover and move the Front Cover Fulcrum Pin outward for its removal. 5. Release the Front Cover Spring R from the Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft on the right side of the Front Cover. 6. Remove the Front Cover from the Front Cover Fulcrum Pin R. Front Cover Support Front Cover Install the Plastic Stop Wheels in the correct orientations, respectively. Figure 4-22. Front Cover Support Removal Front Cover Front Cover Spring Catch Shaft Plastic Stop Wheel E5 Long E-ring Front Cover Fulcrum Pin R Short Front Cover Fulcrum Pin L A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D Front Cover Spring R The cover switch holder installation position should be checked so that the cover sensor ASSY is linked to the front cover when it opens and closes. Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216) Front Cover Spring L Plastic Stop Wheel E Front Cover Front Cover Fulcrum Pin L Figure 4-23. Front Cover Removal Disassembly & Assembly Removing the Panel Unit and Housing 170 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3 Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 4.3.1 Print Head C A U T IO N C H E C K P O IN T When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged. Push When replacing the print head with a new one, execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing” on page 256) beforehand. Cutter area 1. Execute ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from all the ink passages. 2. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center. (See Figure 4-24) 3. Loosen the one screw (CP(W): M3×6) securing the front end of the damper holder and separate the Damper Unit from the print head. (See Figure 4-25) C H E C K P O IN T Move the carriage Figure 4-24. Carriage Lock Release When removing the head, hang the hook of the Damper Unit in the hole of the bottom plate of the CR Board Assy so that work will not be obstructed by the Damper Unit. In addition, for easier work, you are advised to lift with Scotch tape to such a degree that no significant load is applied to the ink tubes. „ There is a hook 2 cm high at the center of the head. Install the Damper Unit with care not to hit it against the hook. „ When installing the Damper Unit, before tightening the screw, press the lower area of the Damper with your fingers so that it comes in close contact with the print head. Loosen the screw (CP(W): M3×6) Damper Unit Figure 4-25. Damper Holder Loosening Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 171 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4. Loosen the left screw for the Head Holder, remove the right screw (M3×6) and release the Head Holder downward.(See Figure 4-26) 5. Take out the head by lifting its inner side and release the 2 FFCs. (See Figure 4-27) Loosen the screw „ Take care not to touch the nozzle side of the print head to be installed and not to let dust or dirt adhere to the nozzles. „ When installing the carriage, take care not to scratch the nozzle Screw (M3×6) side. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D When replacing the print head, the following adjustment procedures are required. „ Refer to “5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment” (p.212) Head Holder Figure 4-26. Head Holder Release Print Head Figure 4-27. Head Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 172 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.2 Damper ASSY Execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) before removing the Damper ASSY. Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”. C H E C K P O IN T C A U T IO N „ If you press on the transparent film on the damper's right side surface with your fingers, the ink with which the inside is filled will be expelled, so do not press on this part. „ The transparent film on the damper's side is delicate, so be careful not to damage it while working. 1. Execute ink discharge operation to discharge the ink from all the ink passages. 2. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center. (See Figure 4-24) 3. Loosen the one screw (CP(W): M3×6) securing the front end of the damper holder and separate the Damper Unit from the print head. (See Figure 4-25) 4. Disengage the three hooks of the Damper Holder and remove the Damper Holder. (See Figure 4-28) 5. Pull out the relevant Damper ASSY from the Damper Holder, loosen the coupling screw and separate the Damper ASSY from the ink tube. (See Figure 4-29) Damper Holder Hooks (3 positions) Figure 4-28. Damper Holder Removal Coupling screw NOTE: Take care not to lose the O-ring inside the coupling screw. „ There is a hook 2 cm high at the center of the head. Install the Damper Unit with care not to hit it against the hook. „ When installing the Damper Unit, before tightening the screw, press the lower area of the Damper with your fingers so that it comes in close contact with the print head. „ Secure the coupling screw and the ink tube by tightening at the specified torque. (2 ~ 2.5 kg/f) Damper ASSY Damper Holder Figure 4-29. Damper ASSY Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 173 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.3 CR Board ASSY Screws (M3×16) 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Remove one screw (CPP M3×6), two screws (CP(W): M3×6) and one screw (M3×16) securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3), and remove the CR Board Guide. (See Figure 4-30) 6. Disconnect the following eight connectors (with lock) connected to the CR Board. (See Figure 4-31) Screw (CPP: M3×6) Screws (CP(W): M3×6) ×2 CR Board Guide Plate Figure 4-30. CR Board Guide Removal Table 4-3. Connectors on CR Board Connector Type 7. Connected to 5-Pin (white) CR Encoder Sensor 4-Pin (black) P_EDGE Sensor 2-Pin (white) Cutter Solenoid FFC (lock type)×2 Print Head FFC (lock type)×3 Main Board Remove the two screws (CPP: M3×8) securing the CR Board ASSY and remove the CR Board ASSY. (See Figure 4-32) The screw on the far left side used to fasten the CR board guide plate should be tightened together with the ground wire, toothed washer, CR board guide and CR board ASSY, in that order. C A U T IO N When connecting an FFC, take great care not to insert it aslant. (Inserting aslant can cause a short circuit of signals, thus resulting in broken circuit elements.) Figure 4-31. CR Board Connectors Disconnection Screws (CPP: M3×8) ×2 Figure 4-32. CR Board Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 174 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.4 Cutter Section 4.3.4.1 Cutter Holder ASSY C A U T IO N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged. 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock the carriage and then move the carriage to the printer center. (See Figure 4-24) 6. Remove one screw (CPPM3×6) securing the CR Board Guide, and remove three screws (CP(W): M3×6) securing the ground line, washer (M3), and CR Board Guide. (See Figure 4-30) 7. Disconnect the following three connectors on the CR Board. (See Figure 4-31) Connector Type 8. Connected to 5-Pin (white) CR Encoder Sensor 4-Pin (black) P_EDGE Sensor 2-Pin (white) Cutter Solenoid Screws (CP(W): M3×8) ×4 Cutter Holder ASSY Figure 4-33. Removing the Cutter Housing Key engaged with carriage Remove the four screws (CP(W): M3×8) securing the Cutter Holder, and while paying attention to the connector harness connected to the CR Board, remove the Cutter Holder ASSY from the carriage. (See Figure 4-33) „ The cutter cap and the CR lock kicker should be engaged. (If they are not engaged, the carriage cannot be moved from the home position to the left when the power switch is turned on.) (See Figure 4-34) Figure 4-34. Cutter Holder ASSY (Back: Carriage Side) Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 175 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A „ Take care not to catch the solenoid cable (red) in the cutter cap. (See Figure 4-35) „ When installing the Cutter Holder ASSY, make sure that the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) is led through the slit in the CR Encoder Sensor properly. CR Encoder Sensor CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) Figure 4-35. Take Care When Installing the Cutter Holder CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) CR Encoder Sensor A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D After installing the cutter holder ASSY, the following adjustment should be done. „ “5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment (p.217)” Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 176 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.4.2 Cutter Solenoid CR Lock Kicker 1. Remove the Cutter Holder ASSY. (p.175) 2. Release the engagement between the Cutter Cap and the CR Lock Kicker, then remove the Cutter Cap + Cutter Solenoid Iron Core and Cutter Solenoid Spring. 3. Take out the two screws (CP(W): M3×6) holding the Cutter Solenoid, then remove the Cutter Solenoid by pushing it out from the bottom of the Cutter Holder ASSY with the shaft of a (+) screwdriver or the like. C A U T IO N Cutter Cap Do not pull the cable to remove the Cutter Solenoid. Cutter Solenoid A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D After installing the Cutter Solenoid, the following adjustment should be done. „ “5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment (p.217)” Screws (CP(W): M2.5×5) ×2 Push Figure 4-36. Cutter Solenoid Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 177 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.5 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Remove one screw (CPP M3×6), two screws (CP(W): M3×6) and one screw (M3×16) securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3), and remove the CR Board Guide.(See Figure 4-30) 6. Disconnect the connector (5-pin, white) for the CR Encoder Sensor from the CR Board. C A U T IO N Connector If you can not disconnect easily the connector for the CR Encoder Sensor, do not disconnect it by undue force. Disconnect the two FFCs for the print head first and then the connector for the CR Encoder Sensor. CR Board Unit Figure 4-37. CR Encoder Sensor Removal 1/2 7. 8. Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out the CR Board Unit toward the front. (See Figure 4-37) Screw (M3×8) Ground line Toothed washer (M3) Remove one screw (CPP: M3×8) securing the CR_ENC ASSY, ground line, and washer (M3). Then remove the CR_ENC ASSY. (See Figure 4-38) A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D After assembling the CR ENC, the following adjustments should be made. „ “5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)” CR_ENC ASSY Ground line Figure 4-38. CR Encoder Sensor Removal 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 178 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.6 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Remove one screw (CPP M3×6), two screws (CP(W): M3×6) and one screw (M3×16) securing the CR Board Guide, and also the ground line and the toothed washer (M3), and remove the CR Board Guide. (See Figure 4-30) 6. Disconnect the connector (4-pin, black) for the P_EDGE Sensor from the CR Board. C A U T IO N If you can not disconnect easily the connector for the P_EDGE Sensor, do not disconnect it by undue force. Disconnect the two FFCs for the print head first and then the connector for the P_EDGE Sensor. Screws ×2 Connector CR Board Unit 7. Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out the CR Board Unit toward the front. (See Figure 4-39) 8. Remove the one screw (M3×6) securing the EDGE Sensor Base ASSY and remove the EDGE Sensor Base ASSY. (See Figure 4-40) Figure 4-39. Removing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY 1/2 After installing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY on the Cutter Holder ASSY, fasten the harness to the harness holding path of the Cutter Holder ASSY. (See Figure 4-40) Lead the lead wires in this groove. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D After replacing the P_EDGE Sensor, the following adjustment operation should be performed. „ “P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)” P_EDGE Sensor Base Figure 4-40. Removing the P_EDGE Sensor ASSY 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 179 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.7 CR Motor ASSY This section describes the replacement procedure for the following parts of the CR Motor ASSY. „ CR Timing Belt „ Driven Pulley (Stylus Pro 7600: white / Stylus Pro 9600: black) Before installing the covers, adjust the indicator position (the right end of the projection on the CR tension spring support) of the CR tension bracket to the center by turning the CR Tension Mounting Shaft. However, if the indicator was at a off-center position before assembly, adjust the indicator to the same off-center position. (See Figure 4-42) 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Release the carriage lock and move the carriage from the capping position. (See Figure 4-24) 6. On the R Side Frame side, remove the CR Tension Mounting Shaft and CR Tension Spring and the CR Tension Spring Support. (See Figure 4-42) 7. Slide the CR Tension Bracket to the left (toward the CR Motor), and remove the CR Timing Belt, together with the Driven Pulley, from the CR Tension Bracket. Projection (CR tension spring support) Adjust the right end to the center Figure 4-41. Indicator Position Driven Pulley CR Tension Spring Support CR Tension Spring Remove the CR Tension Mounting Shaft Timing Belt Record scale reading CR Tension Bracket Figure 4-42. Loosening the CR Timing Belt Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 180 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 8. Loosen the CR Tension Mounting Shaft on the R Side Frame side, then release the tension on the CR Timing Belt. (See Figure 4-43) 9. Disconnect the connector of the CR Motor harness and the relay connector from the Main Board, unclamp the CR Motor harness and take them out through the hole in the Left Side Frame. CR Timing Belt Connector 10. Remove the timing belt from the CR Motor ASSY pulley on the L Side Frame. 11. Take out the four screws (CP(W): M4×10) holding the CR Motor ASSY, then remove the CR Motor ASSY. CR Motor ASSY „ Remember that there is a difference in specifications between the driven pulley (white) of Stylus Pro 7600 and the driven pulley (black) of Stylus Pro 9600. „ Set the timing belt of Stylus Pro 7600 on the CR Unit in a manner as shown below: CR Timing Belt Screws (CP(W): M4×10) ×4 Flat surface here Figure 4-43. Removing the CR Motor ASSY A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D CR Unit Once the belt tension has changed as a result of, say, removal of the CR Motor, make the following adjustment: „ “5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment” (p.214) „ Install the timing belt by adjusting the tension on the driven pulley side, with the CR Motor secured with the screws. Installing the timing belt by adjusting the tension on the CR Motor side could damage the PF Encoder Scale. „ Move the carriage by hand to the left and right and make sure that the CR Timing Belt is attached uniformly in the center of the pulley. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 181 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.8 HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY C A U T IO N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged. Screws (CP(W): M3×6) 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the Access Cover. (See Removing the Access Cover on page 167) 3. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position. (See Figure 4-24) 4. Disconnect the connector (CN29: red 4-pin) of the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY from the Main Board and take it out through the hole in the R Side Frame. 5. Remove the one (CP(W): M3×6) screw securing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY and remove the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY. (See Figure 4-44) 6. Release the harness for the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY from the five cable clamps on the Maintenance ASSY and CR Rail ASSY. (See Figure 4-45) HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY Figure 4-44. Removing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY Clamp Clamp Clamp Clamp Figure 4-45. Releasing the HEAD_SLIDE Sensor ASSY Harness Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 182 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.9 CR_HP Sensor ASSY C A U T IO N When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged. Clamp Clamp 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position. (See Figure 4-24) 3. Release the harness of the CR_HP Sensor ASSY from the four clamps on the printer body. (See Figure 4-46) 4. Pinch the two upper hooks of the CR_HP Sensor ASSY and disengage them from the holding plate, and disconnect the connector. (See Figure 4-47) Clamp Figure 4-46. Releasing the CR_HP Sensor ASSY Harness Hook CR_HP Sensor ASSY Figure 4-47. Removing the CR_HP Sensor Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 183 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.3.10 CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) C A U T IO N „ When unlocking the carriage, do not move the carriage by about 2 cm or more with the cutter pushed into the innermost position; otherwise, the cutter edge would be damaged. „ Take great care not to scratch the CR Encoder Scale. (If the CR Encoder Scale is scratched, the encoder sensor will output wrong signals, thus resulting in abnormal operation of the carriage or error occurrence.) 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Remove the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY. (p.178) 6. Disengage the CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) from the CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring on the L Side Frame side. 7. Remove the CR Encoder Scale from the CR Encoder Scale Holders. CR Encoder Scale CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring CR Encoder Scale Holder Figure 4-48. Releasing from the CR Encoder Scale Fastening Spring NOTE: The number of CR Encoder Scale Holders is as follows: Stylus Pro 7600: 2 guides Stylus Pro 9600: 3 guides 8. While pushing the cutter area gently, shift the carriage to the left about 2 cm to unlock the carriage and then move the carriage to the left from the capping position. (See Figure 4-24) 9. Disengage the CR Encoder Scale from the hook on the CR Encoder Scale Holder R and draw out the CR Encoder Scale from the carriage area. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D CR Encoder Scale CR Encoder Scale Holder R After assembling the CR ENC, the following adjustments should be made. „ “5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.215)” Figure 4-49. CR Encoder Scale Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Carriage (CR) Mechanism 184 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4 Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 4.4.1 PF Motor 1. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 2. Disconnect the one connector cable of the PF Motor ASSY and take it out through the hole in the L Side Frame. (See Figure 4-50) 3. Remove the four screws securing the PF Motor Mounting Plate. (See Figure 4-51) 4. Move the PF Motor toward the printer body and remove the PF Motor by lifting the gear side. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D After replacing the P_EDGE Sensor, the following adjustment operation should be performed. „ “PF Motor Adjustment (p.214)” Clamp Relay Connector Figure 4-50. Removing the PF Motor ASSY Harness Connector. PF Motor Mounting Plate securing screws x4 Figure 4-51. Removing the PF Motor. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 185 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4.2 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY 1. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 2. Disconnect the PF Encoder Sensor connector. 3. Remove the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor and remove the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D After installing the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY, make the following adjustment. „ “5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment (p.216)” Connector Screw PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Figure 4-52. Removing the PF Encoder Sensor. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 186 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4.3 Cautions when replacing the PF Loop Scale PF Loop Scale Base 4.4.3.1 Assembly Procedure for the PF Loop Scale ASSY When assembling the PF loop scale unit, the following exclusive tool should be used. „ Exclusive tool No.#F730 : FPF Loop Scale Assembly Base (Code: 1051765) Protective backing The assembly procedure is shown below. 1. Set the exclusive tool, #F730 as shown in the figure below, then set the PF loop scale base part with the double sided tape side facing up. 2. Peel the protective backing off the double sided tape to the PF loop scale base. 3. Affix the PF loop scale carefully to the PF loop scale base with the PF loop scale printed surface downward, aligning it precisely with the PF loop scale base. 4. Peel the protective backing off the other side of the double sided tape and affix the tape so that it is within the black circle on the unprinted side of the PF loop scale ASSY. C A U T IO N #F730 tool Figure 4-53. #F730 tool and PF Loop Scale Base „ Care should be taken so as not to damage the internal diameter Wrong direction Loop Scale set direction of the PF loop scale. „ There is no problem if the PF loop scale's affixing position on the PF loop scale base deviates somewhat. The important control point is that the inside diameter of the PF loop scale not be damaged. PF Loop Scale Base Exclusive #F730 tool Figure 4-54. PF Loop Scale Set Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 187 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4.3.2 PF Loop Scale ASSY Affixing Procedure Double sided tape When assembling the PF loop scale unit, the following exclusive tool should be used. „ Exclusive tool No.#F731 : PF Loop Scale Affixing tool (Code: 1051767) Protective backing The assembly procedure is given below. 1. Set the PF loop scale ASSY's double sided tape side on the grid roller side, align the internal diameter of the PF loop scale with the left end of the grid roller (PF roller) and set it lightly. C A U T IO N 2. At this point, the PF loop scale ASSY should not be fitted on the grid roller as far as it can go. If the PF loop scale ASSY is placed on the grid roller by hand, it could damage the PF loop scale ASSY's internal diameter and the distance from the center of the grid roller to the scale reading part would not be the same all around any more, resulting in a drop in the encoder sensor's reading accuracy. Figure 4-55. Affixing the Double Sided Tape to the PF Loop Scale Press the exclusive tool #F731 against the PF loop scale ASSY from the outside, then insert the grid roller in as far as the base plate carefully, and affix it. PF Loop Scale ASSY Exclusive #F731 tool Figure 4-56. Affixing the PF Loop Scale ASSY Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 188 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4.4 Suction Fans 1. Remove the Paper Guide L2. (p.168) 2. Remove the two screws (CP(W): M4×8) and one screw (CP(W): M4×40) securing the fan duct, and then remove the fan duct. 3. Disconnect the fan connector and harness. 4. Remove the one screw (CP(W): M4×8) securing the fan, and remove the fan. NOTE: The number of fans: Stylus Pro 7600: 2 Stylus Pro 9600: 3 C H E C K P O IN T When removing the right-side Suction Fan of Stylus Pro 7600, use a short Phillips screwdriver to avoid interference with the Maintenance Tank Holder. Figure 4-57. Suction Fan Mounting Position Screw (CP(W): M4×40) Fan Fan Duct Connector Screw (CP(W): M4×8) Screws (CP(W): M4×8) ×2 Figure 4-58. Suction Fan Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 189 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4.5 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY † P_THICK Sensor ASSY † P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY P_THICK Sensor ASSY 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Push the paper hold lever down to the rear. 6. Remove the harness from the connector of the P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor. 7. Remove the one (CUPS: M3×6) screw securing the sensor bracket and remove the bracket along with the both sensors. C H E C K P O IN T 8. Bring the Paper Set Lever into the release position and bring down the Detection Arm rearward. Screws (M4×8) ×2 Sensor bracket position is adjusted at the factory before shipment. When the sensor bracket is to be removed on the service site, you are advised to mark the mounting position before removal for easy adjustment at reassembly. Figure 4-59. P_THICK and P_THICK_0.3 Sensors Removal Unhook the sensor from the sensor bracket and remove the sensor. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D If you move the sensor bracket position, perform the necessary adjustment. „ Refer to “5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.215) Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 190 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Screws (M4×6) ×5 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166) 6. Disconnect the connector (CN27: black 4-pin) of the P_REAR Sensor ASSY from the Main Board. 7. Push the Paper Hold Lever down to the front. 8. Remove the lower two screws (CBS: M4×6) securing the Paper Guide U. (See Figure 4-60) 9. Remove the upper three screws (CBS: M4 × 6) (six screws for Stylus Pro 7600) securing the Paper Guide U and remove the Paper Guide U by pulling it up toward you slowly. C A U T IO N Paper Guide U When removing/installing the Paper Guide U, be careful not to mar the P_REAR Sensor ASSY with the edge of the sensor inspection window. P_REAR Sensor ASSY peeping window Figure 4-60. Removing the Paper Guide U Screws (M2×8) ×2 10. Remove the two (CP(W): M2×8) screws securing the P_REAR Sensor ASSY and remove the P_REAR Sensor ASSY. (See Figure 4-61) C H E C K P O IN T A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D The P_REAR Sensor ASSY position is adjusted at the factory before shipment. When the sensor bracket is to be removed on the service site, you are advised to mark the mounting position before removal for easy adjustment at reassembly. If you replace the P_REAR Sensor ASSY, perform the necessary adjustment. „ Refer to “5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.215) P-REAR Sensor ASSY Figure 4-61. Removing the P_REAR Sensor ASSY Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Paper Feed Mechanism 191 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.5 Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 4.5.1 C472_SUB-B Board 1. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 2. Disconnect the seven FFCs (ink cartridge) and the two FFCs (Main Board/ Maintenance Tank) on the C472_SUB-B Board found at the left side of I/H Frame. (See Figure 4-62) 3. Disconnect the connector of the Release Sensor (I/H Lever). 4. Remove the four screws (M3×6) and remove the C472_SUB-B Board. FFC (CSIC Relay Board) ×7 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) C A U T IO N When connecting an FFC, take great care not to insert it aslant. (Inserting aslant can cause a short circuit of signals, thus resulting in broken circuit elements.) FFC (Maintenance Tank) FFC (Main Board) Screws (M3×6) ×4 Figure 4-62. Disconnecting the C472_SUB-B Board Connectors Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 192 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.5.2 I/H (Ink Holder) ASSY There are a total of seven I/H assemblies installed, one for each ink color. Here, the procedure for removing one I/H ASSY will be explained. This section also describes the procedure for removing the following parts: Tube Cover „ Release Sensor (I/H Lever) „ CSIC Relay Board „ I/H Frame C A U T IO N You must execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing” in 5.2.3.20 Clean Head on page 256) before removal of the I/H ASSY and ink charging (“Initial charge” in 5.2.4 Cleaning on page 259) after reinstallation. If no ink tube is to be removed, there is no need of executing ink discharge. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D When removing and installing the front cover switch holder, the following adjustment should be made. „ Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216) 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 3. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 4. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 5. Disconnect the seven FFCs (ink cartridges), two FFCs (Main Board/Maintenance Tank) and the connector for the Release Sensor (I/H Lever) on the C472_SUB-B Board found at the left side of I/H Frame. (See Figure 4-62) 6. Remove two black screws (M3×8) securing the Ink Tube Cover and remove the cover. (See Figure 4-63) 7. Disconnect the connector of the Cover Sensor ASSY at the right side of the I/H Frame. (See Figure 4-64) 8. Remove one screw (CUPS: M3×6) and one screw (CUPS: M4×6) securing the I/H Frame on the right side. Black screws (M3×8) ×2 Figure 4-63. Ink Tube Cover Removal Connector of Cover Sensor ASSY Screw (CUPS: M3×6) Screw (CUPS: M4×6) Figure 4-64. I/H Frame Removal 1/2 Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 193 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 9. Revision A Remove one screw (CUPS: M3×6) and one screw (CUPS: M4×6) securing the I/H Frame on the left side. (See Figure 4-65) Screws (CUPS: M3×6) ×7 10. Remove seven screws (CUPS: M3×6) and two screws (CUPS: M4×6) securing the I/H Frame on the top. 11. Lift the I/H Frame and disconnect the connector of the Release Sensor (I/H Lever). (See Figure 4-66) 12. Remove the I/H Frame while paying attention to the connectors of the Cover Sensor and Release Sensor (I/H Lever). Screws (CUPS: M4×6) ×2 „ Before installing the I/H Frame, make certain that the gear of the I/H Lever is engaged with the gear of the Cartridge Lock Shaft and also that the Cover Sensor turns ON and OFF. Check gear engagement Screw (CUPS: M3×6) ×7 Screw (CUPS: M4×6) Figure 4-65. I/H Frame Removal 2/2 Check Release Sensor ON/OFF „ When installing the I/H Frame, make sure that the projections on the I/H ASSY are fitted in the seven holes in the top plate properly. If the I/H ASSY is not installed properly, the ink cartridges may not be recognized. Connector of Release ASSY Figure 4-66. Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Removal Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 194 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 13. Disengage the two hooks on the back of the relevant Ink Holder ASSY and draw out the CSIC Relay Board. (See Figure 4-67) If you push in the CSIC Relay Board as a whole unit, the CSIC Contact Spring will be deformed. Be sure to install the CSIC Relay Board by the following procedure: 1. Disassemble the Holder ASSY to the units as shown below. 2. Remove the CSIC Contact Spring. (2 hooks) 3. Install the CSIC Relay Board. 4. Hold and inset the CSIC Contact Spring with care not to deform it with the edge of the Relay Board. Hook CSIC Relay Board CSIC Contact Spring Coupling Figure 4-67. CSIC Relay Board Removal 5. Remove the screw in the joint connecting the Ink Holder ASSY and the pipe (M6), then remove the O-ring from its inside. 6. Take out the two screws (CPS: M3×12) holding the Ink Holder ASSY to the I/H Base, then remove the Ink Holder ASSY. (See Figure 4-68) When installing the ink tube to the Ink Holder ASSY, first make certain that there is the O-ring. Then insert the ink tube into the innermost position properly and tighten the coupling screw. Disassembly & Assembly Screws (CPS: M3×12) ×2 Figure 4-68. Ink Holder ASSY Removal Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 195 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 7. 8. Revision A Take out the two screws (CUPS: M3×6) holding the Needle Frame ASSY. (See Figure 4-69) Screw (M3×6) While disengaging the hook of the Needle Frame ASSY, slide the Ink Holder ASSY downward to separate the Needle Frame ASSY from the Ink Holder ASSY. (See Figure 4-70) Needle Frame ASSY Screw (M3×6) Figure 4-69. Disassembling the Ink Holder ASSY 1/2 Needle Frame ASSY Hook Figure 4-70. Disassembling the Ink Holder ASSY 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 196 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.5.3 Cover Sensor ASSY 1. Remove the L Side Cover. (p.163) 2. Remove the I/H Cover. (p.164) 3. Open the Front Cover. 4. Remove two screws (CPP: M3×8) securing the Ink Tube Cover and remove the cover. (See Figure 4-63) 5. Disconnect the harness connector of the Cover Sensor ASSY. 6. Pinch the right and left hooks of the Cover Sensor ASSY and remove the Cover Sensor ASSY. A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D Connector Cover Sensor ASSY Make sure that the Cover Switch Holder is so positioned that the Cover Sensor ASSY operates coupled with the opening/closing of the Front Cover. „ Refer to “5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment” (p.216) Figure 4-71. Removing the Cover Sensor ASSY Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Ink Supply Mechanism 197 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.6 Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism The Maintenance ASSY consists of the major assemblies listed below four of which constitute the Cleaning Unit. The life of the Cleaning Unit is judged by the life of the Pump Motor. Replace the Cap ASSY, Pump ASSY, Flushing Box and Wiper at the same time. Parts of the Cleaning Unit are available as individual parts so that each of those parts can be replaced singly. NOTE: For details, refer to “Table 6-1 Stylus Pro 7600/9600 - Lives of Periodically Replaced Components and Maintenance (p.277)”. Table 4-4. Major Parts of Cleaning Mechanism Names of Parts See Pump Motor ASSY Cleaning Unit * Replace at expiration of Pump Motor ASSY life A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D p.200 Pump/Cap ASSY Cap ASSY p.200 Pump ASSY p.201 Cleaner Head p.203 Flushing Box ASSY p.204 Once you have replaced the Cleaning Unit, be sure to execute CLEAR COUNTERS “Initialize cleaning unit (CLEANER) (p.71)” and CLEAR COUNTERS “Initialize flashing box (FL BOX) (p.71)” in Maintenance mode 2. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 198 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.6.1 Maintenance ASSY Removal C H E C K P O IN T 1. When you replace the Maintenance ASSY, ink can spill from the ink tube connected to the pump assembly. Disconnect the ink tubes carefully so that ink will not spill. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the Access Cover. (See Removing the Access Cover on page 167) 3. Disconnect the connector (CN17) of the Pump Motor ASSY. 4. At the rear of the printer body, remove the four screws securing the Maintenance ASSY, and remove the Maintenance ASSY from the printer body. (See Figure 4-72) Maintenance ASSY Screw x4 After installing the Maintenance ASSY, insert the waste ink tube (thin) of the Pump Motor ASSY into the waste ink tube (thick) of the Flushing Box ASSY to the depth using tweezers. Figure 4-72. Removing the Maintenance ASSY Cleaner Head (Wiper) (p.203) Pump ASSY Valve ASSY Waste ink tube (thin) Pump ASSY (p.201) Flushing Box ASSY Pump Motor ASSY (p.200) Cap ASSY (p.200) Waste ink tube Figure 4-73. Maintenance ASSY Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 199 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.6.2 Pump Motor ASSY Maintenance ASSY 1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199) 2. Remove the two (M3×8) screws securing the Pump Motor ASSY to the Maintenance ASSY and remove the Pump Motor ASSY. 4.6.3 Cap ASSY 1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199) 2. Disconnect the tube which connect the Valve ASSY to the Cap ASSY. 3. Remove the two screws securing the Cap ASSY and remove the Cap ASSY from the Maintenance ASSY. C A U T IO N Check for the points below when removing/mounting the Cap ASSY. „ Push the cap part down to the valve part and check that the cap part rebounds with spring force. „ Check that the valve part is not dislocated. Screws (M3×8) ×2 Pump Motor ASSY Figure 4-74. Removing the Pump Motor ASSY Valve ASSY Cap ASSY Figure 4-75. Removing the Cap ASSY Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 200 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.6.4 Pump ASSY Gear (3 parts) 1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199) 2. Remove the one central screw (M3×4) of the Pump ASSY and remove the three parts including the gear. (See Figure 4-76) 3. Remove the two screws (M3×6) on the gear side. 4. Disconnect the tube from the Cap ASSY, remove the one screw (M 3×6) and remove the Pump ASSY.(See Figure 4-77) A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D Screw (M3×4) Once you have replaced the Pump ASSY, execute “CLEAR COUNTERS” (See p.71). Screws (M3×6) ×2 Figure 4-76. Removing the Pump ASSY 1/2 Pump ASSY Screw (M3×6) Ink tube Figure 4-77. Removing the Pump ASSY 2/2 Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 201 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A „ When installing the Pump ASSY, make sure that the spring is set in the spring catch. Spring catch „ When installing the pump reduction gear, make sure that the gears are engaged properly. Cleaner Head The Cleaner Head must move when the gear turns about 20 times. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 202 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.6.5 Cleaner Head (Wiper) 1. Remove the Maintenance ASSY. (See p.199) 2. Using tweezers, disengage the dent of the Cleaner Head from the projection on the Cleaner Head Holder and pull off the Cleaner Head. Rubber side Cleaner Head C A U T IO N „ If you touch the Cleaner Head with a bare hand, the head nozzle can be stopped up with ink repelled by fat from your hand. For handling the Cleaner Head, be sure to use tweezers; never touch the Cleaner Head with your bare hand. „ Before use, clean the tweezers with cleaner. Felt side Install the Cleaner Head in such an orientation that its felt is positioned on the Pump ASSY side and the rubber in on the Cap ASSY side. Figure 4-78. Removing the Cleaner Head Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 203 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.6.6 Flushing Box ASSY Waste ink tube (thin) 1. Remove the R Side Cover. (p.160) 2. Remove the Paper Guide L2. (p.168) 3. From the printer body, pull off carefully the waste ink tube (thick) which connects the Flushing Box ASSY to the Maintenance Tank. 4. Remove the one (CUPS: M3×6) screw securing the Flushing Box ASSY. 5. Take out the Flushing Box, while pulling off carefully the waste ink tube (thin) coming from the Pump ASSY. 6. Remove the Flushing Box ASSY. Screw (CUPS: M3×6) After installing the Flushing Box ASSY, make certain by removing the Paper Guide L2 that the waste ink tube (thick) is set securely on the tube joint of the Maintenance Cartridge Holder. Waste ink tube Flushing Box ASSY Waste ink tube (thick) Figure 4-79. Removing the Flushing Box ASSY C H E C K P O IN T Take off the ink tube (thick/thin) carefully so that ink will not spill from the ink tube. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Cleaning Mechanism 204 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.7 Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards This section describes the procedures for removing the Power Supply Board, Main Board (C472MAIN) and AC Inlet. Screws (CPS: M4×8) ×8 4.7.1 Power Supply Board C A U T IO N Unplug the AC power cable and wait at least five minutes before removing the Power Supply Board to make sure there is no residual power left in the board's capacitors. 1. Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166) 2. Disconnect the following connectors from the Power Supply Board: Table 4-5. Connectors on Power Supply Board Connector No. 3. Pins Color Connection CN301 Notes CN001 3 White AC inlet Lock type CN301 12 White C472MAIN Lock type Remove the eight screws (CPS: M4×8) securing the Power Supply Board, and then remove the Power Supply Board. Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards CN001 Figure 4-80. Power Supply Board Removal 205 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.7.2 AC Inlet C A U T IO N Unplug the AC power cable and wait at least five minutes before removing the Power supply Board to make sure there is no residual power left in the board's capacitors. 1. Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166) 2. Disconnect CN001 from the Power Supply Board. (See Figure 4-81) 3. Remove the one screw (M4×8) and toothed washer (M4) fastening the AC Inlet Ground Cable. 4. Push the hooks (one top and two bottom hooks) and remove the AC Inlet from the holder. (See Figure 4-82) Screw (M4×8), toothed washer CN001 Install the AC Inlet in such an orientation that the ground cable side is positioned up. Up: Ground cable Ground cable AC Inlet Holder Figure 4-81. Removing the AC Inlet Holder AC Inlet Holder Hook ×1 AC Inlet Hooks ×2 Figure 4-82. Removing the AC Inlet Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 206 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.7.3 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) C A U T IO N Screws (CP(W): M3×6) × 9 When disconnecting or connecting the connector for an FFC cable on the Main Board, never pull or push the connector aslant. Disconnecting or connecting the connector can cause damage to, short circuit or breakage of the terminals inside the connector, thus resulting in damage to elements on the circuit board. 1. Remove the Rear Cover. (p.166) 2. Disconnect all the harness connectors from the Main Board. 3. Remove the two screws (CP(W): M3×6) securing the both ends of the parallel interface connector to the Main Board and seven other screws (CP(W): M3×6), and remove Main Board. Refer to the table on the next page for connections of connectors. The following connectors are not used: CN4, CN7, CN12, CN18, CN25, CN28, CN33, CN36, CN37 A D J U S T M E N T R E Q U IR E D Figure 4-83. C472MAIN Board Removal Before and after replacing the Main Board with a new one, make the following adjustment: Refer to “5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment” (p.213) Figure 4-84. Harness Clamp Locations Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 207 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Main Board Connector List CN.No. Pins Color Remarks CN1 12 P/S board Lock type CN2 16 PANEL FFC, lock type CN3 36 H-UDI36 CN4 5 CN5 90 CN6 21 CN7 5 CN8 CN9 White Connection Yellow D/A_OUT (Not used) ROM_DIMM CSIC FFC S_I/O(DEBUGER) (Not used) 24 CR_FFC1 FFC, lock type 24 CR_FFC3 FFC, lock type FFC, lock type Red CN10 24 CR_FFC2 CN11 36 IEEE1284 (parallel port) (Not used) CN12 4 USB CN13 36 TYPE_B CN14 3 White CR_MOT Lock type, with relay connector CN15 2 White PF_MOT Lock type, with relay connector CN16 5 White PF_ENC CN17 4 White PUMP_MOT With relay connector CN18 2 Blue P/S_FAN CN19 2 Black FAN1 With relay connector Yellow FAN2 With relay connector CN20 2 CN21 2 Red FAN3 Blue P_THICK0.3 CN22 3 CN23 3 Yellow COVER_L CN24 3 White CR_ORG CN25 3 Black I/H_LEVER CN26 3 Red CN27 4 Black P_REAR CN28 4 Yellow P_FRONT CN29 4 Red HD_SLID CN30 15 Figure 4-85. Connector Locations * Stylus Pro 9600 only (Not used) P_THICK ROLL_UNIT (option unit) CN31 2 White H_FAN CN33 3 White RESET (Not used) * Stylus Pro 9600 only CN35 4 USB2.0 Right side (AC side) CN36 8 IEEE1394 (Not used) CN37 2 HDD_PS (Not used) Disassembly & Assembly Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 208 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 4.7.4 DIP Switch and Jumper Setting at Factory before Shipment C A U T IO N Do not change the DIP Switches and Jumpers on the Main Board from their positions which were set at the factory before shipment. Changing their setting can result in malfunctions. † Jumpers (J5 / J6 / J7) Table 4-7. Jumper Setting at Factory at Shipment Jumper Setting at Factory JP5 Open Boot select Open: Normal boot Short: Flash ROM JP6 Short DA1_Select Open: Debug mode Short: Normal mode JP7 Short DA0_Select Open: Debug mode Short: Normal mode † DIP Switches (SWD600) Function D Description Table 4-6. DIP Switch Setting at Factory at Shipment SW Setting at Factory Function Frequency Dispersion Setting (CPU/SDRAM characteristics) Clock Frequency Setting SW4-5 : CPU/SDRAM - USB ON-ON : 133.3MHz - 48MHz OFF-ON : 100MHz - 48MHz ON-OFF : 66.6MHz - 48MHz OFF-OFF: 50MHz - 48MHz 1 ON 2 OFF 3 ON 4 OFF 5 OFF 6 OFF Main board Revision Setting (MAINREV0) 7 OFF Main board Revision Setting (MAINREV1) 8 OFF Main board Revision Setting (MAINREV2) Disassembly & Assembly Description SW1-2-3 ON-ON-ON : -0.5% ON-OFF-ON : -1.0% ON-ON-OFF : -2.5% ON-OFF-OFF : -3.75% Disassembly and Assembly of Circuit Boards 209 5 CHAPTER ADJUSTMENT EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1 Overview Table 5-1. Adjustment Tools (continued) Name This section describes the adjustment procedures necessary after replacing certain parts and explains how to perform those adjustment procedures. Epson or commercially available paper (Doubleweight Matte Paper roll) • MCSP24R4 (24-inch width) • MCSP44R4 (44-inch width) For printer mechanism adjustments and test printing. A3Tracing Paper #F751 1057723 Used for adjustment of the paper status detection sensor (P_REAR) level adjustment. Microtrace #300 LMB, made by Kimoto A3 Copy Paper (PPC) Commercially available product (Example: Fuji Xerox Bright Recycled) Used for adjustment of the paper status detection sensor (P_EDGE) level adjustment. Scale 1000mm #F713 1047746 / A commercially available scale can be purchased. Length:1000mm Scale Stopper #F714 1047745 / A commercially available scale can be purchased. Used in combination with the #F713 (measurements in 0.1 mm units) CR ENC sensor positioning jig #F799 1212926 Cutter Positioning Jig #F800 1212928 PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F798 1212925 Before beginning the adjustment operation, be sure to confirm the following caution items. „ If you are carrying out adjustments, see “5.1.4 Adjustment Items” (p.212) and then confirm the relevant adjustment items and adjustment procedures. „ When carrying out adjustments, check the cautions displayed in the explanation for each adjustment item thoroughly. If the operation is performed wrong, it could hinder the product's operation or functions. 5.1.2 Adjustment Tools C H E C K P O IN T In adjustments and test printing, use Doubleweight Matte Paper roll, unless otherwise specified. Table below lists the tools necessary for adjustments of Stylus Pro 7600/9600. Table 5-1. Adjustment Tools Name Part Code Notes Tension Gauge #F770 1060744 / standard tool acceptable 2.2kgf ± 220g (PF Belt tension) Thickness gauge Commercially available Thickness: 0.3 / 0.4 / 0.8 / 0.9 mm Coupling tightening jig Adjustment Tightening force: 3kgf + 500g Notes 24/44-inch Width Roll Paper 5.1.1 Cautions C A U T IO N Part Code Ink Cartridge (x7)* Spare Draining cartridge* Use at black ink type change Maintenance Tank* Spare Note "*": Use at adjustments which require test printing. Overview 211 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.3 Procedure for Adjustment Work 5.1.4.1 Print Head Adjustment Follow the specified steps by consulting “5.2 Self-diagnostic Function” (p.220) and “5.3 Mechanism Adjustment” (p.263) for adjustment items of each unit/part. Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Print Head (p.171) has been replaced. Each Repair Item in “5.1.4 Adjustment Items” C H E C K P O IN T “5.2 Self-diagnostic Function” When replacing the print head with a new one, execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing” on page 256) beforehand. “5.3 Mechanism Adjustment” “5.1.5 Parameter Backup”, “5.3.9 USB ID Writing”, “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2”, etc. † Adjustment items (steps): Table 5-3. Required Adjustment Items (Print Head) 5.1.4 Adjustment Items Step Table 5-2 below indicates the parts replacement repair items for Stylus Pro 7600/9600 which requires adjustments. For actually performed part replacements, and disassembly and reassembly operations, the specified adjustment items should be performed in the sequence shown in the instructions. 1 Table 5-2. Adjustment Items Repair Item (Page for Disassembly and Assembly) Adjustment Item See Clear the counter (Maintenance Mode2) (Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed] → Power ON) “HEAD” p.70 (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) p.220 See for Adjustment 2 Head Rank Input (including initial filling) p.233 Print Head (p.171) p.212 3 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237 MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207) p.213 4 Head Slant Checking p.246 CR Motor ASSY (p.180) p.214 5 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) p.248 PF Motor (p.185) p.214 p.252 P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179) p.215 6 7 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking Sensor Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) p.253 P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191) p.215 8 Test Pattern Printing p.255 P_THICK Sensor/P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190) p.215 9 Leak check pattern printing p.259 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178) p.215 Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197) p.216 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186) p.216 Cutter Solenoid (p.177) p.217 Paper Guide L2 (p.168) Damper ASSY (p.173) p.217 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) (p.193) p.217 Adjustment Overview 212 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.4.2 Main Board Adjustment Table 5-4. Required Adjustment Items (Main Circuit) (continued) Procedure Procedure A*1 B*2 Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the MAIN Board (C472 MAIN) (p.207) has been replaced. 11 † Adjusting tools: „ A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB) „ A3 Copy Paper (PPC) „ Scale 1000mm #F713 „ Scale Stopper #F714 3 † Work operations before adjustment: „ Parameter Backup (p.218) „ Firmware Reinstallation (p.219) † Adjustment items (steps): See Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) p.248 12 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking p.252 13 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) p.253 14 USB ID Input p.273 15 RTC writing initialization p.71 16 Power Cleaning p.259 17 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237 18 Test Pattern Printing p.255 Note "*1": Adjustment procedure when parameter backup has been executed "*2": Adjustment procedure when parameter backup can not be executed When “Parameter Backup” has been executed, make the adjustment by Procedure A in Table 5-4 below; there is no need of following Procedure B. C H E C K P O IN T Adjustment Item † Work operations after adjustment: „ Replacing the maintenance tank and resetting the maintenance tank life counter 1. Replace the maintenance tank with a new one. 2. Start Maintenance Mode 2. Table 5-4. Required Adjustment Items (Main Circuit) Procedure Procedure A*1 B*2 Adjustment Item (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇] +[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) See p.220 1 1 Rear Sensor AD Adjustment p.231 2 2 Edge Sensor AD Adjustment p.232 3 Initial Charge Flag Clear p.257 4 Head Rank ID Checking – 5 Head Rank Input p.233 6 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237 7 Head Slant Checking p.246 8 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239 9 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment p.243 10 Platen Position Adjustment (Flash Point Adjustment) Adjustment (Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed] → Power ON) 3. Clear the counter. (“CLEAR COUNTERS”→“MAINTE. TANK”) NOTE: For details, refer to “1.4.5 Maintenance Mode 2” (p.70). p.244 Overview 213 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.4.3 CR Motor Adjustment 5.1.4.4 PF Motor Adjustment Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the CR Motor ASSY (p.180) has been replaced. Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the PF Motor (p.185) has been replaced. † Adjusting tools: „ No special tools are required. † Adjusting tools: „ Tension gauge (for 4,000g) „ PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F798 „ Scale 1000mm #F713 „ Scale Stopper #F714 † Adjustment items (steps): Table 5-5. Required Adjustment Items (CR Motor Replacement) Step Adjustment Item 1 Clear the counter (Maintenance Mode2) (Power OFF →[Paper Source]+[Eject]+[Paper Feed] → Power ON) “CR MOTOR” See † Adjustment items (steps): p.70 Table 5-6. Required Adjustment Items (PF Motor Replacement) Step 2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) p.220 p.248 4 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking p.252 5 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) p.253 6 Test Pattern Printing p.255 Adjustment See p.263 3 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) Adjustment Item 1 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment p.264 2 PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment p.272 (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) Overview p.220 3 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239 4 Test Pattern Printing p.255 214 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.4.5 P_EDGE Sensor ASSY Adjustment 5.1.4.7 P_THICK/P_THICK_0.3 Sensor ASSY Adjustment Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_EGDE Sensor ASSY (p.179) has been replaced. Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_THICK Sensor/ P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190) has been replaced. † Adjusting tools: „ A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB) „ A3 copying paper (PPC) „ Scale 1000mm #F713 „ Scale Stopper #F714 † Adjusting tools: „ Thickness gauge (0.3/ 0.4, 0.8/ 0.9mm) † Adjustment items (steps): Table 5-9. Required Adjustment Items † Adjustment items (steps): Step (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) Table 5-7. Required Adjustment Items Step Adjustment Item (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) See 1 Testing will be executed by “Sensor” (Test menu) → “Paper” p.220 1 P_Edge Sensor AD Adjustment p.232 2 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239 Adjustment Item See p.220 p.224 5.1.4.8 CR Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178) has been replaced. 5.1.4.6 P_REAR Sensor ASSY Adjustment Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the P_REAR Sensor ASSY (p.191) has been replaced. † Adjusting tools: „ CR ENC sensor positioning jig #F799 † Adjustment items (steps): † Adjusting tools: „ A3Tracing Paper #F751(Microtrace #300 LMB) Table 5-10. Required Adjustment Items Step † Adjustment items (steps): Adjustment Item See 1 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment Table 5-8. Required Adjustment Items Step Adjustment Item (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) See p.220 1 P_Rear Sensor AD Adjustment p.231 2 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment p.243 Adjustment p.268 Overview 215 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.4.9 Cover Sensor ASSY Adjustment 5.1.4.10 PF Encoder Sensor ASSY Adjustment Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Cover Sensor ASSY (p.197) has been replaced. Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the PF Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.186) has been replaced. † Adjustment items (steps): † Adjusting tools: „ PF ENC sensor positioning tool #F764 „ Cutter Positioning Jig #F800 „ Scale 1000mm #F713 „ Scale Stopper #F714 Table 5-11. Required Adjustment Items Step Adjustment Item See 1 Sensor position adjustment * (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) 2 Testing will be executed by "Sensor" (Test menu) → “Cover” p.267 † Adjustment items (steps): p.220 Table 5-12. Required Adjustment Items Step p.224 See Note "*": The gap is acceptable, if it does not permit entrance of your finger when the Front Cover is opened and “COVER OPEN” is displayed. Adjustment Adjustment Item Overview 1 PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) p.272 p.220 2 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239 3 Rear Sensor Position Adjustment p.243 216 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.4.11 Cutter Solenoid ASSY or Paper Guide L Adjustment 5.1.4.12 Damper ASSY Adjustment Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Cutter Solenoid (p.177) has been replaced or the Paper Guide L has been reinstalled. Described below are the adjustment items to be made once the Damper ASSY (p.173) has been replaced. † Adjusting tools: „ Cutter Positioning Jig #F800 „ Scale 1000mm #F713 „ Scale Stopper #F714 C H E C K P O IN T † Adjustment items (steps): „ Execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) before removing the Damper ASSY. Refer to “5.2.3.20 Clean Head (p.256)”. „ Secure the coupling screw and the ink tube by tightening at the specified torque. (2 ∼ 2.5 kg/f) Table 5-13. Required Adjustment Items Step Adjustment Item See † Adjustment items (steps): 1 Cutter Positioning Adjustment p.269 2 Checking for Proper Cutting and Cutter Position p.271 (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) Table 5-14. Required Adjustment Items (Damper ASSY) Step p.220 1 3 Checking for Proper Cutting Pressure 4 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment p.239 Adjustment Item See (Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON) p.220 Including initial filling p.259 2 Head Nozzle Checking (Cleaning) p.237 3 Leak check pattern printing p.259 4 Test Pattern Printing p.255 5.1.4.13 Release Sensor (I/H Lever) Adjustment No adjustment is required 5.1.4.14 Battery No adjustment is required. Execute “Initialize RTC (p.83)”. Adjustment Overview 217 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.5 Parameter Backup EXECUTION OF PARAMETER BACKUP 5.1.5.1 Parameter Backup Procedure 1. † Required tools: „ Flash ROM-DIMM: Remove the Access Cover at the rear of Stylus Pro 7600/9600 and set the prepared ROM-DIMM in the ROM-DIMM slot on the Main Board. 2. Turn on the power to the Stylus Pro 7600/9600, and the LCD on the control panel will display “Write:F->M Push:M->F”. 3. Upon passage of 5 seconds without pressing any button on the control panel, parameter backup will automatically be executed. (The contents of NVRAM (“F”) on the Main Board will be copied onto ROM-DIMM (“M”).) 4. Backup is completed when the LCD on the control panel changes as “Flash->ROMDIMM” → “End [Success]”. 5. Turn off the power to Stylus Pro 7600/9600 and take the ROM-DIMM out of the slot on the Main Board. C309PROG Board (Part code: 2076654-01) „ Parameter backup utility: PBU16.RCC „ PC and parallel cable „ EPSON page printer: AcuLaser C8600 5.1.5.2 Work Procedure PREPARATION 1. Prepare the EPSON page printer as specified above. (AcuLaser C8600) 2. Install the flash ROM-DIMM in the optional ROM-DIMM slot (slot “A”) on the Main Board of the page printer. 3. Connect the parallel cable from the PC to the parallel port of the page printer. 4. Turn on the power to the page printer while holding down the following buttons on the control panel of the page printer: [Job Cancel] + [Up] + [Down] 5. When the LCD on the control panel of the page printer changes as “ROM A Erasing” → “ROM A Format error”, send the parameter backup utility file (PBU16.RCC) from the PC. 6. Transfer of the utility file is completed when the LCD on the control panel of the page printer changes as “ROM A Writing” → “ROM A Format error”. Then the ROMDIMM can be used for parameter backup work. Adjustment 5.1.5.3 Others If you would like to prepare two or more ROM-DIMMs of the same contents as those of the ROM-DIMM prepared at “PREPARATION” above, follow the following procedure for efficient work: 1. Prepare the EPSON page printer AcuLaser C8600. 2. Install the flash ROM-DIMMs in the optional ROM-DIMM slots on the Main Board of the page printer as follows: Slot “A” = Blank flash ROM-DIMM (for writing) Slot “B” = Master ROM-DIMM (the one on which the parameter backup file was written at “PREPARATION”) 3. Turn on the power to the page printer while holding down the following buttons on the control panel of the page printer: [Start/Stop] + [Job Cancel] + [Enter] 4. When the LCD on the control panel has displayed “ROM Copy Mode”, press the [Enter] button on the panel. 5. Copy processing is executed and completed when the display has changed as “ROM A Erasing” → “ROM B>A Copying” → “ROM B>A Copying End”. 6. Turn off the power to the page printer and take the ROM-DIMMs out of the slots. Overview 218 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.1.6 Firmware Reinstallation 5.1.6.1 Firmware Installation through ROM-DIMM In Stylus Pro 7600/9600, the firmware is written in the Flash ROM on the Main Board. When the Main Board has been replaced with a new one, write the firmware in the Flash ROM on the new Main Board by the procedure described below. Install the firmware through a ROM-DIMM by the following procedure: C A U T IO N „ Immediately after reloading firmware to the new MAIN board without any parameters existing on it, when the printer's power is turned on, the ink initial refilling operation starts. If initial refilling is not necessary, be sure to start the printer by the following procedure. 1. Start the Self-diagnostic function when the power is turned On. 2. Select “Parameter: Update” under “Check: Parameter”. 3. Select “Update:I nkParameter”. 4. Select “Reset” in “Init. Fill”. 5. Turn the printer’s power switch Off, then turn it On again. „ The correct firmware data file should be used to match the download method. 1. Check the firmware version. ([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU”→ “VIRSION”) 2. Write the firmware file in the RCC format in a ROM-DIMM (C309 PROG). 3. Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the printer body. 4. Remove the cover at the rear of the printer body and insert the ROM-DIMM prepared at step 1 into the dedicated socket. 5. Turn on the power to the printer body. 6. The firmware will be installed automatically and installation will be completed. 7. Turn off the power switch and disconnect the power cable from the printer body. 8. Pull the ROM-DIMM out of the dedicated socket. 9. Turn on the power to the printer body and check the firmware version. 5.1.6.2 Firmware Installation through Interface This section describes the procedure for firmware installation through the parallel interface, as an example. C H E C K P O IN T Adjustment Set the parallel interface in the compatibility mode. 1. Connect the host PC to the printer with the parallel cable. 2. Turn on the power to the printer body. 3. Check the firmware version. ([SelecType] key → “PRINTER STATUS MENU”→ “VIRSION”) 4. Make certain that the panel display of the printer body shows “READY”. 5. Transmit the firmware file in the IPL format from the host PC to the printer. 6. Firmware installation is completed. 7. Turn off the power to the printer once and then turn it on again. Overview 219 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2 Self-diagnostic Function 5.2.1.2 Functions of Keys during Self-diagnosis Described below are the functions of panel keys in the self-diagnostic mode: C A U T IO N „ With this function, all the processing except for some items are executed on the assumption that roll paper is used. Take care, since even sheets, if loaded, are handled as roll paper. „ During execution of this function, detection of remaining volume in ink cartridges and Maintenance Tank is not performed. Therefore, when you execute this function for print head replacement or any other work which requires consumption or discharge of a large volume of ink, check the remaining volume in ink cartridges and Maintenance Tank beforehand. (If you neglect this checking, the capacity of the Maintenance Tank can be exceeded so that ink may flow out; never forget to perform this checking.) 5.2.1 Overview Table 5-15. Key Functions in Self-diagnostic Mode Normal Mode Self-diagnostic Mode Functions Pause Previous Level Returns the setting item to the previous level of the menu hierarchy. SelecType Setting Item (Next) Lowers the level in the menu hierarchy by one. Paper Source (Items) Setting Item (Previous) Enhances the level in the menu hierarchy by one. Paper Feed ∆ Setting Value + Changes the menu in the upward direction. Setting value + Paper Feed ∇ Setting Value – Changes the menu in the downward direction. Setting value – Cut / Eject (Enter) Enter Sets the setting value. Cleaning Paper Feed & Cut † If it is pressed, the paper is fed, and when it is Self-diagnosis is chiefly intended to determine the parameters for mechanism adjustment and firm adjustment. released, the paper is cut. † Moves the cursor. (only for specific items) This function is incorporated in the printer firmware. It is enabled when the power to the printer is turned on while pressing the specific panel keys. NOTE: The printer can not be shifted from the normal mode to the selfdiagnostic mode. 5.2.1.1 How to Start Self-diagnostic Function The key operation to start the self-diagnostic function is as follows: 1. Power is off. 2. Press “Paper Feed ∆” + “Paper Feed ∇” + “Cut / Eject”. 3. Turn the power on. 4. The self-diagnostic menu is displayed. 5. Turn the power off to close the self-diagnostic function. Adjustment Figure 5-1. Panel Function in Self-diagnostic Mode Self-diagnostic Function 220 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.1.3 Top Menu The following diagnostic items are available in the self-diagnostic mode. This section describes the diagnostic items available and transition in the top menu. Table 5-16. Self-diagnostic Function List Item Test Adjustment [Paper Feed ∆] Description Check: Version, Control Panel, Sensor, Encoder, Fan, Record, CSIC, Actuator, Actuator 2 [Paper Feed ∇] [SelecType] Test? [Paper Feed ∆] Check: Head system adjustment, sensor position adjustment, paper feed compensation, cutter adjustment [Paper Feed ∇] Cleaning Cleaning with mode specified Print Test pattern printing, adjustment variables printing Parameter* NVRAM initialization, updating, display Life * Carriage motor, paper feed motor, CR+PF motor, cutter, head up and down, head lock, cleaning, printing, comprehensive endurance, CR+PF+ discharging, comprehensive endurance 2, comprehensive endurance 3, checking To each menu [Pause] [Items] Adjustment? [Paper Feed ∆] Check: [Paper Feed ∇] Note "*": This diagnostic item is not explained, since it is used only by testing at the factory, not executed on the service site. Cleaning? [Paper Feed ∆] Check: [Paper Feed ∇] Print? [Paper Feed ∆] Check: [Paper Feed ∇] Parameter? [Paper Feed ∆] Check: Life? [Paper Feed ∇] Figure 5-2. Top Menu Transition Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 221 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.2 Test “Test” is intended to check the circuit boards. [Paper Feed ∆] Test: Table 5-17. Circuit Board Check Items Item Description See Version Program, Backup parameters, DIP switch, Panel review p.223 Control Panel Keys, LCD, LEDs p.223 Sensors CR origin, Covers, Paper thickness, Levers, Cartridge presence, Ink lever, Edge AD, Rear AD, Head thermistor, Driver thermistor, Take-up Reel Unit, Maintenance tank p.224 [SelecType] [Paper Feed ∇] Version? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] To each menu [Pause] [Items] Panel? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] Encoder CR_ENC (carriage), PF_ENC (paper feed) p.225 Fan Paper suction fan (all operation), Paper suction fan (individual operations), Head driver heat sink cooling fan p.225 Record Maintenance, Major faults p.226 Sensor? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] Encoder? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: CSIC CSIC information display p.227 Actuator Cutter p.229 Actuator 2 Cutter solenoid, Pump motor p.229 Note "*": This diagnostic item is not explained, since it is used only by testing at the factory, not executed on the service site. [Paper Feed ∇] Fan? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] Elec.? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] D/A Revision? * Not used [Paper Feed ∆] Head Signal? * Not used [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] CSIC? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: [Paper Feed ∇] Actuator? [Paper Feed ∆] Test: Actuator 2? [Paper Feed ∇] Figure 5-3. Inspection Menu Transition Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 222 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.2.1 Version Check the firmware version and the DIP switch (ON: 0, OFF: 1). When this item is selected, the contents is shown on the panel one by one. (See Figure 5-4) Ver: ? F/W Firmware version display is as follows: ∗∗∗∗∗∗ Ver: ? Param 1 BWddym BNddym 01 Ver: ? Param 2 „ Description BW: Stylus Pro 9600 BN: Stylus Pro 7600 dd: 2-digit decimal number representing the day of release y: Decimal number representing the units digit of the year of release m: 1-digit hexadecimal number representing the month of release „ Example The firmware version released on July 5, 2000 is: • BW0507 (Stylus Pro 9600) • BN0507 (Stylus Pro 7600) • • • • • 01 Ver: ? DipSW 0x00 Ver: ? Panel Rev 01 Figure 5-4. Menu Transition of Version Display 5.2.2.2 Control Panel Check the keys, LCD and LEDs on the control panel. (See Figure 5-5) [SelecType] Panel: „ In the panel key check, the panel displays the name of a pushed key. „ Press the Pause key two times to complete the panel key check. „ In the LED check, the Operate, Pause, Ink Out K, LK, C, M, LC, LM, Y, Paper Out, Auto Cut, Cutter OFF, Sheet, and Maintenance Tank LEDs are lighted up in the order named. At the same time, the LCD shows the name of the LED which is currently lit. ? Key ? [SelecType] Panel: ? LCD ? [Pause] [SelecType] Panel: ? [Pause] x2 LED ? [Pause] [Items] Panel: ? Key ???? †††††††††††††††††† †††††††††††††††††† Panel: ? LED Power Figure 5-5. Menu Transition of Panel Test Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 223 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.2.3 Sensors Sensor status is displayed on the panel. † The numerals shown at the item “Paper” means that the paper thickness is as follows: „ „ „ „ 00 01 11 10 : 0.3 mm or below in paper thickness : 0.4 mm ~ 0.8 mm in paper thickness : 0.9 mm or more in paper thickness : The lever is in the up position. NOTE: When adjustment is required, see “5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment (p.231)”. † “INK NOT” indicates the absence of color ink cartridges. Each symbol displayed signifies that the corresponding color ink cartridge is absent. † For Edge AD and Rear AD, the value shown around the center represents the ONOFF difference and the value shown at right represents the ON level. The standard for accepting each AD value is as follows: „ Rear AD: 40 or more in ON-OFF difference and 95 or less in ON level „ Edge AD: 40 or more in ON-OFF difference and E0 ~ E8 in ON level NOTE 1: For adjustment procedure, see “5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment (p.232)” and “5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment (p.231)”. 2: With Stylus Pro 7600, the item “TAKE UP” is not displayed. Sen: ? CR Origin On Sen: ? Cover Close Sen: ? Paper 00 Sen: ? Lever Down Sen: ? HeadSlide Sen: ?INK NOT On KkCMcmY Sen: ? InkLever Down Sen: ? Edge AD 04A 0E2 Sen: ? Front AD 041 068 Sen: ? Rear AD 041 068 Sen: ? Head Temp 25°C Sen: ? Drv. Temp 25°C Sen: ? TAKE UP Off Sen: ? MainteTank On * Not used Figure 5-6. Menu Transition of Sensor Test Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 224 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.2.4 Encoder The encoder values for CR shaft (carriage) and PF (form feed) are displayed on the panel. (See Figure 5-7) Encoder: ? CR 0000 „ The value displayed represents the encoder pulse count. Encoder: ? PF FFFF 5.2.2.5 Fan Figure 5-7. Menu Transition of Encoder Test Check to see if each fan operates. (See Figure 5-8) NOTE: With Stylus Pro 7600, the item “Paper 3" (paper suction fan) is not displayed. [Enter] Fan: ? Paper 123 [Enter] Fan: ? Paper 1 Paper 2 Paper 123 [Pause] * 3:Stylus Pro 9600 only [Enter] Fan: ? [Pause] [Enter] Fan: ? [Pause] [Enter] Fan: ? [Pause] Head Drv. [Pause] Fan: [Pause] End Fan: [Pause] End Fan: [Pause] End Fan: [Pause] End Fan: [Pause] End Figure 5-8. Menu Transition of Fan Test Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 225 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.2.6 Record Check the record of maintenance of major faults. Record: The figure at right shows the menu of record. (See Figure 5-9) ? Maintenance? Record: ? MAINTENANCE RECORD “Record: Maintenance” displays the record of maintenance. (See Figure 5-10) Error ? Figure 5-9. Menu Transition of Record Table 5-18. Display Item WasteInk Waste ink Wiper Wiping count Rubing* Rubbing count Lever Lever up count Cover Cover opening count Ink Lever Ink lever up count CR Motor CR motor round trip count PF Motor PF motor travel Ink Tube* Ink tube round trip count Print Number The number of printed sheets Clening Cleaning count Fire B K ink discharge count (in mega dots) Fire LK LK ink discharge count (in mega dots) Fire C C ink discharge count (in mega dots) Fire M M ink discharge count (in mega dots) Fire LC LC ink discharge count (in mega dots) Fire LM LM ink discharge count (in mega dots) Fire Y Y ink discharge count (in mega dots) Cut Cutting count Cut Sole. Cutter solenoid operation count LockSolen* Head lock solenoid operation count WasteInk: ? Wiper: ? Rubing: ? 00000000 00000000 * Not used Fire B: ? 00000000Mdot Fire LK: ? 00000000Mdot Lever: ? 00000000 Fire C: ? 00000000Mdot Cover: ? 00000000 Fire M: ? 00000000Mdot Ink Lever: ? 00000000 Fire LC: ? 00000000Mdot CR Motor: ? 00000000 Fire LM: ? 00000000Mdot PF Motor: ? 00000000 Fire Y: ? 00000000Mdot Ink Tube: ? Note "*": Not used 0000000 0000000 * Not used Cut: ? Print Number: ? 00000000 Cut Sole.: ? Clening: ? 00000000 LockSolen: ? 00000000 0000000 00000000 * Not used Figure 5-10. Menu Transition of Maintenance Record Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 226 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A RECORD OF ERRORS The record of major errors (service call errors) can be checked. A maximum of 7 errors are displayed. (See Figure 5-11) NOTE: CPU errors are not included. 5.2.2.7 CSIC Information on each CSIC is displayed. (See Figure 5-12) Menu transition for cartridge selection is shown at right. Error 0 : ? 00020000 Error 1 : ? 00010000 Error 2 : ? 0001000C Error 3 : ? No Error Error 4 : ? No Error Error 5 : ? No Error Error 6 : ? No Error Figure 5-11. Menu Transition of Record of Errors CSIC : ? K Cart. ? CSIC : ? LK Cart. ? CSIC : ? C Cart. ? CSIC : ? M Cart. ? CSIC : ? LC Cart. ? CSIC : ? LM Cart. ? CSIC : ? Y Cart. ? CSIC : ? MainteTank ? Figure 5-12. Menu Transition for Cartridge Selection Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 227 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A INTERNAL INFORMATION DISPLAY OF CSIC Internal information on CSIC is displayed. Figure 5-13 shows menu transition for internal information display of CSIC. NOTE: The indications on the LCD mean as follows: 00-27: Memory addresses (00H ~ 27H) in EEPROM of CSIC K: Ink cartridge of which information is available K 00 : ? 27 K 01 : ? 10 K 0E : ? 27 K 1B : ? 6 K 02 : * ? G K 0F : ? 09 K 1C : ? 24 K 03 : * ? E K 10 : ? 58 K 1D : ? 24 K 04 : * ? N K 11 : ? 7B K 1E : ? F0 K 05 : * ? – K 12 : ? B K 1F : ? 50 K 06 : * ? U K 13 : ? C K 20 : * ? E K 07 : * ? I K 14 : ? 0 K 21 : * ? P K 08 : * ? N K 15 : ? 3 K 22 : * ? S K 09 : * ? E K 16 : ? 1 K 23 : * ? O K 0A : ? 13 K 17 : ? F3 K 24 : * ? N K 0B : ? – K 18 : ? 0 K 25 : * ? I K 0C : ? 00 K 19 : ? 1 K 26 : * ? N K 0D : ? 08 K 1A : ? 6 K 27 : * ? K *Fixed information Figure 5-13. Menu Transition for Internal Information Display of CSIC Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 228 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.2.8 Actuator You can operate actuators. (See Figure 5-14) [SelecType] Cutter : CUTTER ? ? The cutter is moved up and down by operating on the panel. (See Figure 5-15) „ Neither pressing the [Paper Feed +] key with “UP” displayed nor pressing the [Paper Feed -] key with “DOWN” displayed works. Upon passage of 60 seconds with the cutter in the down position, it will automatically move up. [Enter] Start [Pause] [Items] Cutter : ? UP Figure 5-14. Menu Transition of Actuator Cutter : 5.2.2.9 Actuator 2 ? You can operate actuators. (See Figure 5-16) UP Cutter : „ When you try to return to the top menu of test after execution of any item of ? Actuator 2, “Turn Power OFF” will be displayed. DOWN Figure 5-15. Menu Transition of Cutter [SelecType] Cutter Sole. ? [Paper Feed ∇] ? [Paper Feed ∆] Pump Motor ? [Paper Feed ∇] [Enter] Start [Pause] [Items] [Enter] [Pause] End ? [Paper Feed ∆] Figure 5-16. Menu Transition of Actuator 2 Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 229 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3 Adjustment Table 5-19. Panel Setting Item List (continued) Make the mechanism adjustment (head slant) and the firmware parameter adjustment. Table 5-19. Panel Setting Item List Item Rear AD Adjustment Edge AD Adjustment Front AD Adjustment Head Rank Input D/A Compensation Value Write Head Nozzle Check Paper Skew Check Feed Correction + T&B Top & Bottom Automatic Mechanism Adjustment Rear Paper Sensor Position Platen Position Adjustment Platen Position Checking Cutter Adjustment Slant Check Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D) Parameter Copying (Bi-D) Round Trip Print Position Adjustment 2 (Bi-D2) Round Trip Print Position Adjustment 3 (Bi-D3) Round Trip Print Position (BiD Adjustment) Checking Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) Adjustment Description Make the AD adjustment of the rear sensor. Make the AD adjustment of the edge sensor. (Not used) Input the characteristic values for the installed head. After that, supply ink. (Not used) Check the print result for proper ink discharge from the head nozzles. Perform paper feed, and check the degree of skew by sensor. Make the printer perform printing and correct the paper feed rate (band feed). Adjust the paper top and bottom margins and the left margin. (Not used) Using cut paper, determine the distance between the XF sensor and the XR sensor. Adjust the sponge position of the platen. Check the adjustment result of the sponge position of the platen. (Not used) Make the printer perform printing and check the slant of the head. (Mechanism Adjustment) Make the printer perform printing and adjust the round trip printing position. (PG/1.2mm) Copy the Bi-D adjustment value (PG/1.2mm) above onto Bi-D2 (PG=0.7mm) and Bi-D3 (PG=2.1mm). Make the printer perform printing and adjust the round trip printing position. PG/0.7mm Make the printer perform printing and adjust the round trip printing position. PG/2.1mm According to the result of the round trip print position adjustment, shift the pattern by the theoretically required number of dots. Then print the pattern and make certain that the result of adjustment is proper. Make the printer perform printing and adjust the oneway printing position. See p.231 p.232 – Item Test Pattern Printing Clean Head Counter Clear Description Head nozzle checking and adjustment pattern (Input the serial number) Clean the tube and head using cleaning liquid. Clear various software counters. [SelecType] p.233 Adj : ? Rear AD ? p.236 Adj : ? Edge AD ? p.237 p.238 Adj : ? p.239 Adj : ? p.242 Adj : ? – p.243 p.244 p.245 – p.246 p.248 p.251 [Pause] or [Items] Frnt AD ? *Not Used Input Rank ? Write D/A Value ? *Not Used Adj : ? Cut Adj ? *Not Used Adj : ? Head Slant ? Adj : ? Bi-d ? Check Nozzle ? Adj : ? CopyParam. Adj : ? Check Skew ? Adj : ? Bi-d2 ? Adj : ? Feed Adj.+T&B ? Adj : ? Bi-d3 ? Adj : ? Top & Bottom ? Adj : ? Bi-d Chk. ? Adj : ? Head LR Adj. AT MechaAdj. ? *Not Used Rear Sensor Pos. ? Adj : ? Test Print ? p.251 Adj : ? Platen Pos. ? Adj : ? Clean Head ? p.252 Adj : ? Platen Pos. Chk. ? Adj : ? Counter Clear ? p.253 Self-diagnostic Function p.256 p.257 Press Enter after the last item Adj : ? p.251 p.255 [Enter] Start Adj : ? Adj : ? See Figure 5-17. Adjustment Menu Transition 230 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.1 Rear AD Adjustment The optimum value for resistance of the Rear Sensor is automatically detected and determined. (See Figure 5-18) „ The values displayed are “D/A adjustment value”, “ON-OFF difference” and “ON level” as named from left. „ Appropriate values ON-OFF difference: 040 or more ON level: 095 or less NOTE: The appropriate values are represented in hexadecimal notation. „ Paper to be used: A3-size Kimoto Micro Tracing Paper #300 LMB #F751 (1057723) [Enter] Detection error end Adjustment Adjust again [Enter] Detection end RearAD : ? 088 04A 040 or more 090 95 or less Figure 5-18. Menu Transition for Rear AD Adjustment ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKING PROCEDURE 1. [Enter] Start Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Set paper: Set a sheet of A3-size Kimoto Micro Tracing Paper #300 LMB #F751 (1057723) on the HP side. 3. Display “Adj: Rear AD”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2 4. Detect the adjusted values: [SelecType] → [Enter ↵ ] 5. Check the values for properness: Check that the values are within the respective ranges specified above. If they are not within the ranges, clean the sensor surface or replace it with a new one. Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 231 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.2 Edge AD Adjustment The optimum value for resistance of the Edge Sensor is automatically detected and determined. (See Figure 5-19) „ The values are displayed in the order of “D/A adjustment value”, “ON-OFF difference” and “ON level” from left to right. „ Appropriate values ON-OFF difference: 040 or more ON level: within 0E0 ∼ 0E8 NOTE: The appropriate values are represented in hexadecimal notation. „ Paper to be used: A3 plain paper ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKING PROCEDURE 1. [Enter] Start [Enter] Detection error end Adjustment Adjust again [Enter] Detection end EdgeAD : ? 0A1 0E0 040 or more 0E0 Within 0E0 ∼ 0E8 Figure 5-19. Menu Transition for Edge AD Adjustment Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Set paper: Set A3-size plain paper on the HP side. 3. Display “Adj: Edge AD”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] 4. Move the CR Unit: By manual operation, move the Carriage so that the Edge Sensor is positioned at the right edge of the A3 plain paper. 5. Detect the adjusted values: [SelecType] → [Enter ↵ ] 6. Check the values for properness: Check that the values are within the respective ranges specified above. If they are not within the ranges, clean the sensor surface or replace it with a new one. Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 232 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.3 Input Rank When the print head has been replaced, input as the head rank the information specific to the head for setting the optimum drive voltage. (See Figure 5-20) Rank Input : ? A label indicating a rank information code which consists of a numerical value representing the characteristic values of the head has been affixed to the head already mounted on the printer or the head newly installed (See Figure 5-24). Input this value and write it in the Flash memory. Rank Input : ? When initial filling only is to be performed after replacing the Damper ASSY, select and execute “Initial charge” in “Cleaning” (p.259) menu. C H E C K P O IN T QR Code ? Panel ? Press [SelecType] key to enter the mode where code is input on the panel. Figure 5-20. Menu Transition for Head Rank Input 5.2.3.3.1 QR Code Input RankError Input QR Code RankError (D/P) [Enter] The dedicated QR code reader is necessary for “QR Code input”. On the service site, select and execute “Input on Panel”. C H E C K P O IN T Press [SelecType] key to enter the mode where QR Code is received on line. RankError (D) „ Press [Pause] key to enter “Rank Input: QR Code”. „ After ink filling, the display returns to the adjustment top menu. „ Input correct values when an rank error has occurred. The relationship between indications and errors is as follows: Both dye and pigment are wrong. Wrong rank for dye Wrong rank for pigment • “RankError (D/P)”: • “RankError (D)”: • “RankError (P)”: Input value OK Exc. EnterKey Fill RankError (P) The display is returned to “Rank Input” by pressing [Pause] key. Remember, however, that the rank has already been updated. [Enter] Please Set Ink Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed. [Enter] INK CHARGING Figure 5-21. Menu Transition for QR Code Input Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 233 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.3.2 Input on Panel Rank Input : In this mode, select an input type to input a code by operating on the panel. (See Figure 5-22) ? INPUT LINE SELECTION Dyestuff ? Rank Input : In this mode, select an input line on which you input the code by panel operation. ? Pigment ? (See Figure 5-23) [SelecType] [SelecType] To the mode for selecting an input line for dye To the mode for selecting an input line for pigment Figure 5-22. Menu Transition of Panel Input NOTE: For pigment code input, “Pigment-1” ~ “Pigment-3” are displayed. Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key. Input Line : ? [Paper Feed ∇] Dye-1 [Paper Feed ∆] Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key. Input Line : ? [Paper Feed ∇] Dye-2 [Paper Feed ∆] Code input mode is entered by pressing [SelecType] key. Input Line : ? Dye-3 Figure 5-23. Menu Transition for Input Line Selection Day Pigment Figure 5-24. Head Code Label Position Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 234 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Dye code input In this mode, input a dye code by operating on the panel. The cursor is displayed at the position where a digit is currently input. (See Figure 5-25) Dye–1 ? 266432F [Paper Feed ∆] Key : + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – Dye–2 „ Press [Cleaning] key to shift the cursor (pointing out the input item) to the right. „ The cursor moves to the left end when [Cleaning] key is pressed at the right end. „ After ink charge, the display returns to the adjustment top menu. „ Press the [Pause] key to return to the previous level in the hierarchy. In doing so, note that the input code is valid but it has not been registered yet. „ The cursor skips the item displayed with “\”. „ At input for “Dye-1” or “Dye-2”, press the [Enter] key to enter the input line selection mode, which is the immediately upper level in the hierarchy. ? 44WM2Q3 Dye–3 ? NU00G\\ [Enter] Press [Pause] key for transition to the adjustment top menu. Exc. EnterKey Fill [Enter] Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed. Please Set Ink [Enter] INK CHARGING Figure 5-25. Menu Transition of Code Input Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 235 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Pigment Code Input † After ink filling, the display returns to the adjustment top menu.Pigment Code Input In this mode, input a pigment code by operating on the panel. The cursor is displayed at the position where a digit is currently input. „ Press [Cleaning] key to shift the cursor (pointing out the input item) to the „ „ „ „ „ right. The cursor moves to the left end when [Cleaning] key is pressed at the right end. After ink charge, the display returns to the adjustment top menu. Press the [Pause] key to return to the previous level in the hierarchy. In doing so, note that the input code is valid but it has not been registered yet. The cursor skips the item displayed with “\”. At input for “Pigment-1” “Pigment-2” or “Pigment-3”, press the [Enter] key to enter the input line selection mode, which is the immediately upper level in the hierarchy. Pigment–1 266432F [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key: – 44WM2Q3 [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key: – QVVWUVR [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key: – Pigment–2 Pigment–3 Pigment–4 S01S0\ \ [Enter] Exc.EnterKey Fill 5.2.3.4 Write D/A Value C A U T IO N [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key: – Press [Pause] key for transition to the adjustment top menu. [Enter] Stylus Pro 7600/9600 does not incorporate this function. Do not try to execute this operation on the service site. Please Set Ink Displayed when the cartridge has not been installed. [Enter] INK CHARGING Figure 5-26. Menu Transition of Code Input Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 236 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.5 Check Nozzle Check the print result to see if the head nozzles discharge ink properly and if there is any alignment error. If ink discharging from the nozzles is faulty or there is any alignment error, execute cleaning in this item and perform checking again. If there is no ink remaining, the printer requests the installation of ink cartridges. When paper has been set and there is ink, the printer prints the head nozzle check pattern. [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] Printing Pattern Printing operation is carried out even when the ink cartridges have been installed but ink filling has not been performed. C H E C K P O IN T Printing end Nozzle Check End ? † Head Nozzle Check Pattern „ Check Item • • • • • Cleaning: Standard Nozzle ink discharge (skipping, not continuous, meandering) Satellite Timing fence Vertical nozzle alignment check Horizontal nozzle alignment check ? Output Pattern [Enter] Key →To "Cutter" [Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle" [Enter] Key →Cleaning executed [Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle" [Enter] Key →Pattern output [Pause] Key →To "Check Nozzle" Table 5-20. Pattern Pattern Description Nozzle ink The pattern is printed in the order of K/C/M/Y/LC/LM/LK from left to right. discharge Pattern drawing method 360dpi, Uni-D, VSD1, 240CPS, Large (See Figure 5-28) HeadRank ID: 266432F 06E424E 44WM2Q3 4BUTWTU NU00G QVVWUVR S01S0 Horizontal nozzle The pattern is printed in the order of K/LK/C/LC/M/LM/Y from left to right. alignment check Pattern drawing method 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD1,Large (See Figure 5-29) 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Large 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Small 360dpi,Uni-D,190CPS,VSD4,Large Vertical nozzle The pattern is printed in the order of K/LK/C/LC/M/LM/Y from left to right. alignment check Pattern drawing method 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD1,Small/Middle/Large (See Figure 5-30) 360dpi,Uni-D,240CPS,VSD2,Small/Middle/Large 360dpi,Uni-D,190CPS,VSD4,Small/Middle/Large Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function Figure 5-27. Menu Transition for Head Nozzle Check Figure 5-28. Pattern (Nozzle Ink Discharge Check) Figure 5-29. Pattern (Horizontal Nozzle Alignment Check) Figure 5-30. Pattern (Vertical Nozzle Alignment Check) 237 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.6 Check Skew Feed paper by a specified distance (specify the distance on the panel), read the paper edge position before and after paper feed with the edge sensor and check the difference between the two readings. (See Figure 5-31) After completion of initial operation, input the value for paper feed distance. Then the Edge Sensor will detect the paper left edge (capping side) and the printer will display the difference between the positions before and after paper feed. If a paper recognition error before or after paper feed occurs or if the Rear Sensor detects “No Paper” during paper feed, the display shows paper error. Then press the appropriate key to leave this item. Check Skew : ? 1.0m [Enter] [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – * Setting possible in increments of 0.1 m (10.0m ∼ 0.1m) Exc. Skew Normal completion of paper edge detection after paper transport by the preset distance SkewResult: ? NOTE: The printer will leave this item once the [Pause] key is pressed on the control panel while the printer is not processing. +0.010mm + for Home side, - for opposite side Figure 5-31. Menu Transition for Skew Checking „ At the first detection of the paper left edge, the reference position for paper skew judgment is determined in the firmware. „ The “Paper Out” LED blinks or lights up if the paper detection error has occurred. In such cases, raise the lever once and then execute the same operation again. „ Press the [Pause] key for transition to “Adj: Check Skew”. „ No panel key works during execution of skew checking. C H E C K P O IN T Adjustment When the skew check result is “99.999mm”, the paper is in the following conditions. Clear the cause and execute the check again. 1. The paper width detection indicates that one of the right and left edge positions of the paper is different from that by the previous detection by ±3 mm or more. 2. When the head is at the home position, the distance from the row of K nozzles to the paper detected position on the home side is 142.0 mm or less. (The paper is too close to the home position.) Lever up or cover opening was performed during paper feed operation. Self-diagnostic Function 238 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.7 Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment For paper transport, correct the distance and adjust the top & bottom margins and side margin (printing start position). (See page 241) Enter:Adjust Pause:Do not adjust T&B Adjust? [Enter] † Feed Adjustment (Paper feed distance compensation): Make the printer print a line in the paper feed direction, input the distance and determine the PF encoder resolution inside the firmware. The reference length for this determination has been set to 1 m. (Only the input of a compensation value without printing is possible.) The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM. [Enter] [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. Printing Pattern „ Resolution: 0.1mm Adjust Do not adjust. Or 2nd or subsequent printing † Adj Top & Bottom: Conduct printing and paper cutting and input the distances between the Front Sensor and the Head, between the Cutter and the Head and between the Edge Sensor and the Head (writing start position). The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM. „ Resolution: 0.1mm † Side Margin Adjustment (Print Start Position Adjustment): Conduct printing and paper cutting, then measure and input the side margin. The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM. „ Adjustment resolution: 0.1mm Menu transition is shown at right and adjustment patterns are shown on the next page. Top Length : ? [SelecType] „ Press the [Pause] key on the compensation value input screen, and the display will change to “Feed Adj.+T&B”. „ Press the [Pause] key on the “Top Length” or “Bottom Length” input screen, and the display will change to the “Bottom Length” or “Side Margin” input screen, respectively. „ “Top Length”, “Bottom Length” and “Side Margin” can be adjusted only in the T&B adjustment mode for the first printing. 3.0mm Bottom Length : ? 14.0mm [SelecType] V Length : ? [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. 3.0mm [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. +1000.0mm [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. Side Margin: ? [SelecType] [SelecType] Adjustment [Pause] [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] [Pause] Key →To “Rear Sensor Pos.” [Enter] Figure 5-32. Menu Transition for Feed Correction +T&B Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 239 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † Adjustment pattern „ Adjustment items • Top margin (Front Sensor position) • Bottom margin (cutter position) • Side margin (Writing start position) „ Paper feed length: 1000 mm „ Pattern drawing method: • • • • Length: Printing direction: Resolution: Printing speed: 1000mm Uni-D 360 dpi 240 CPS Table below specifies the positions where the NormalDot2 vertical line patterns are drawn. Table 5-21. Positions where Vertical Line Patterns Are Drawn Adjustment Coordinate in units of 360 dpi In mm 0 0 1417 About 100 2834 About 200 4251 About 300 5669 About 400 7086 About 500 8583 About 600 9921 About 700 11338 About 800 12755 About 900 14173 About 1000 Self-diagnostic Function 240 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A FEED CORRECTION + T&B ADJUSTMENT 2. Display “Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∆] x6 3. Print the pattern. [SelecType >] →[Enter ↵] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed (See Figure 5-32) 4. Measure the top margin: Using a measuring rule, measure the top margin. Input the measured value on the panel. 5. Measure the bottom margin: Using a measuring rule, measure the bottom margin. Input the measured value on the panel. 6. Measure the side margin: Using a measuring rule, measure the side margin. Input the measured value on the panel. 7. Measure the feed correction value: Using a measuring rule (1000 mm) and the scale stopper, measure the longitudinal line length. Input the measured value on the panel. C H E C K P O IN T Paper Feed Direction Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON Longitudinal line length (1000.0mm) Bottom margin (14.0mm) 1. „ The central print pattern among the patterns as shown above is intended for use as a datum line on which the measuring rule is to be placed. „ Even if you have left the “Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment” mode by mistake, you can restore the relevant adjustment display without reprinting the pattern, by pressing [Paper Source <] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed. Top margin (3.0mm) Side margin (3.0mm) Figure 5-33. Print Pattern for Feed Correction + T&B Adjustment Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 241 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.8 Top & Bottom Adjustment Printing Pattern Conduct printing and paper cutting and input the distances between the Front Sensor and the Head, between the Cutter and the Head and between the Edge Sensor 0 and the Head (printing start position) to adjust the top, bottom and side margins. „ Press the [Pause] key on the compensation value input screen, and the display will change to “Top and Button”. „ Press the [Enter} key on the input screen for “Top Length” or “Bottom Length”, and the display will change to the input screen for “Bottom Length” or “Side Margin”, respectively. „ Press the [Enter] key on the input screen for “Side Margin”, and the display will change to “Rear Sensor Position”. † Correction pattern of distances between the Front Sensor and the Head, between Bottom Length : ? [SelecType] Side Margin: ? [SelecType] „ Adjustment items: Top margin (Front Sensor position) Bottom margin (cutter position) Side margin (printing start position) „ Printing method: Black 1 pass, Uni-D mode 180 dpi „ Pattern drawing method: Printing direction: Uni-D Resolution: 360dpi Printing speed: 240CPS Dot: NormalDot2 3.0mm [Enter] 14.0mm [Enter] 3.0mm [Enter] [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. Figure 5-34. Menu Transition for Top & Bottom Adjustment Paper Feed Direction the Cutter and the Head Top Length : ? [SelecType] Bottom margin (14.0mm) Top margin (3.0mm) Side margin (3.0mm) Figure 5-35. Print Pattern for Top & Bottom Adjustment Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 242 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.9 Rear Sensor Position Make this adjustment to detect the length of cut paper correctly. Please Set Cut Sheet To ensure a maximum printable area relative to the paper tail end, adjust the Rear Sensor position inside the firmware with the nozzle position as the reference. Set an A3 sheet in the portrait position, make the printer draw a horizontal line (black 1-dot line) at 14 mm from the sheet tail end. Then measure the distance from the sheet tail end to the line and input the measured value as the compensation value. The input value, handled as the compensation value, is written in the Flash ROM. „ Resolution: 0.1mm „ Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, NormalDot2 Set cut paper and press [Enter] After printing, drop the paper. Printing Pattern Printing end Paper Width : ? [Pause] Key →To “Rear Sensor Pos.” 297.0mm [Enter] NOTE 1: This adjustment is necessary in the manufacturing process. After that, however, execution of this item is not necessary even once Feed Correction is made. 2: When this item is selected, the printer requests setting of cut paper irrespective of the presence or absence of paper. RearSen. Pos. : ? 14.0mm [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – *Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. Figure 5-36. Menu Transition for Rear Sensor Position Adjustment „ As the Rear Sensor position, measure the distance between the sheet tail end and the drawn line and input the measured value. „ Press the [Enter] key on the “Rear Sensor Pos.” input screen, and the display will change to “Test Print”. Rear Sensor position correction REAR SENSOR POSITION ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Paper Feed Direction Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Display “Adj: Rear Sensor Pos.”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∆] x5 3. Print the pattern: Set a sheet of A3-size plain paper (portrait) and press [Enter ↵ ]. (See Figure 5-36) 4. Measure the distance: Using a measuring rule, measure the distance. Input the measured value on the panel. (See Figure 5-37) Figure 5-37. Rear Sensor Position Adjustment Pattern Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 243 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.10 Platen Position (Sponge Position) Adjustment [Enter] Adjust Print Detect the position of each sponge on the platen. (See Figure 5-38) [Enter] Printing Pattern „ For Platen R, input the deviation of the printed pattern from the left end of the frame in which the sponge nearest to the 1st home is embedded. „ For Platen L, input the deviation of the printed pattern from the left end of the frame in which the 7th sponge counted from the home for Stylus Pro 7600 or the 9th sponge for Stylus Pro 9600 is embedded. „ Input a negative value for a deviation toward the home or a positive value for a deviation toward the side opposite to the home. „ Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large Printing end Platen R: ? 0.0mm [Enter] Platen L: ? 0.0mm [Enter] Adj : ? Platen Pos. Chk. PLATEN POSITION (SPONGE POSITION) ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – *Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – *Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. Figure 5-38. Menu Transition for Platen Position Adjustment 1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Display “Adj: Sponge Pos.”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∆] x4 3. Print the pattern: [Enter ↵ ] x2 4. Measure the platen position R: Using a measuring rule, measure the distance from the left end of the frame in which the sponge nearest to the 1st home is embedded to the longitudinal line of the printed pattern. Input the measured value on the panel.(See Figure 5-39) 5. Measure the platen position L: Using a measuring rule, measure the distance from the left end of the frame in which the 7th sponge counted from the home for Stylus Pro 7600 or the 9th sponge for Stylus Pro 9600 is embedded to the longitudinal line of the printed pattern. Input the measured value on the panel.(See Figure 5-39) Platen Position L Platen Position R Measure this deviation +side – side Measure this deviation + side – side Platen position (counted from home side) Stylus Pro 7600: 7th⁄ Stylus Pro 9600: 9th Figure 5-39. Print Pattern for Platen Position Adjustment Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 244 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.11 Platen Position Checking [Enter] Adjust Print Check the adjusted position of each sponge on the platen. „ Make certain that the printed pattern agrees with the right and left positions of each sponge position. „ Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large [Enter] Printing Pattern Printing end Platen Pos. R: ? 0.0mm [Enter] Adj : Cut Adj. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – *Setting is possible in increments of 0.1 mm. Figure 5-40. Menu Transition for Platen Position Checking Figure 5-41. Print Pattern for Platen Position Checking Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 245 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.12 Head Slant Checking Check the print result to see if the head is slanting. If there is a slant, make the “Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment)” (p.247). † Slant Check Pattern „ Check Item: Head slant „ Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, small Check these joint points for head slant 3mm 3mm † Adjustment Resolution: 12µm or less † Adjustment Range: 38 steps 3mm [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] Figure 5-43. Slant Check Pattern Printing Pattern Printing end [Enter] Key →To “Bi-d” [Pause] Key →To “Head Slant” Slant Check End [Paper Feed ∇] [Paper Feed ∆] [Enter] Key → Pattern output [Pause] Key →To “Head Slant” Output Pattern [Paper Feed ∇] [Paper Feed ∆] Figure 5-42. Menu Transition of Head Slant Adjustment Figure 5-44. Head Slant Check Printout Self-diagnostic Function 246 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A HEAD SLANT CHECKING PROCEDURE Head motion by Head Adjustment Lever operation: Lever Up: Magenta → lower / Black → rise Lever Down: Magenta → rise / Black → lower C H E C K P O IN T 1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Display “Adj: Head Slant”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x8 3. Print the pattern. 4. Check the pattern: (See Figure 5-43) Check to see if the black horizontal lines and the magenta horizontal lines are not in alignment. When they are in alignment, leave the head slant checking mode by pressing the [Paper Source] button two times. If they are not in alignment, follow the procedure as described below. Tighten two screws HEAD SLANT ADJUSTMENT (MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT) 1. After printing the head slant check pattern, with “Do you correct slant?” displayed on the LCD, move the Carriage Unit to an appropriate place for work. 2. Loosen the right and left screws for the Head Holding Plate. (See Figure 5-45) 3. Move the Head Adjustment Lever in consideration of the output pattern. (See Figure 5-46) 4. Tighten the left screw for the Head Holding Plate and move the Carriage Unit to the home position. C A U T IO N „ Do not forget to tighten the two screws for the Head Holding Cutter Figure 5-45. Head Slant Adjustment 1/2 Lever up → Black down/magenta up Plate. „ After making the head slant adjustment, be sure to return the Carriage Unit to the home position. If you proceed to the next step (Printing the pattern) with the Carriage Unit remaining in the place for work, the cutter edge can be damaged. 5. Print the pattern again, check to see if there is any misalignment and if any, repeat the adjustment from step 1. Head Adjustment Lever Lever down → Black up/magenta down Figure 5-46. Head Slant Adjustment 2/2 Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 247 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment) Adjust the round trip print position. Make adjustments of “240CPS VSD1”, “240CPS VSD2” and “190CPS VSD4” for each color. This Bi-D adjustment is of PG=1.2mm. For PG=0.7mm (Bi-D2) and PG=2.1mm (Bi-D3), make adjustment in other menus, as required. Store the adjustment values for each line of nozzles (21 kinds of values) in the Flash ROM. For adjustment, conduct Bi-D printing and from the print results, input the difference between the CW print position and the CCW print position. The procedure and print patterns for round trip print position adjustment are shown on the next page. Table 5-22. Adjustment Item List Item Bi-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD1 BiD 240,V2 Bi-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD2 BiD 190,V4 Bi-D Adjustment 190CPS VSD4 „ Adjustment resolution: 8.8 µm „ Adjustable range: ± 96 step adjustment possible „ Be sure to make adjustment for K first and then for other C H E C K P O IN T ? BiD 240, V2 ? ? BiD 240, V4 ? ? BiD End ? ? 240V1 K PRN ? [SelecType] 240V1 COL PRN ? Contents BiD 240,V1 [SelecType] BiD 240, V1 ? colors. „ After adjustment, be sure to perform “Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking (p.252)”. „ Press the [Enter] key with “***K PRN” displayed, and the K pattern will be printed. „ Press the [Enter] key with “***COL PRN” displayed, and the block pattern will be printed in colors other than K. „ When “***V1 K” is displayed, input the adjustment value for K (-96 ~ +96). „ When each of “***V1 K2” ~ “***V1 Y” is displayed, input the pattern number (0 ~ 8) for the aligned pattern. „ Press the [Enter] key with “BiD End” displayed, and the mode changes to “Adj: Bi-d Chk.” [SelecType] 240V1 K ? 30 [SelecType] or [Enter] 240V1 K2 ? 4 [SelecType] or [Enter] 240V1 C ? 6 [SelecType] or [Enter] 240V1 M ? 3 [SelecType] or [Enter] 240V1 LC ? 5 [SelecType] or [Enter] 240V1 LM ? 8 [SelecType] or [Enter] 240V1 Y ? 2 [SelecType] or [Enter] [Enter] [Enter] Printing Pattern Printing end [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – [Paper Feed ∆] Key: + [Paper Feed ∇] Key : – Figure 5-47. Menu Transition for Bi-D Adjustment Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 248 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A BI-D ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Display “Adj: Bi-d”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x9 3. Print the 240, V1 black line pattern: Press [Enter ↵ ] when “240V1 K PRN” is displayed. (See Figure 5-47) 4. Check the test pattern (240, V1 K) Check to see if the line by the first pass and the line by the second pass are not in alignment. When they are in alignment, proceed to the next step. If they are not in alignment, make the adjustment by referring to the procedure described below. (See Figure 5-49) † K (Black Line) Adjustment Procedure 1. Display the value input screen “240V1 K: xx”: After the test pattern has been output, press [SelecType >] one time when “240V1 COL PRN” is displayed on the LCD. 2. Input the value: In consideration of the output pattern, input a value in the range of +99∼–99 and press [Enter ↵ ]. 3. Output the pattern again: [SelecType >] → [SelecType >] → [Enter ↵ ] 4. Check the pattern: Check the output pattern and repeat the K (black line) adjustment until the line by the first pass and the line by the second pass are in alignment. C H E C K P O IN T Figure 5-48. Bi-D Adjustment Patterns 2nd pass (– side) Be sure to make adjustment for K first and then for other colors. Each color pattern has been set based on K. Therefore, if the K value is not correct, you can not make adjustments for color patterns correctly. 2nd pass (+ side) 1st pass Enlarged Figure 5-49. Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D) Adjustment (Black) Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 249 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5. Print the 240, V1 color pattern: Press [Enter ↵ ] when “240V1 COL PRN” is displayed. (See Figure 5-47) 6. Check the 240, V1 color pattern: Of the 9 color blocks for each color, find out a pattern free from a gap or overlap and make certain that the number on the LCD is identical with the number shown above the pattern. If the number on the LCD is different, input the pattern number. 7. Upon completion of the 240 V1 adjustment, make the adjustments for 240 V2 and 190V4 the same way. C H E C K P O IN T After completion of the adjustments above, be sure to make the “Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248). Figure 5-50. Color Pattern for Bi-D Adjustment Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 250 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.14 Parameter Copying In actual processing, at each point when the adjusted value is determined in “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248), the compensation value obtained by computation is copied into each area. Actually, therefore, copy processing by this function is not required. (See Figure 5-51) Copy Param. ? [Enter] WAIT 5.2.3.15 Bi-D2 Adjustment (PG=0.7mm) C H E C K P O IN T When this adjustment is to be performed, use the following paper since setting must be made for PG=0.7mm. Paper to be used: Authentic glossy paper (Example: Photo Glossy Paper #MCSRxxR2) Figure 5-51. Menu Transition for Parameter Copying Make this adjustment, as required, after executing “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248). The adjustment procedure is the same as that for “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248). 5.2.3.16 Bi-D3 Adjustment (PG=2.1mm) C H E C K P O IN T When this adjustment is to be performed, use the following paper since setting must be made for PG=2.1mm. Paper to be used: Authentic plain paper roll (PMSPxxR6) Make this adjustment, as required, after executing “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248). The adjustment procedure is the same as that for “5.2.3.13 Round Trip Print Position Adjustment (Bi-D Adjustment)” (p.248). Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 251 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.17 Round Trip Print Position (Bi-D Adjustment) Checking According to the result of the round trip print position adjustment, shift the pattern by the theoretically required number of dots. Then print the pattern and check the print result. Check to see if the central patterns are in alignment and if not, perform the Bi-D adjustment again. The menu transition for Bi-D adjustment checking and print patterns are shown at right. [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] Printing Pattern Figure 5-52. Menu Transition for Bi-D Adjustment Checking NOTE: Figure 5-53 shows the print patterns for PG1.2mm. The patterns for PG0.7mm and PG2.1mm will also be printed. „ Pattern drawing method: #1, #2 360dpi, Bi-D, 240CPS, VSD1, Large #8, #9 360dpi, Bi-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large #15, #16 360dpi, Bi-D, 190CPS, VSD4, Large Figure 5-53. Print Patterns for Bi-D Adjustment Checking Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 252 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.18 Head Gap Adjustment (Uni-D Adjustment) Correct the print position for one-way printing. [Enter] Adjust Print Make adjustments of “240CPS VSD1”, “240CPS VSD2” and “190CPS VSD4” for each color. Store the adjustment values for each line of nozzles (18 kinds of values) in the Flash ROM. For adjustment, conduct Uni-D printing and from the print results, input the compensation value. The menu transition for Uni-D adjustment and print patterns are shown below. Table 5-23. Head Gap Adjustment Items Item Contents Gap 240,V1 Uni-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD1 Gap 240,V2 Uni-D Adjustment 240CPS VSD2 Gap 190,V4 Uni-D Adjustment 190CPS VSD4 „ Adjustment resolution: 8.8 µm „ Adjustable range: ± 62 step adjustment possible „ Pattern drawing method: 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD1, Large (240V1 selected) 360dpi, Uni-D, 240CPS, VSD2, Large (240V2 selected) 360dpi, Uni-D, 190CPS, VSD4, Large (190V4 selected) „ Press the [Enter] key after inputting the adjusted values and pattern number, and the pattern will be printed only when updated values have been input. When the values have not been updated, the display will change to the next input screen. „ When the [Enter] key is pressed with “Gap End” displayed, the display changes to “Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B”. C H E C K P O IN T The adjustment is not required for any of #1, #8 and #15, which are black lines. [Pause] [Enter] Printing Pattern Printing end Gap 240, V1 ? ? Gap 240, V2 ? ? Gap 190, V4 ? ? Gap End ? ? 240V1 LK : ? [SelecType] 240V1 C : ? [SelecType] 240V1 LC : ? [SelecType] 240V1 M : ? [SelecType] 240V1 LM : ? [SelecType] 240V1 Y : ? [SelecType] 0 Value with +/- can be set in pulses 1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880” 0 Value with +/- can be set in pulses 1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880” 0 Value with +/- can be set in pulses 1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880” 0 Value with +/- can be set in pulses 1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880” 0 Value with +/- can be set in pulses 1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880” 0 Value with +/- can be set in pulses 1 pulse is equivalent to 1/2880” Figure 5-54. Menu Transition for Uni-D Adjustment Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 253 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A PROCEDURE FOR HEAD GAP ADJUSTMENT (UNI-D ADJUSTMENT) 1. Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 2. Display “Adj: Uni-D”: [Paper Feed ∇] → [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x11 3. Print the pattern. [SelecType >] →[Enter ↵] when “[Enter] Adjust Print” is displayed (See Figure 5-55) 4. Check the pattern: Make certain that the black lines and color lines are not out of alignment. When they are not out of alignment, leave the head gap adjustment mode by pressing [SelecType >] two times. If they are out of alignment, follow the instructions given below: † If out of alignment 1. Select the gap item in question: Select “Gap 240,V1”, “Gap 240,V2” or “Gap 190,V4” by means of [Paper Feed ∇] and enter the adjustment menu for the selected item by pressing [SelecType >]. 2. Adjust the color position in question: Select the relevant color by means of [SelecType >], and in consideration of the printed pattern, input the compensation value on the panel. Shift direction (black line as reference): (Compensation setting: in increments of 1/2880 inch) Shift to the right = Input a (+) value Shift to the left = Input a (-) value 3. Check again: Check the pattern output again, and when the lines are in alignment, leave the head gap adjustment mode by pressing [SelecType >] two times. If the lines are out of alignment, repeat inputting a value. C H E C K P O IN T Adjustment Even when you have left the head gap adjustment menu, you can display the menu for an relevant item by means of [SelecType >]. Therefore, there is no need of outputting the comprehensive patterns again. Self-diagnostic Function Color line (– side) Color line (+ side§) Black line Enlarged View Figure 5-55. Print Pattern (Head Gap Adjustment) 254 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.19 Test Pattern Printing Print : ? You can print adjustment patterns and check each adjustment item. (See Figure 5-56) Check Ptn. ? [SelecType] Key → To "Printing Pattern" Printing end→ To serial number input screen [Paper Feed ∆] † Check Ptn.: Prints all the adjustment patterns (including the adjustment variables list) (Time required: about 20 minutes) † Check Ptn. 2: Of the patterns to be output by “Check Ptn.”, the first pattern to the head gap adjustment (Uni-D) pattern will be output. (Time required: about 5 minutes) † Check Ptn. 3: Of the patterns to be output by “Check Ptn.”, the Bi-D adjustment pattern to the adjustment variables will be output. (Time required: about 15 minutes) Adj. Variable: Outputs the list of the setting compensation values (variables) determined by various adjustments. „ Press the [Cleaning] key on a serial number input screen, and the display will change to the next screen. (For example, from “No.1: PEG**000000”, the display changes to “No.1: PEG**000000”.) „ Press the [Cleaning] key on the “Print Adj.Pattern” screen, and the display will change to the serial number input screen “No.1: PEG**000000”. Print : ? [Paper Feed ∇] [SelecType] Key → To "Printing Pattern" Printing end→ To serial number input screen Check Ptn. 2 ? [Paper Feed ∆] Print : ? [Paper Feed ∇] [SelecType] Key → To "Printing Pattern" Printing end→ To serial number input screen Check Ptn. 3 ? [Paper Feed ∆] Print : ? No.1 : ? No.2 : ? No.3 : ? [Paper Feed ∇] Adj.Variable ? [SelecType] PEG∗∗000000 [Enter] PEG01∗∗0000 [Enter] PEG0123∗∗00 [Enter] No.4 : ? PEG012345∗∗ [Enter] [Enter] Adjust Print [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – *2Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits. [Paper Feed ∆]Key: + [Paper Feed ∇]Key : – * Setting is possible in increments of 2 digits. [Enter] Print Adj.Pattern [Enter] Printing Pattern After printing, the display changes to [Clean Head]. Figure 5-56. Menu Transition for Test Pattern Printing Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 255 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.20 Clean Head When Head replacement is required on the service site, execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) in this mode beforehand. Set Opener I/C [Pause] Install draining cartridges.[Enter] Ink Blowing Ink Dischg. Skip Completion of ink discharge [Enter] Set Cleaning I/C C H E C K P O IN T If transition in the sequence can not take place for some reason, the display shows “Reset ** I/C”. [Pause] Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter] Head Cleaning Head Wash Skip Completion of cleaning liquid filling [Enter] Set Opener I/C (2) [Pause] Install draining cartridges.[Enter] When replacing the print head, execute ink discharge (“Ink Blowing”) by using this function. Dischrg. washfluid (2) Ink Dischg. Skip (2) Completion of cleaning liquid filling [Enter] Set Cleaning I/C (2) [Pause] Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter] C H E C K P O IN T „ Prepare seven draining cartridges, which are necessary for this work. „ “Opener I/C” in the menu display must be understood as “Draining Cartridge”. Head Cleaning (2) Head Wash Skip (2) Completion of cleaning liquid filling [Enter] Set Opener I/C (3) [Pause] Install draining cartridges.[Enter] Dischrg. washfluid (3) Ink Dischg. Skip (3) Completion of cleaning liquid filling [Enter] Set Cleaning I/C (3) † Procedure: In the flow as shown at right, upon completion of the first step for ink discharge, enter the branch for “Head Wash Skip” and “[Enter] End” to skip the other operations. [Pause] Install cleaning cartridges.[Enter] Head Cleaning (3) Head Wash Skip (3) Completion of cleaning liquid filling [Enter] Set Opener I/C (4) [Pause] Install draining cartridges.[Enter] Dischrg. washfluid (4) Ink Dischg. Skip (4) Completion of cleaning liquid filling [Enter] Please Remove I/C (5) [Pause] Remove cartridges and press [Enter] Execute Suction (5) Completion of cleaning liquid filling Adj : Counter Clear [Enter] End [Enter] Figure 5-57. Menu Transition for Head Cleaning Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 256 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.3.21 Counter Clear Table 5-24. Counters to be Cleared and Their Initial Values (continued) This function is to be used to initialize each counter value at the factory before shipment. Never use this function on the service site. (If you operate, all the counter values concerning ink system control will be lost and no operation or control after that will be carried out correctly.) C A U T IO N [Description below is given only for information] Table 5-24 indicates the counters to be cleared and their initial values and Figure 5-58 shows menu transition for counter clearing. Table 5-24. Counters to be Cleared and Their Initial Values Counters to be Cleared Protection Counter A Protection Counter A Work Protection Counter D Protection Counter D Work Protection Counter B Protection Counter B Work Ink Volume Counter Rb Ink Volume Counter Rx Ink Volume Counter Rz Consumed Ink Counter K Consumed Ink Counter LK Consumed Ink Counter C Consumed Ink Counter M Consumed Ink Counter LC Consumed Ink Counter LM Consumed Ink Counter Y CL1 Cumulative Counter CL2 Cumulative Counter CL3 Cumulative Counter HP and Other Cumulative Counters Timer CL Cumulative Counter Yellow Shot Counter 1 Yellow Shot Counter 2 Accumulated Prints Timer Timer for Timer CL Execution 1 Timer for Timer CL Execution 2 CL Flag Initial Charge Counter Periodic Pseudo-Vacuum Flag Adjustment Initial Value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (Not during CL) 1 (Not completed) (0) Counters to be Cleared Ink Type Ink OUT Judge Counter Vacuum Compensation Coefficient Discharge Compensation Coefficient Compensation Permission Flag H Cartridge Midway Replacement Flag CSIC Storage Area for Printer Body Cumulative Ink Consumption Cumulative Paper Consumption Ink Consumption during Nozzle Check Paper Consumption during Nozzle Check Counters to be Cleared Y Ink Cumulative Discharge Counter Previous Y Ink Cumulative Discharge Counter Y Ink Cumulative Discharge at Previous Ultrasonic Cleaning Y Ink Cumulative Discharge at Previous Periodic CL2 Execution CSIC Control Flag Maintenance Menu Ink Related Count 1 Timer Initial Charge Execution Count Initial Charge Previous Execution time Timer Initial Charge Flag Maintenance tank ink consumption (CSIC) Head hot error flag Borderless ink counter Timer CL4 cumulative counter Pump counter P Maintenance tank detection CL5 cumulative counter CL1 count with cleaning prohibited (7 colors) Timer CL4 flag Time having elapsed since previous K ink replacement sequence CL4 cumulative counter K ink counter for ink system processing Ink replacement sequence counter Ink type changed MB flag Previous count-down ratio Initial charge executed MB flag Initial charge executed MB flag Initial Value 0 (Neutral) (0) (90) (90) (0) 1 (Replaced) FFh 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 (0) (0) 1 (All valid) 1 for date 0 for others (0) (0) (0) 0 0 (Not error) 0 0 0 1 (ON) 0 0 0 (Not being executed) 0xffffffff 0 0 0 0 (Not changed) 0 (%) 0 (Not executed) 0 Note : The numeric value in ( ) represents the initial value in the area which firmware does not use. Self-diagnostic Function 257 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A „ After counter clearing, turn off the power once and then turn it on again to start the printer in the normal mode. Then the display as shown in Figure 5-59 will appear when the counter clearing has been executed successfully. (However, only when the covers are closed, the Paper Set Lever in the down position and the ink lever is in the up position) Reset Counter? [Enter] After printing, display changes to “Check Skew” Wait for a while Figure 5-58. Menu Transition for Counter Clearing SET INK CARTRIDGE * Figure 5-59. Display after Counter Clearing Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 258 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.4 Cleaning Execute head cleaning. Table 5-25 lists cleaning items and Figure 5-60 shows cleaning menu transition. Cleaning : ? Table 5-25. Cleaning Items Item Display Normal cleaning cycle KK0 Minimum vacuum Normal cleaning cycle KK1 Cleaning: Std. KK1 Maximum vacuum Cleaning: Std. KK2 Maximum vacuum (With rubbing) Initial charge Cleaning: Init. Fill Initial filling Cleaning : ? Cleaning : ? After replacing the Damper ASSY and/or ink tube, if ink charging is to be performed without replacing the print head, execute “Initial charge” in this menu. Cleaning : ? Execute test pattern printing and/or adjustment variables printing. Table 5-26 lists printing items and Figure 5-61 shows printing menu transition. Display Print : ? [Paper Feed ∇] Print : ? [Paper Feed ∇] Table 5-26. Printing Items Contents Test Pattern Print: Check Ptn. Test pattern printing Adjustment Variable Print: Adj.Variable Adjustment variables printing Test Pattern 2 Print: Check Ptn.2 Test pattern printing Test Pattern 3 Print: Check Ptn.3 Test pattern printing Leak Check * Print: Leak Check Ptn. Air leak check pattern printing Print : ? [Paper Feed ∇] Print : ? Note "*": Once you have removed or replaced the Head, Damper, Ink Holder and/or Ink tube, execute this mode and make certain that there is no dot missing. If dot missing occurs, check the coupling screw tightening torque and tube insertion and check for air leak. Adjustment Cleaning End [Enter] Std. KK1 End [Enter] Std. KK2 Cleaning End [Enter] Init.Fill Cleaning INK CHARGING End Figure 5-60. Cleaning Menu Transition 5.2.5 Print Item Std. KK0 Contents Cleaning: Std. KK0 Normal cleaning cycle KK2 C H E C K P O IN T [Enter] Self-diagnostic Function [SelecType] Check Ptn. ? Printing end [Paper Feed ∆] [SelecType] Check Ptn. 2 ? Printing end [Paper Feed ∆] [SelecType] Check Ptn. 3 ? Printing end [Paper Feed ∆] Adj.Variable ? [SelecType] [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] [Enter] Adjust Print [Enter] Printing Pattern Figure 5-61. Printing Menu Transition 259 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.6 Parameter This item relates to update of adjustment parameters. Table 5-27 lists parameter items and Figure 5-62 shows parameter menu transition. [SelecType] Parameter : ? Initialize ? Parameter : ? Update ? Parameter : ? Display. ? To parameter initialization Table 5-27. Parameter Items Item Contents Initialize Initialize adjustment parameters Update Input adjustment parameter values Display Display adjustment parameter values [SelecType] [SelecType] To parameter update To parameter display Figure 5-62. Parameter Menu Transition Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 260 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.2.6.1 Parameter Initialize Table 5-28. Item Execute parameter initialization. C H E C K P O IN T Without replacing the relevant parts, never use this function to initialize the counter; otherwise, control after that will not agree with the condition of the printer mechanism. Waste ink record initialization CR motor record initialization PF motor record initialization Lever record initialization Cover record initialization Ink lever record initialization Contents Waste ink counter CR motor round trip count PF motor travel Paper presser lever up and down count Cover Open/Close count Ink lever up and down count Table 5-28. Item All initialization Capping position initialization PF resolution initialization Serial number initialization Head record initialization Wiper record initialization Rubbing record initialization Adjustment Contents CR motor round trip count PF motor travel Head ink discharge count (Each color) Cleaning count The number of printed sheets Ink volume counter Waste ink counter Cutting count Gap adjustment value CR origin compensation value (Capping position) PF origin compensation value Head slide origin compensation value Front sensor position compensation value Rear sensor position compensation value Edge sensor longitudinal position compensation value Edge sensor lateral position compensation value Cutter longitudinal position compensation value Flushing position PF distance correction 1 ~ 3 Serial number Wiping count Rubbing count Ink tube round trip count Paper presser lever up and down count Cover Open/Close count Ink lever up and down count CR origin compensation value (Capping position) PF distance correction1 ~ 3 Serial number Head ink discharge count (Each color)) Wiping count Rubbing count Self-diagnostic Function 261 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A [Enter] Ini. : ? All Ini. : ? Capping Position Initialize OK? [Pause] Init. Parameter End Ini. : ? PF Resolution Ini. : ? Serial No. Ini. : ? Head Record Ini. : ? Wiping Record Ini. : ? Rubbing Record Ini. : ? WasteInk Record Ini. : ? CR Motor Record Ini. : ? PF Motor Record Ini. : ? Lever Record Ini. : ? Cover Record Ini. : ? Ink Lever Rec. Parameter : ? Initialize ? Figure 5-63. Menu Transition for Parameter Initialization Adjustment Self-diagnostic Function 262 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3 Mechanism Adjustment 5.3.2 CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment 5.3.1 Overview This section describes the mechanism adjustments you need to perform when mechanical parts have been replaced or removed. The relationship between parts and required adjustments are as follows. This adjustment is necessary for service operations that require you to remove/loosen the CR Motor or CR Steel Belt. When replacing or re-installing the CR Steel Belt, you need to confirm the tension of the CR Steel Belt. Tighten or loosen the screws on the Driven Pulley to increase or decrease the tension. † No special tools are required. NOTE: For details, refer to “CR Motor ASSY (p.180)”. Table 5-29. Required Mechanism Adjustments Item Description See CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment At reinstallation of the CR Timing Belt, adjust its tension as specified. p.263 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment At reinstallation of the PF Timing Belt, adjust its tension as specified. p.264 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate Position Adjustment At reinstallation of the P_THICK sensor or P_THICK_0.3 sensor, make adjustment for paper thickness detection. p.265 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment Adjust the mounting position of the Cover Sensor. p.267 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment Adjust the CR Encoder mounting position on the CR Unit, using the dedicated tool. p.268 Cutter Positioning Adjustment Adjust the cutter position, using the dedicated tool. p.269 Paper Cutting Position Check Check the result of the adjustment made above. p.271 Paper Cutting Position Check Adjust the PF Encoder position, using the dedicated tool. p.272 Head Slant Adjustment (Mechanical Adjustment) Adjust the Print Head slant using the self-diagnostic mode and by mechanical adjustment. p.247 Adjustment CR Tension Screw CR Timing Belt CR Tension Bracket Mechanism Adjustment Figure 5-64. CR Timing Belt Tension Adjustment 263 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.3 PF Timing Belt Tension Adjustment This adjustment is necessary for service operations that require you to remove/loosen the PF Motor or PF Belt. When replacing or re-installing the PF Belt, you need to confirm the tension of the PF Belt. † Adjusting tools: Tension Gauge #F770 † Standard: 2,200g ± 10% (Tension in the PF motor mounting plate moving direction.) NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “PF Motor (p.185)”. Loosen the screws (x4) fixed to the PF motor mounting board and set the tension gauge to the hole on the board and pull to the movable direction. Fixed screws Fixed screws 2.200g ± 10% Figure 5-65. PF Belt Tension Adjustment Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 264 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.4 P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate Position Adjustment From around the sensor, insert the thickness gauge and set the Paper Set Lever in the paper holding position. Once you have changed the position of the Sensor Mounting Plate on which the P_THICK_0.3/P_THICK Sensor is mounted, make the following adjustment using the self-diagnostic function. Driven Roller † Adjusting tools: Thickness gauges (0.3, 0.4 / 0.8, 0.9mm) NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “P_THICK Sensor/ P_THICK Sensor_0.3 ASSY (p.190)”. 1. 2. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) PF Grid Roller Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 3. Display “Test: Sensor”: [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2 4. Display “Sen: Paper”: [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2 5. Push down the Paper Set Lever rearward (to “release” position) and make certain that the value on the LCD changes to “10”. 6. Set the 0.4-mm thickness gauge between the PF Grid Roller and the Driven Roller near the detection arm on the paper transport path, and bring down the Paper Set Lever toward you (to the “paper holding” position). (See Figure 5-66) At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “01”, loosen the screw securing the mounting plate for the P_THICK_0.3 Sensor (left). Then slide the mounting plate to a position where the LCD shows “01”, tighten the screw and remove the 0.4-mm thickness gauge. 7. Set the 0.3-mm thickness gauge the same way as above and make certain that the value on the LCD is “00”. At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “00”, loosen the screw securing the mounting plate for the P_THICK_0.3 Sensor (left). Then slide the mounting plate to a position where the LCD shows “00”, tighten the screw and check the previous step again. HP side Figure 5-66. Gauge Setting Position Detect arm P_THICK Sensor P_THICK_0.3 Sensor P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Mounting Plate Figure 5-67. P_THICK Sensor / P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Position Adjustment Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 265 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 8. Set the 0.9-mm thickness gauge between the PF Grid Roller and the Driven Roller near the detection arm on the paper transport path, and bring down the Paper Set Lever toward you (to the “paper holding” position). At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “11”, loosen the screw securing the mounting plate for the P_THICK Sensor (right). Then slide the mounting plate to a position where the LCD shows “11”, tighten the screw and remove the 0.9-mm thickness gauge. 9. Set the 0.8-mm thickness gauge the same way as above and make certain that the value on the LCD is “01”. At this point, if the value on the LCD is not “01”, loosen the screw securing the mounting plate for the P_THICK Sensor (right). Then slide the mounting plate to a position where the LCD shows “01”, tighten the screw and check the previous step again. 10. Turn the power switch Off, then after disconnecting the power cable, install the H Top Cover. Table 5-30. Mounting Plate P_THICK_0.3 Sensor Mounting Plate (left) Gauge 0.3 mm 0.4 mm P_THICK Sensor Mounting Plate (right) – C A U T IO N Adjustment 0.8 mm 0.9 mm Condition LCD Indication Paper thickness 0.3 mm or below 00 Paper thickness 0.4 ∼ 0.6 mm 01 Paper thickness 0.7mm or above 11 Lever in “Up” position (Paper released) 10 Lever in "Down" position (Paper held) 00 Take care not to bend thickness gauges by, say, dropping. This adjustment requires an accuracy to units of 0.1 mm. Mechanism Adjustment 266 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.5 Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Adjustment When removing/replacing the Cover Assembly or the Front Cover, verify the sensor operation using the Self-Diagnostic mode as described below. Cover Sensor ASSY NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “Cover Sensor ASSY” (p.197). 1. 2. Remove the Tube cover. See “Cover Sensor ASSY” (p.197). Start the Self-diagnostic Function: Power OFF → [Paper Feed ∆] + [Paper Feed ∇]+[Cut/Eject] → Power ON 3. Display “Test: Sensor”: [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x2 4. Display “Sen: Cover”: [SelecType >] → [Paper Feed ∇] x1 5. Open and close the Front Cover, checking the LCD to make sure the message changes depending on the Front Cover position. Table 5-31. Cover Sensor Assembly Check Front Cover 6. LCD Message Open Sen: Cover Open Close Sen: Cover Close If the correct message does not appear or any other message appears, verify the Cover Sensor is installed correctly and check the operation again. C H E C K P O IN T Adjustment Figure 5-68. Adjusting the Cover Sensor ASSY Mounting Position Acceptance Criterion: The timing for cover opening is such that there is no gap between the front cover and the printer body which permits entrance of your finger. Mechanism Adjustment 267 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.6 CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position Adjustment This adjustment should definitely be done when the CR encoder sensor is removed or replaced. 2 screws † Adjusting tools: CR Encoder Sensor mounting jig #F799 NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “CR Encoder Sensor ASSY (p.178)”. 1. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) 2. Remove the two screws securing the CR Board Unit in the Carriage Unit, and take out the CR Board Unit toward the front. (See Figure 5-69) 3. Move the Carriage Unit to the center by manual operation. 4. Loosen the screw securing the CR Encoder Sensor Board, and set the CR ENC Sensor positioning jig between the CR Encoder Sensor and the CR Guide Rail. (See Figure 5-70) 5. 6. Push the CR Encoder Sensor to the exclusive tool side (CR Guide Rail side), then tighten the CR Encoder Sensor mounting screw securely. CR Board Unit Figure 5-69. Adjusting the CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position 1/2 CR Guide Rail Move the Carriage Unit to the right or left manually and recheck the mounting position of the CR Encoder Sensor. (Check at 3 positions) C H E C K P O IN T CR Encoder Sensor mounting jig In this adjustment, use the CR Encoder mounting jig for exclusive use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the CR Encoder mounting jig designed for any other printer models. CR Encoder Scale (Timing Fence) CR Encoder Sensor Figure 5-70. Adjusting the CR Encoder Sensor Mounting Position 2/2 Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 268 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.7 Cutter Positioning Adjustment This adjustment should definitely be mad if the following parts are removed. Parts Adjustment Items Cutter Solenoid Assy 1. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment 2. Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment Paper Guide L 1. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment This adjustment is intended to install the cutter at a proper position and height relative to the step for the cutter on the Paper Guide L. The number of adjustment items required depends on the parts replaced. Carry out work by referring to the table above. † Adjusting tools: Cutter positioning jig #F800 NOTE: For disassembly and assembly procedure, refer to “Cutter Holder ASSY (p.175)”. For adjustments at replacing the Cover Sensor ASSY, make the Paper Guide L up and down adjustment first and then make the Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment. C H E C K P O IN T Paper Guide L up and down adjustment Figure 5-71. Cutter Positioning Adjustment 1. Remove the H Top Cover. (p.165) NOTE: For Stylus Pro 9600, remove also the H Top Cover (p.165) and the Tube Cover (p.193). 2. Open the Front Cover, and remove the cutter. 3. Return the CR Unit to the cap position and set the cutter positioning tool at the right end of the Paper Guide L. (See Figure 5-73) 4. Loosen the screws securing the Paper Guide L. Cut portion of I/H Frame NOTE: 3 screws for Stylus Pro 7600 / 5 screws for Stylus Pro 9600 C H E C K P O IN T To loosen the screw at the left end of the Paper Guide L, pass the screwdriver through the cut portion of the I/H Frame Top Plate. (See Figure 5-72) Figure 5-72. Removing the screw for Paper Guide L (at left end) Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 269 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 5. Revision A Slide the CR Unit onto the cutter positioning jig, shift the Paper Guide L up or down to a position where the plate of the Cutter Holder ASSY comes in contact with the projection in the lower part of the jig, and tighten the screw. „ For replacement of Cutter Solenoid ASSY: After completion of the Paper Guide L up and down adjustment, loosen the four screws securing the Cutter Holder ASSY to the CR Unit, press the front end of the Cutter Holder ASSY gently against the tool and tighten the four screws. (See Figure 5-74) 6. Set the jig at the left end of the Paper Guide L and make the same adjustment and checking as step 4 ~ 5 above. 7. Move the carriage to around the center and make checking again. C H E C K P O IN T Cutter positioning jig „ In this adjustment, use the cutter positioning jig for exclusive use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the cutter positioning jig designed for any other printer models. Plate of Cutter Holder ASSY Projection Figure 5-73. Paper Guide L up and down adjustment Cutter Holder securing screws x4 „ The positions where to set the jig for checking and adjustment should be the right and left ends as close to the frame as possible. At any position where the Paper Guide L is not supported, the adjustment can not be made properly because of a deflection of the Paper Guide L. „ After successful completion of the adjustment above, proceed to the next item “Paper Cutting Position Check” (p.271). Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment Cutter positioning jig Cutter Holder ASSY Figure 5-74. Cutter Holder ASSY height adjustment 270 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.7.1 Paper Cutting Position Check Check the paper cutting position which has been adjusted as instructed in the previous section, by cutting paper actually. † Cutter Positioning Adjustment 1. Set paper (minimum size: about 10 cm wide x 20 cm) in the paper path along the paper setting position on the right side of the printer, then move the paper set lever to the front to hold the paper. 2. Move the CR manually to the right edge of the paper, then lower the cutter manually. 3. While holding the bottom edge of the paper with one hand, cut the paper with the cutter. 4. set a gauge with minimum measuring units of 0.5 mm at the edge of the cutter level difference on the sub-platen and check if the distance from the edge of the cutter level difference to the actual paper cutting position is within 0.5 mm (+0.1/–0.2mm). 5. If the measuring results are outside the standard, loosen the 3 screws holding the paper guide L, then carry out fine adjustment of the paper guide L’s assembly position. C H E C K P O IN T 6. Paper Carriage „ The length from the edge of the cutter level difference to the front edge of the paper where it was actually cut should be within 0.5 mm (+0.1/–0.2mm). „ If you are adjusting the assembly position of the paper guide L, the installation screws that are loosened should be the absolute minimum number of screws necessary to adjust the position. If a large number of screws is loosened, the assembly position of the paper guide L will shift a great distance from the original adjustment position, so caution should be exercised. 0.3mm ∼ 0.5mm or 0.5mm (+0.1/-0.2mm) Cutter Gap between the cut paper front edge and the edge of cutter level In the same way, set paper on the left side of the printer, cut the paper manually and measure the length from the cutter level difference to the front edge of the paper. If the measurement results are not within the standard, loosen about 3 of the screws holding the paper guide L and carry out fine adjustment of the paper guide L’s assembly position. Figure 5-75. Paper Cutting Position Check Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 271 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.8 PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment This adjustment is performed to set the distance between the PF roller shaft (grid roller) and PF encoder sensor in the proper position. Through this adjustment, the position of the PF encoder sensor's emitter and receptor are set properly with respect to the slits in the loop scale for the PF motor. Check the clearance here † Adjusting tools: PF ENC Installation Position Adjustment Tool #F798 1. Loosen the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor, then put the round hole of the PF Encoder mounting jig on the PF Roller Shaft and fit the notched end against contour of the PF Encoder Sensor's emitter (outside). 2. Move the PF Encoder Sensor up and down so that it is in a position where the clearance between the contour of the PF Encoder Sensor and the notch in the PF Encoder mounting jig becomes uniform, then tighten the one screw securing the PF Encoder Sensor. C H E C K P O IN T Screw In this adjustment, use the PF Encoder mounting jig for exclusive use with Stylus Pro 7600 / 9600: do not use the PF Encoder mounting jig designed for any other printer models. PF Encoder Sensor mounting jig Figure 5-76. PF Encoder Sensor Installation Position Adjustment Adjustment Mechanism Adjustment 272 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 5.3.9 USB ID Writing C H E C K P O IN T Adjustment Even when you have replaced the Main Board, there is no need of new setting of the USB ID, since the USB ID is backed up if parameter backup can be executed. When new setting is to be performed, use the dedicated service utility. Mechanism Adjustment 273 6 CHAPTER MAINTENANCE EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 6.1 Overview C A U T IO N This section explains necessary maintenance items and their details for this product. Basically for this product, service technicians are required to visit the user’s location where the EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 is used, and perform necessary maintenance/ service on-site while following the precautions below. Service technicians have to be extra careful not to cause any accident to the product or the user’s environment. W A R N IN G „ Since the power switch is mounted on the secondary circuit of „ „ „ „ the power supply circuit, unless otherwise specified, always turn off the printer using the power switch. After all moving parts have stopped, wait several seconds and then disconnect the power cable from the AC plug socket to prevent electric shock or circuit damage during service operations. „ The cover open sensor for detecting the open/close condition of the front cover has an interlock switch that functions as a safety device. Therefore, it is prohibited to turn off this switch. „ A lithium battery is installed on the MAIN Board of this printer. Be sure to observe the following instructions when servicing the battery: „ „ „ Keep the battery away from any metal. „ Do not install the battery in the wrong direction. (This may cause burning or explosion.) „ „ „ Do not heat the battery or put it near fire. „ Do not set the C472 MAIN board directly on top of any object which is conductive. „ „ Be careful not to let ink get into your eyes or your skin. If ink gets in your eye, rinse them immediately with water. Maintenance Overview When performing service and maintenance operations, sufficient space should be assured surrounding the place where the work is performed. The printer should be set in a place where there is no vibration, and where it is level and stable. This machine is extremely heavy, so adequate caution should be exercised when handling it. (If you are taking or reinstalling the body and stand, there should be 2 or more persons doing the work.) If operations are performed which involve the removal of ink system parts, there is danger of the product or the floor, etc. in the place where it is installed becoming soiled, so sheets, etc. should be spread on the floor, etc. during the work o removing parts related to the ink channels. If you are handling electrical circuit boards, to prevent destruction of the elements by static electricity, the elements on the board should not be touched with bare hands. If necessary, take the necessary measures to prevent static discharge, such as wearing a ground strap, when performing such work. If you are removing the various covers and operating the printer in that state, adequate caution should be used so as not to be injured by high speed operating parts such as the PS fan. The cutter blade is extremely sharp, care should be taken not to be injured by it. The an ultra-hardened blade is used for the cutter blade, and materially, this item is extremely brittle, so it should not be bumped against any metal or other parts on the printer when handled. If the printer that has already been installed needs to be packed and transported again, first make certain that the print head has been capped properly with the power to the printer turned off. Then remove all the ink cartridges and install all the packing materials as referred to in the Start-Up Guide or Assembly and Setup Guide supplied with the printer. 275 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 6.1.1 Periodic Maintenance Items and Product Life Information † Periodic Maintenance Items The printer uses sensors and counters to determine when consumable items need to be replaced. When a consumable part has reached its predetermined end-of-life according to the corresponding counter, a message appears. See Table 6-1 for parts which require periodic replacement. † Product Life Information Table 6-1 shows the product life about the printer body, each mechanism and various parts. Information regarding to the product life can be checked by the following way. † Panel Setting: “Printer Status Menu” The amount of ink remaining is indicated on the LCD. (“F*****E” - F = full, E = empty, and each asterisk * represents a percentage of the total ink.) Also, the counters which record these values can be initialized by “Maintenance Mode 2”. C A U T IO N Do not perform the counter initialization without replacing the corresponding parts and checking their operation. Since the counters for “Waste Ink Life” and “Ink Remaining Quantity” influence printer operations, do not clear them unnecessarily. Maintenance Overview 276 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 6-1. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 - Lives of Periodically Replaced Components and Maintenance Print Volume (# of sheet) Product Life (Specification) Cutter SPro7600/9600 1000 pages Film media*7 2000 pages Coated paper*7 Maintenance Tank SPro9600 SPro7600 Cleaning Unit SPro9600 SPro7600 CR Motor SPro9600 SPro7600 PF Motor SPro9600 SPro7600 Print Head SPro9600 SPro7600 *5 28 Billion shots/nozzle – – – 5000p*1 5000 pages 8000p*1 10000 pages 11000p*2 18000p*2 20000 pages SPro9600 50000 pages SPro7600 20000p 2.5Million passes*3 50000p 3.25Million passes*4 Warning message – MAINTENANCE TANK ALMOST FULL Error message MAINTENANCE nnnn REQ SERVICE REQ nnnnnnnn – MAINTENANCE TANK FULL *6 – – – – – – 0040 0002 – 0020 – – – 00000101 – – Reset operation – (Counter cleared automatically by replacing it with new ♦Counter clear one) MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS CLEANER Paper cutter Maintenance Tank 1. Pump&Cap Assy (CRU) (CRU) 2. Flushing Box 3. Wiper Parts to be replaced Required adjustments Maintenance (Not required) (Not required) (Not required) Overview ♦Counter clear MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS CR MOTOR At first SR: (& check Ink tubes/ FFC conditions) 1. CR Motor 2. Driven Pulley At second SR: 1. CR Motor 2. Driven Pulley 3. Ink tubes 4. FFC 1. CR Belt Tension ADJ 2. Adj: Bi-D 3. Adj: Uni-D 4. Adj: Sponge Pos. ♦Counter clear ♦Counter clear MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS PF MM2: CLEAR COUNTERS MOTOR HEAD *(as required) • Check the condition of loop scale (worn, etc.) • Check the condition of PF Encoder (foreign matters or dust) *(as required) 1. PF Belt Tension ADJ 2. Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B 1. Adj: Input Rank 2. INK CHARGING 3. Adj: Head Slant 4. Adj: Feed Adj.+T&B 5. Adj: Sponge Pos. 6. Adj: Bi-D 7. Adj: Uni-D 277 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Note : In the table above, the values by white characters with black background represent the specified lives and the values by italic characters with bold frame represent standard lives (can vary with the conditions under which the printer is actually used). Note "*1": Continuous printing with “Plain paper / Speed” mode on B0 size paper. "*2": Continuous printing with “Plain paper / Speed” mode on A1 size paper. "*3": Print in 360x360/MF/Bi-D mode on B0 paper. "*4": Print in 360x360/MF/Bi-D mode on A1 paper. "*5": The life of PF motor is counted based on the paper feeding distance at printing operation (23000 m). "*6": Error condition and the printer is not ready to print until the error is cleared by replacing the maintenance tank to new one. "*7": EPSON standard media and the cutting operation is made in “3 steps cutting” mode. Maintenance Overview 278 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 6.1.2 Important Maintenance Items During Service Operations Check the following items during printer maintenance/service and perform any necessary operations. Table 6-2. Items to be Checked During Maintenance/Service Items Check Points Remedy Lower Paper Guide and the surface of the Subplaten Make sure no paper, dust, or foreign objects are attached or have accumulated. Cleaning (If there is an ink stain, wipe with dry, clean cloth after cleaning the ink stain with damp cloth.) Timing Fence (Slit plate for CR encoder detection.) Is there any accumulation or adhesion of paper dust or foreign matter? Clean If there is any damage, replace the part. Rail on the CR guide frame Make sure there are no foreign objects attached. Cleaning P_REAR sensor and P_FRONT sensor surface Make sure no paper, dust, or foreign objects are attached or have accumulated. Cleaning Maintenance Overview 279 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 6.2 Lubrication and Glue 6.2.1 Lubricating the CR Guide Rail In this printer, as necessary, the lubricants specified below should be used for oiling and adhesion during disassembly and assembly operations. Table 6-3. Grease and Glue Application Type Grease Glue Name Amount Company Part # Super-Multi Oil #32 n/a Idemitsu n/a G-26 (Molicoat EM60L) 40g (n/a) EPSON (Dow Corning Asia) 1,000g EPSON Screw lock Location Carriage rail bearings † Lubricant: Super-Multi Oil #32 (Idemitsu) Apply lubricant to the four points as shown below on the CR Guide Rail (carriage roller running surface). C H E C K P O IN T Before applying lubricant, clean the surface. B702600001 Other parts on mechanism B730200200 Screw lock (blue) CR Guide Rail C A U T IO N Do not apply any other oils, lubricants, or glues than those described in this manual; otherwise printer parts may be damaged or their useful life may be shortened. Figure 6-1. Lubricating Positions on the CR Guide Rail Maintenance Lubrication and Glue 280 7 CHAPTER APPENDIX EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 7.1 Connectors Table 7-1. Main Board Connectors List (continued) † Main Board (C472 MAIN) Table 7-1. Main Board Connectors List CN.No. Pins Color CN1 12 White CN2 CN3 Connected to Remarks P/S board Lock type 16 PANEL FFC, lock type 36 H-UDI36 Yellow D/A_OUT CN4 5 CN5 90 ROM_DIMM CN6 21 CSIC FFC CN7 5 S_I/O(DEBUGER) (Not used) FFC, lock type Red CN8 24 CR_FFC1 24 CR_FFC3 FFC, lock type CN10 24 CR_FFC2 FFC, lock type CN11 36 IEEE1284 (parallel port) CN12 4 USB CN13 36 TYPE_B CN14 3 White CR_MOT Lock type, with relay connector CN15 2 White PF_MOT Lock type, with relay connector 5 White PF_ENC CN17 4 White PUMP_MOT With relay connector 2 Blue P/S_FAN CN19 2 Black FAN1 With relay connector CN20 2 Yellow FAN2 With relay connector CN21 2 Red FAN3 CN22 3 Blue P_THICK0.3 CN23 3 Yellow COVER_L CN24 3 White CN25 3 Black CN26 3 Red P_THICK CN27 4 Black P_REAR Yellow P_FRONT CN28 4 4 Red Color Connected to USB2.0 Remarks Right side (AC side) CN36 8 IEEE1394 (Not used) CN37 2 HDD_PS (Not used) † Panel Unit Table 7-2. Panel Unit Connectors List CN.No. Pins CN1 16 Color Connected to Main Board (CN7) Remarks FCC, lock type † C472 CR Board * Stylus Pro 9600 only CN.No. Pins Color Connected to CN1 24 Main Board (CN8) CN2 24 Main Board (CN10) FFC, lock type CN3 17 Print Head1 FFC, lock type CN4 30 Print Head2 FFC, lock type CN5 4 Black P_Edge Sensor CN6 5 White CR Encoder Sensor CN7 2 White Cutter Solenoid CN8 4 Black Main Board (CN10) Remarks FFC, lock type FFC, lock type CR_ORG I/H_LEVER (Not used) (Not used) HD_SLID CN30 15 CN31 2 White H_FAN CN33 3 White RESET Appendix 4 Table 7-3. C472 CR Board Connectors List (Not used) CN18 CN29 Pins CN35 (Not used) CN9 CN16 CN.No. ROLL_UNIT (option unit) * Stylus Pro 9600 only Connectors 282 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A † C472 SUB-B Board Table 7-4. C472 SUB-B Board Connectors List CN.No. Pins CN1 20 Color Connected to CN2 2 CN3 7 CSIC Relay Board (Black) FFC CN4 7 CSIC Relay Board (Light Black) FFC CN5 7 CSIC Relay Board (Cyan) FFC FFC Main Board (CN6) White Remarks FFC I/H Lever Sensor CN6 7 CSIC Relay Board (Light Cyan) CN7 7 CSIC Relay Board (Magenta) FFC CN8 7 CSIC Relay Board (Light Magenta) FFC CN9 7 CSIC Relay Board (Yellow) FFC CN10 7 Maintenance Tank Relay Board FFC † Power Supply Board Table 7-5. Power Supply Board Connector List CN.No. Pins Color CN001 12 White Main Board (CN1) Lock type CN301 2 White AC Inlet Lock type Appendix Connected to Remarks Connectors 283 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Figure 7-1. Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Connectors Appendix Connectors 284 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 7.2 Component Layout Will be established by the next revision. Appendix Component Layout 285 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 7.3 Circuit Diagrams The circuit diagrams of the following circuit boards are shown on the following pages: „ C472 MAIN BOARD „ C472SUB BOARD „ C472SUB-B BOARD Appendix Circuit Diagrams 286 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 7.4 Exploded Diagrams Appendix Exploded Diagrams 292 127 110 120 108 100 111 109 107 112 109 113 126 115 121 101 128 114 122 116 117 X 118 102 123 119 131 103 103 104 129 130 106 105 125 124 124 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.1 Rev.01 C472-CASE-011 158x 6 157 150 x 10 159 160 x 6 A 161 153 161 154 B 152 153 155 152 B 151 151 151 151 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.2 156 Rev.01 C472-CASE-021 Y 202 Y 203 D J Q 200 including 201,202 201 T W K A N X U O C L PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.3 Rev.01 C472-ELEC-011 B B 301 300 Y Y D J Q T W K A N X U O C L PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.4 Rev.01 C472-POWE-011 B B 500 507 C 501 502 503 505 506 510 504 D 509 508 511 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.5 Rev.01 C472-MECH-011 556 550 554 557 F G 551 E 555 552 558 559 563 553 568 569 562 568 569 567 568 569 556 561 560 570 568 569 568 569 570 568 569 570 568 569 570 564 570 570 565 570 H 566 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.6 Rev.01 I C472-MECH-021 605 K 606 606 608 607 L 602 600 609x 5 604 620 601 M 610 J 618 617 611 616 615 603 x 34 613 O N 606 612 M PX-7000 / EPSONSTYLUS PRO 7600 No.7 614 Rev.01 C472-MECH-031 619 669 670 671 672 650 655 661 656 660 659 661 652 x 8 658 662 663 667 657 x 11 651 653 668 654 P 665 667 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.8 Rev.01 C472-MECH-041 664 666 709 705 706 708 706 707 708 708 700 703 704 710 712 701 Q 702 711 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.9 Rev.01 C472-MECH-051 753 750 R 751 S P T 752 S R 754 755 756 x 7 757x 7 761 760 758 U 755 763 762 759 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.10 Rev.01 C472-MECH-061 H G I F E V 813 809 810 811 808 V 807 812 806 805 800 804 801 802 803 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.11 W Rev.01 C472-MECH-071 850 851 856 851 853 855 853 854 PX-7000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 7600 No.12 Rev.01 C472-MECH-081 127 110 108 120 109 100 107 111 109 112 113 126 115 121 101 114 122 117 128 116 X 123 118 102 119 131 103 103 106 104 129 125 105 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.1 Rev.01 C473-CASE-011 120 158x 8 159 160 x 11 161 150 x 10 157 A 161 154 153 161 B 152 155 153 B 152 153 B 152 162 156 151 x 4 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.2 Rev.01 C473-CASE-021 Y 202 Y 203 D J Q 200 including 201,202 201 T W K A PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.3 Rev.01 N X U O C L B B C473-ELEC-011 B 301 Y 300 Y D J Q T W K A PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.4 Rev.01 N X U O C473-POWE-011 C L B B B 500 501 502 507 C 503 505 506 510 504 D 509 508 511 511 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.5 Rev.01 C473-MECH-011 556 550 554 557 F G E 551 555 552 558 559 563 553 568 569 562 568 569 567 568 569 556 561 560 570 568 569 568 569 570 568 569 570 568 569 570 564 570 570 565 570 H 566 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.6 Rev.01 I C473-MECH-021 605 K 606 606 608 607 L 602 600 609 x 2 604 620 601 610 M J 618 619 611 617 616 615 603 x 32 613 O N 614 606 612 M PX-9000 / EPSONSTYLUS PRO 9600 No.7 Rev.01 C473-MECH-031 669 670 671 672 650 661 661 655 656 659 660 661 652 x 8 666 662 663 651 653 654 658 668 657 x 14 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.8 Rev.01 P 665 C473-MECH-041 664 709 705 706 708 706 707 708 708 700 703 704 710 712 701 Q 702 711 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.9 Rev.01 C473-MECH-051 H G I F E V 813 809 810 811 808 V 807 812 806 805 800 804 801 803 802 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.11 W Rev.01 C473-MECH-071 850 851 856 851 853 855 853 854 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.12 Rev.01 C473-MECH-081 # 909 SCREW SET 900 901 902 X5 904 905 907 903 908 902 906 903 PX-9000 / EPSON STYLUS PRO 9600 No.13 Rev.01 C473-MECH-091 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 7.5 ASP List (Parts List) Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued) Ref No. 128 7.5.1 ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 Part Name LABEL 129 LABEL 130 LABEL Ref No. 100 131 LABEL L SIDE COVER ASSY. 150 FCC CLIP 101 I/H COVER ASSY. 151 RUBBER FOOT 102 I/H COVER ASSY. 152 FAN DUCT 103 PLASTIC STOPPER E5 153 VACUUM FAN 104 FULONT COVER FUICRUM PIN L 154 VACUUM FAN 2 CABLE 105 FRONT COVER ASSY. 155 VACUUM FAN 1 CABLE 106 FRONT COVER SUPPLEMENT 156 CR LOCKER ASSY. 107 ROLL TRAY L ASSY. 157 P REAR SENSOR ASSY. 108 H TOP COVER ASSY. 158 FLAT CLAMP(FCR-30-V0) 109 CATCH 159 RECYCL CLAMP(RLWS-1515TL-V0) 110 TOP COVER 160 RECYCL CLAMP 111 DAMPER DISK(TOPCOVER) 161 SILENT DUCT 112 UNDULATE WASHER(TOPCOVER) 200 BOARD ASSY. 113 PANEL UNIT ASSY.(OVERSEAS) 201 GROUNDING PLATE 114 BRANK PANEL 202 GUIDE 115 LEVER BRIND CAP 203 GROUNDING PLATE 116 PRSSURE LEVER KNOB 500 MOUNTING PLATE 117 PANEL TAPE CABLE 501 SCALE 118 ROLL TRAY R ASSY. 502 TAPE 119 R SIDE COVER ASSY. 503 ENCODER FLANG 120 LABEL 504 X REDUCTION BELT 121 LABEL 505 BOARD ASSY. 122 LABEL 506 SLIT GUIDE 123 LABEL 507 PF ENCODER CABLE 124 LABEL 508 PF MOTOR 125 LABEL 509 PF MOTER CABLE 1 ASSY. 126 LABEL 510 EDGE SADDLE 127 LOGO PLATE 13X54 511 PARTITION PLATE Appendix Part Name ASP List (Parts List) 317 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued) Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued) Ref No. 550 CUTTER CAP Ref No. 611 551 CUTTER SOLENOID SPRING 612 PRESS LEVER SPRING 552 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. 613 HD SLIDE ASSY. 553 CUTTER SPRING 614 CR HP CABLE ASSY. 554 P EDGE SENSOR ASSY. 615 CABLE CLAMP 555 EDGE SENSOR BASE ASSY. 616 EDGE CLAMP 556 FG CABLE 617 PRESS IDLE GEAR 557 CR ENC ASSY. 618 PRESS SHAFT TRAY 558 CR LOCK KICKER 619 PRESS TRANSMISSION GEAR 559 TILAP 620 PRESS LEVER 560 H ADJUST LEVER B 650 OUTLET ROLLER ASSY. 561 H ADJUST LEVER 651 PAPER GUIDE L2 562 DAMPER STOPPER 652 SUB PRATEN B 563 DAMPER POSITION BOAD 653 SUB PRATEN A 564 PRINT HEAD 654 PARTITION PLATE P GUIDE L 565 HEAD TAPE CABLE 1 655 PAETITION PLATE L 566 HEAD TAPE CABLE 2 656 POROUS PAD CAP B 567 SLIDE GEAR 657 PROUSPAD C 568 CONNECTING SCREW 658 PAETITION PLATE R ASSY. 569 O RING 659 TAPE 570 DAMPER ASSY. 660 POROUS PAD 600 CR MOTOR 661 PAPER GUIDE WIRE 601 CR MOTOR CABLE ASSY.1 662 POROUS PAD 602 T FENCE SPRING 663 TAPE 603 PRSSURE SPRING 664 PCB ASSY.I/C 604 T FENCE 665 MT FFC1 605 P THICK SENSOR CABLE ASSY 666 POROUS PAD ASSY. 606 PHOTO SENSOR 667 SCREW MANUAL CUTTER 607 P THICK2 SENNSOR CABLE ASSY. 668 LABEL 608 CR BELT 669 LABEL 609 MINI CLAMP 670 LABEL 610 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY. 671 LABEL Appendix Part Name ASP List (Parts List) Part Name TENSION SPRING 318 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued) Table 7-6. ASP List for Stylus Pro 7600 (continued) Ref No. 672 LABEL Ref No. 804 700 FLUSHING BOX ASSY. 805 TUBE 701 PUMP MOTER JANCTION CABLE 806 TUBE 702 TR CONNECTER 807 TUBE FILME 703 POROUS PAD 808 SUS SUPPORT 704 CLEANER 809 FILME 705 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 1 810 FLAT CORE(SSC-40-12) 706 POMP SHAFT STOPPER 811 FILME 707 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 2 812 CR FFC 1 ASSY. 708 PG IDLE GEAR A 813 BOARD ASSY. 709 PG IDLE GEAR B 850 FLANGE 710 PUMP CAP ASSY. 851 ADAPTER 711 MOTOR 852 ROLL SHAFT 712 CAP ASSY. 853 RETAINING RING(B150300611) 750 I/H INK FFC ASSY. 854 STOPPER SHAFT 751 BOARD ASSY. 855 FLANGE 752 CSIC FFC 1 856 LABEL 753 CLAMP 300 P/S BOARD ASSY. 754 COVER SW CABLE ASSY.1 301 DC CABLE ASSY 755 DETECTOR 756 CONNECTING SCREW 757 O RING 758 I/H LEVER SW CABLE ASSY.1 759 I/C LOCK LEVER KNOB 760 HOLDER ASSY. 761 FRAME ASSY. 762 FAN GEAR 763 LEVER 800 TUBE 801 TUBE 802 TUBE 803 TUBE Appendix Part Name ASP List (Parts List) Part Name TUBE 319 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A 7.5.2 ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued) Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 Ref No. 100 L SIDE COVER ASSY. 101 I/H COVER ASSY. 102 I/H COVER ASSY. 103 PLASTIC STOPPER E5 104 FULONT COVER FUICRUM PIN L 105 FRONT COVER ASSY. 106 FRONT COVER SUPPLEMENT 107 ROLL TRAY L ASSY. 108 H TOP COVER ASSY. 109 CATCH 110 TOP COVER 111 DAMPER DISK(TOPCOVER) 112 UNDULATE WASHER(TOPCOVER) 113 PANEL UNIT ASSY.(OVERSEAS) 114 BRANK PANEL 115 LEVER BRIND CAP 116 PRSSURE LEVER KNOB 117 PANEL TAPE CABLE 118 ROLL TRAY R ASSY. 119 R SIDE COVER ASSY. 120 LABEL 121 LABEL 122 LABEL 123 LABEL 125 LABEL 126 LABEL 127 LOGO PLATE 13X54 128 LABEL 129 LABEL 131 LABEL 150 FCC CLIP Appendix Part Name ASP List (Parts List) Ref No. 151 HANDLE Part Name 152 FAN DUCT 153 VACUUM FAN 154 VACUUM FAN1 CABLE ASSY.2 155 VACUUM FAN2 CABLE ASSY.2 156 CR LOCKER ASSY. 157 P REAR SENSOR ASSY. 158 FLAT CLAMP(FCR-30-V0) 159 RECYCL CLAMP(RLWS-1515TL-V0) 160 RECYCL CLAMP 161 SILENT DUCT 162 VACUUM FAN3 CABLE ASSY.2 200 BOARD ASSY. 201 GROUNDING PLATE 202 GUIDE 203 GROUNDING PLATE 500 MOUNTING PLATE 501 SCALE 502 TAPE 503 ENCODER FLANG 504 X REDUCTION BELT 505 BOARD ASSY. 506 SLIT GUIDE 507 PF ENCODER CABLE ASSY.2 508 PF MOTOR 509 PF MOTOR CABLE ASSY.2 510 EDGE SADDLE 511 PARTITION PLATE 550 CUTTER CAP 551 CUTTER SOLENOID SPRING 552 CUTTER SOLENOID ASSY. 553 CUTTER SPRING 320 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued) Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued) Ref No. 554 P EDGE SENSOR ASSY. Part Name Ref No. 615 CABLE CLAMP Part Name 555 EDGE SENSOR BASE ASSY. 616 EDGE CLAMP 556 FG CABLE 617 PRESS IDLE GEAR 557 CR ENC ASSY. 618 PRESS SHAFT TRAY 558 CR LOCK KICKER 619 PRESS TRANSMISSION GEAR 559 TILAP 620 PRESS LEVER 560 H ADJUST LEVER B 650 OUTLET ROLLER ASSY. 561 H ADJUST LEVER 651 PAPER GUIDE L2 562 DAMPER STOPPER 652 SUB PRATEN B 563 DAMPER POSITION BOAD 653 SUB PRATEN A 564 PRINT HEAD 654 PARTITION PLATE 565 HEAD TAPE CABLE 1 655 PARTITION PLATE L 566 HEAD TAPE CABLE 2 656 POROUS PAD CAP B 567 SLIDE GEAR 657 PROUSPAD C 568 CONNECTING SCREW 658 PAETITION PLATE R ASSY. 569 O RING 659 TAPE 570 DAMPER ASSY. 660 POROUS PAD 600 CR MOTOR 661 PAPER GUIDE WIRE 601 CR MOTER CABLE ASSY.2 662 POROUS PAD 602 T FENCE SPRING 663 TAPE 603 PRSSURE SPRING 664 PCB ASSY.I/C 604 SCALE 665 M.T FFC2 605 P THICK SENSOR CABLE ASSY 666 POROUS PAD ASSY. 606 PHOTO SENSOR 668 LABEL 607 P THICK2 SENNSOR CABLE ASSY. 669 LABEL 608 CR FFC 1 ASSY. 670 LABEL 609 MINI CLAMP 671 LABEL 610 CR DRIVE PULLEY ASSY. 672 LABEL 611 TENSION SPRING 700 FLUSHING BOX ASSY. 612 PRESS LEVER SPRING 701 PUMP MOTER JANCTION CABLE 613 HD SLIDE ASSY. 702 TR CONNECTER 614 CR HP CABLE ASSY. 703 POROUS PAD Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 321 EPSON Stylus Pro 7600/9600 Revision A Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued) Ref No. 704 Table 7-7. ASP List for Stylus Pro 9600 (continued) CLEANER Part Name Ref No. 809 FILME Part Name 705 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 1 810 FLAT CORE(SSC-40-12) 706 POMP SHAFT STOPPER 811 FILME 707 PUMP REDUCTION GEAR 2 812 CR FFC 1 ASSY. 708 PG IDLE GEAR A 813 BOARD ASSY. 709 PG IDLE GEAR B 850 FLANGE 710 PUMP CAP ASSY. 851 ADAPTER 711 MOTOR 853 RETAINING RING(B150300611) 712 CAP ASSY. 854 STOPPER SHAFT 750 I/H INK FFC ASSY. 855 FLANGE 751 BOARD ASSY. 856 LABEL 752 CSIC FFC 2 900 PACKING BOX ASSY.(W) 753 CLAMP 901 STAND L ASSY. 754 COVER SW CABLE ASSY.2 902 CASTER (NON STOPPER) 755 DETECTOR 903 CASTER (STOPPER) 756 CONNECTING SCREW 904 TRAY HOOK S ASSY. 757 O RING 905 TRAY HOOK L ASSY. 758 I/H LEVER SW CABLE ASSY.1 906 OUTLET TRAY 759 I/C LOCK LEVER KNOB 907 STAND STAY 760 HOLDER ASSY. 908 STAND R ASSY. 761 FRAME ASSY. 909 SCREW ASSY. 762 FAN GEAR 300 P/S BOARD ASSY. 763 LEVER 301 DC CABLE ASSY 800 TUBE 801 TUBE 802 TUBE 803 TUBE 804 TUBE 805 TUBE 806 TUBE 807 TUBE FILME 808 SUS SUPPORT Appendix ASP List (Parts List) 322

Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 322
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Has XFA                         : No
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:6edb428c-7272-4efc-b606-71cfe8ca064f
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2002:05:27 12:56:13Z
Modify Date                     : 2004:06:23 15:46:40-04:00
Metadata Date                   : 2004:06:23 15:46:40-04:00
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 6.0
Document ID                     : uuid:4a14174b-88b2-4b97-89bc-3747db68cf3b
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : Toshiki Yamada
Title                           : StylusPro7600_9600_A.book
Author                          : Toshiki Yamada
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu